Skip to main content

Full text of "English furniture designers of the eighteenth century"

See other formats


•to 

:§ 


.CO 


-co 


/"*"""> 

© 

N*— ~.,— »*^ 


English  Furniture  Designers 


of  the 


Eighteenth  Century 


C 
I 

Q 

C 
C 


X 
E- 


_ 


English  Furniture  Designers 


of  the 


Eighteenth  Century 


by 

Constance  Simon 


London 
A.  H.  Bullen 

47,  Great  Russell  Street 


*\  IS.  /. 


NK 


2.9 


CHISWICK  PRESS  :  CHARLES  WHITTINGHAM  AND  CO. 
TOOKS  COURT,  CHANCERY   LANE,   LONDON. 


TO  MY  DEAR  PARENTS 

I  DEDICATE  THIS 
BOOK 


PREFACE 

IN  the  present  volume  I  have  endeavoured  to  trace 
the  history  of  English  furniture  from  the  reign 
of  William  and  Mary  to  the  early  years  of  the  nine- 
teenth century.  The  illustrations  (most  of  which 
have  not  appeared  before)  present  choice  examples 
of  the  Queen  Anne  School,  the  brothers  Adam,  the 
Chippendales,  Sheraton,  Shearer,  and  Hepplewhite. 
I  have  not  reproduced  any  fanciful  designs  from 
the  illustrated  catalogues  issued  by  eighteenth-cen- 
tury cabinet-makers,  but  have  preferred  to  give 
illustrations  of  pieces  that  were  actually  made  and 
are  to-day  the  cherished  possessions — by  inherit- 
ance or  purchase — of  time-honoured  families  or  dis- 
criminating collectors. 

My  thanks  are  especially  due  to  the  Earl  of 
Harewood  for  allowing  me  to  reproduce  excellent 
specimens  of  the  art  of  Robert  Adam  and  the 
great  Chippendale  from  the  collection  at  Harewood 
House,  Yorkshire.  In  the  most  generous  manner 
Sir  Henry  Hoare,  Bart.,  Mr.  James  Orrock,  Mr. 
Burghard,  Mr.  J.  E.  Schunck,  Mr.  James  Ivory, 
Mr.  Sidney  Letts  (for  whose  help  I  cannot  be 
sufficiently  grateful),  Mr.  Alfred  Davis,  Mr.  Stenson 


Vll 


Vlll 


PREFACE 


Webb,  and  the  late  Mr.  S.  T.  Smith  allowed  me 
to  make  illustrations  of  their  finest  pieces.  To  Mr. 
Guy  Dawber,  whose  knowledge  of  the  minutiae 
of  the  subject  is  unsurpassed,  and  to  Mr.  Dan. 
Gibson  I  am  much  indebted  for  assistance  in  the 
technical  portion  of  the  book.  Mr.  James  Orrock's 
views  on  old  furniture,  in  Chapter  XIII,  cannot 
fail  to  be  of  interest. 

For  the  biographies  many  new  facts  have  been 
gleaned  from  parish  registers,  the  records  at  Somer- 
set House,  and  other  original  sources.  The  careers 
of  the  second  and  third  Thomas  Chippendale  have 
been  traced  to  their  close ;  while  the  identity  of  the 
hitherto  elusive  Hepplewhite  is  for  the  first  time 
satisfactorily  established.  In  collecting  the  bio- 
graphical material  I  have  received  valuable  help 
from  Mr.  Gordon  Goodwin. 

November ;  1904. 


CONTENTS 

CHAP.  PAGE 

INTRODUCTION xv 

I.     THE  QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  ....  i 

II.     THE  CHIPPENDALES 21 

III.  MATTHIAS  DARLY 39 

IV.  THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  ....  52 
V.     THE  BROTHERS  ADAM      79 

VI.     THE  ADAM  SCHOOL 96 

VII.     HAREWOOD   HOUSE,   YORKSHIRE. 
STOURHEAD,  BATH,  AND  ROWTON 

CASTLE,  SALOP 106 

VIII.     THE  HEPPLEWHITE  SCHOOL      .     .     .  121 

IX.     THOMAS  SHERATON 137 

X.     THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL 147 

XI.     LACQUER-WARE 166 

XII. .   OLD  ENGLISH  LOOKING-GLASSES  v.     .  179 
XIII.     HINTS  TO  COLLECTORS  AND  OPINIONS 

OF  AN  EXPERT 191 

GLOSSARY  OF  TERMS 207 

APPENDIX 209 

INDEX  .  211 


IX 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


FIG. 


TO  FACE 
PAGE 


Gallery  of  Harewood  House,  Yorkshire 

Frontispiece 

I.     Queen  Anne  Court  Cupboard 6 

II.     Queen  Anne  Carving 6 

III.  Drunkard's  Chairs   .........  8 

IV.  Country-made  pieces 10 

V.     Country-made  pieces 1 1 

VI.     Desk  and  Chair — Queen  Anne 6 

VII.     Matthias  Darly — portrait 44 

VIII.     Chippendale  Chairs 62 

IX.     Chippendale  Armchair 62 

X.     Chippendale  Gothic  Chairs 62 

XI.     Petit-point  Chair  and  Screen 65 

XII.     French-Chippendale  Chair 65 

XIII.  Chippendale  Settee 66 

XIV.  Irish-Chippendale  Sideboard 66 

XV.     Chippendale  China  Cabinet 68 

XVI.     Detail  of  same 68 

XVII.     Hanging  Cupboard 68 

XVIII.  Chippendale  Gothic  Bookcase   .....  68 

XIX.     Mahogany  Bookcase 70 

XX.     Coin  Cabinet 70 

XXI.     Chinese-Chippendale  Group 70 

XXII.  Chippendale  Card-table  and  Frame     .     .     .72 

XXIII.     Chippendale  Dining- table 72 

xi 


Xll 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


TO  FACE 

FIG.  PAGE 

XXIV.     Chippendale  Clock 76 

XXV.  Chippendale  Door     ........  78 

XXVI.  Robert  Adam — portrait  and  signature  95 

XXVII.     Adam  Chair 101 

XXVIII.     Adam  Side-table 102 

XXIX.     Adam  Globe .  104 

XXX.  Dining-room,  Harewood  House.     .     .  112 

XXXI.  Side-table,  Harewood  House      ,     .     .  114 

XXXII.  Inlaid  Writing-table,  Harewood  House  116 

XXXIII.  Adam  Mirror,  Harewood  House     .  116 

XXXIV.  Door,  Harewood  House 116 

XXXV.  Chippendale     Table,     Adam     Mirror, 

Harewood  House 116 

XXXVI.  Hall  Lanthorn,  Harewood  House   .     .  118 

XXXVII.     Chairs,  Stourhead 120 

XXXVIlA.  Chippendale  Mirror,  Rowton      .     .     .  120 

XXXVIII.  Shearer  Cabinet,  Hepplewhite  Chairs  .  127 

XXXIX.     Hepplewhite  Chair 128 

XL.  Hepplewhite  Warden's  Chair      .     .     .  128 
XLL  Hepplewhite  Sideboard,  Grinling  Gib- 
bons Mirror 134 

XLII.     Sheraton  Chair 152 

XLIII.     Sheraton  Bookcase 152 

XLIV.     Sheraton  Bookcase 154 

XLV.     Sheraton  Sideboard 154 

XLVI.  Sheraton  Kidney-table  and  Chair    .     .  152 

XLVII.     Sheraton  Writing-desk 156 

XLVI  1 1.  Painted  Cabinet  Writing-table    ...  156 

XLIX.     Inlaid  Writing-cabinet 156 

L.     Pouch-table 159 

LI.     Drinking-table 159 

LI  I.  Dressing-table, — Sheraton      .     .     .     .162 

LI  1 1.  Sheraton  Clock,  Table,  and  Chair  .     .  164 


LIST  OF  ILLUSTRATIONS 


xni 

TO  FACE 
PAGE 


FIG. 

LI  V.  Lac  Corner  Cupboard  and  Mirror,  Sheraton 

Table 177 

LV.     Lacquer  Cupboard 177 

LVI.     Lacquer  Cabinet 178 

LVII.  Cabinet  that  belonged  to  George  III.     .     .  203 

LVI  1 1.     Pergolesi  Side-table 205 

LIX.     Pergolesi  China  Cabinet 205 

LX.     Pergolesi  Cabinet 206 

LXI.     Pergolesi  Chandelier 206 


INTRODUCTION 

IN  Norman  and  Plantagenet  times,  except  in  the 
houses  of  the  nobility  and  the  very  wealthy, 
domestic  furniture  was  but  sparingly  used  in  Eng- 
land. Until  the  second  half  of  the  sixteenth  century 
most  examples  show  rude  and  coarse  workmanship, 
and  were  designed  more  with  a  view  to  utility  than 
beauty;  the  chief  decorative  woodwork  of  the 
Middle  Ages  was  made  for  ecclesiastical  purposes 
only.  In  the  Elizabethan  age  there  was  a  great 
artistic  development,  entirely  attributable  to  the  in- 
fluence of  the  Italian  Renaissance.  The  old  feudal 
houses,  which  had  depended  chiefly  upon  tapestry 
and  other  wall  hangings  for  their  decoration,  soon 
began  to  change  their  appearance,  and  oak  panel- 
lings, friezes,  screens,  and  furniture,  were  embel- 
lished with  elaborate  and  beautiful  carvings. 

The  Restoration  brought  us  into  close  connec- 
tion with  the  continent,  and  about  that  period  furni- 
ture was  sent  to  this  country  in  large  quantities  from 
Flanders,  Holland,  France,  and  Spain.  This  foreign 
work  was  largely  copied,  and  for  a  time,  at  least, 
English  productions  possessed  no  very  distinct 
national  character  of  their  own.  It  was  then  that 

b 


xvi  INTRODUCTION 

chairs  first  came  into  general  use.  Until  the  middle 
of  the  seventeenth  century  they  had  been  reserved 
only  for  the  master  of  the  house  or  for  some  honoured 
guest,  and  persons  of  less  importance  had  to  accom- 
jnodate  themselves  with  stools,  benches,  or  settles.1 
With  the  accession  of  William  and  Mary  in  1689, 
came  a  new  development  in  furniture  design. 
Many  influences  contributed  to  this  result,  but  at 
first  the  most  potent  was  the  great  popularity  ac- 
quired by  Dutch  models.  The  style  of  furniture  in 
the  Netherlands  was  very  striking  and  character- 
istic, and  when  historical  reasons  favoured  the 
general  acceptance  of  Dutch  types  in  this  country, 
our  native  cabinet-makers  were  quickly  stimulated 
with  a  desire  to  improve  upon  the  foreign  methods. 
It  was  thus  that  the  great  artistic  movement 
of  the  eighteenth  century  began.  Through  a  long 
cycle  of  years,  dating  from  about  1689,  various 
styles,  each  having  distinctive  features,  followed 
one  another  in  quick  succession,  and  though  the 
different  classes  or  schools  of  design  naturally 
overlapped,  they  may  be  approximately  divided 
into  the  following  periods: 

The  Queen  Anne  School,  about  1689-1730. 
The  Chippendale  School,  about  1730-1770. 
The  Adam  School,  about  1760-1790. 

1  Settles  were  simple  chests,  to  which  upright  backs  and  some- 
times arm-pieces  were  added. 


INTRODUCTION  xvii 

The  Hepplewhite  School,  about  1785-1795. 
The  Sheraton  School,  about  1790-1806. 

It  is  unfortunate  that  there  is  no  large  national 
collection  of  English  furniture.  There  are  a  few  fine 
pieces  of  eighteenth-century  work  at  the  Victoria 
and  Albert  Museum,  but  the  best  examples  can  only 
be  seen  in  large  country  houses,  or  in  the  hands  of 
dealers  and  collectors  here  and  in  America.  The 
numerous  books  of  design  issued  as  trade  catalogues 
(there  is  almost  a  complete  collection  in  the  Museum 
Art  Library,  South  Kensington)  show  the  different 
styles  of  the  eighteenth-century  craftsmen,  and  are 
thus  a  valuable  guide  to  a  knowledge  of  their  work. 
But  with  the  exception  of  Robert  Adam's  designs 
and  some  of  Hepplewhite's,  very  few  sketches  in 
the  illustrated  catalogues  were  actually  carried  out. 
Most  of  the  drawings  were  probably  intended  merely 
to  show  what  could  be  executed  if  required.  "  Book- 
pieces  " — made  to  order  from  the  plates — are  very 
rare,  and  the  greater  part  of  the  old  furniture  now 
in  existence  must  have  been  produced  from  designs 
which  have  disappeared. 

In  the  present  volume,  the  illustrations  have 
all  been  taken  from  actual  examples,  and  wherever 
possible  the  pieces  chosen  represent  the  finest  or 
most  characteristic  types  of  each  school. 


ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

OF  THE 

EIGHTEENTH  CENTURY 

CHAPTER  I 

THE  QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  (ABOUT  1689-1730) 


ANNE"  is  the  name  generally  given 
to  the  furniture  produced  from  the  time  of 
William  and  Mary  till  the  opening  years  of  the 
reign  of  George  II.  The  changes  brought  about  by 
the  prevalence  of  French  fashions  were  observable 
early  in  the  eighteenth  century,  but  the  style  which 
finally  culminated  in  that  known  as  "  Chippendale," 
retained  at  first  so  much  of  the  "  Queen  Anne  " 
character,  that  it  has  been  found  simpler  to  regard 
the  furniture  of  the  transitional  stage  as  "  late  Queen 
Anne"  and  "early  Chippendale,"  than  to  treat  the 
early  Georgian  types  as  a  separate  class  by  them- 
selves. 

One  of  the  most  important  characteristics  of  the 
Queen  Anne  period  was  the  general  adoption  of  the 
Dutch  "cabriole"  or  bent-knee  leg.  In  country  dis- 
tricts Jacobean  square-framed  chairs  and  tables  still 

B 


2         ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

lingered  on  for  another  fifty  years,  but  in  towns  and 
cities  bombd  curves  superseded  the  old  rectangular 
shapes,  and  walnut  veneers  and  delicate  carving  were 
employed  for  decoration.  Whenever  supports  of 
any  kind  were  needed,  the  cabriole  leg  was  nearly 
always  used;  the  bulbous  Dutch  outlines  were  soon 
toned  down,  and  in  the  types  of  this  period  we  find 
once  more  a  national  school,  truly  English  in  feeling 
and  workmanship. 

Another  influence,  that  of  the  architects,  is  rarely 
taken  sufficiently  into  consideration.  The  mouldings, 
ornaments,  and  outlines  of  furniture  were  largely 
based  on  the  researches  and  work  of  those  who 
erected  our  public  and  private  buildings.  Architects 
designed  the  panelling,  chimney-pieces,  corner  cup- 
boards, console-tables,  and  many  other  details  of 
the  apartment.  They  were  men  of  much  learning 
in  their  profession,  and  early  in  the  eighteenth 
century  began  to  publish  books  of  decoration  for 
the  interior  of  houses.  Their  ideas  were  freely  bor- 
rowed by  the  cabinet-makers ;  the  architectural  char- 
acter of  bookcases,  cabinets,  and  many  other  pieces, 
goes  far  to  prove — indeed,  proves  conclusively — that 
it  was  primarily  due  to  the  architects  that  the  great 
bulk  of  our  beautiful  eighteenth-century  furniture 
ever  came  into  existence. 

At  the  close  of  the  seventeenth  century  Sir 
Christopher  Wren  was  rebuilding  St.  Paul's  and 
many  of  the  city  churches,  besides  erecting  a  large 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  3 

number  of  houses  and  other  edifices  throughout  the 
country.  His  style  of  work  was  based  upon  classical 
models  very  freely  interpreted  and  modified  by  his 
own  personality.  He  established  a  school  of  crafts- 
men, among  whom  Grinling  Gibbons  (1648-1721) 
stands  out  pre-eminent  as  a  carver  and  modeller. 
Thus  Wren's  school — with  Gibbons  as  chief  ex- 
ponent— combined  with  Dutch  influences,  produced 
a  distinct  class  of  English  carving. 

The  woods  which  formed  the  carcass  or  founda- 
tion work  of  Queen  Anne  furniture  were  walnut, 
oak,  and  chestnut,  the  finer  qualities  of  walnut  being 
reserved    for   veneers.     At   the   beginning   of  the 
eighteenth   century  mahogany  was    but   sparingly 
used;   the  first  large  importations  of  this  timber 
from  Cuba,    San    Domingo,  and   Honduras,  were 
made  about  1720 — at  the  opening  of  the  Chippen- 
dale era.    Ebony  and  the  native  woods,  holly,  pear, 
box,  and  yew  were  all  employed  for  banding  and 
inlay:    marquetry  (in  intricate  geometrical  or  leaf 
patterns)  which    had    long  been    fashionable,  was 
generally  carried  out  in  light  yellow  upon  a  walnut 
ground.    The  shading  was  obtained  by  placing  the 
grain  of  the  wood  in  various  directions,  also  by 
means  of  a  hot  iron,  hot  sand,  or  artificial  stain- 
ing.   Dutch  furniture  was  inlaid  in  a  very  similar 
manner,  but  the  work  was  invariably  coarser  than 
the  English. 

Lacquering  and  painting  in  black,  gold,  and  other 


4         ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

colours  was  also  a  favourite  mode  of  decoration. 
Not  only  inlaid  panels,  but  whole  pieces  of  furniture 
were  ornamented  in  this  manner  by  English  and 
Dutch  workmen  who  imitated  Chinese  methods. 

Brass-work  in  the  form  of  hinges,  key-escut- 
cheons, handles,  angle  plates,  nails,  and  ornaments 
were  hardly  ever  seen  on  English  furniture  until 
this  period.  Now,  however,  metal-work  began  en- 
tirely to  supersede  the  old  wooden  knobs  and 
handles. 

CHAIRS 

The  chairs  were  very  quaint  in  form  with  wide 
seats,  high  backs,  broad  splats — or  centre  panels — 
and  cabriole  legs.  This  bent-knee  leg  in  various 
shapes  was  common  to  many  parts  of  the  continent, 
and  in  all  probability  was  of  very  ancient  origin. 
It  may  have  been  derived  from  the  goat's  leg,  to 
be  seen  in  the  furniture  of  primitive  races.  Another 
characteristic  of  Queen  Anne  chairs — the  lion's  or 
eagle's  "  claw-and-ball "  foot — has  been  traced  to  the 
"Dragon's  claw  and  pearl  "  of  the  Chinese;  a  similar 
device  was  employed  by  the  early  Egyptians,  and 
is  found  on  the  base  of  old  Roman  tripods.  The 
various  European  races  adopted  the  antique  de- 
signs, and  varied  them  according  to  their  national 
taste;  the  English,  too,  borrowed  from  country 
after  country,  but  ended  by  nationalizing  every  type. 
And  here  lies  the  great  interest  and  attraction  of 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  5 

our  eighteenth-century  schools;  the  inspiration  was 
taken  from  many  different  sources,  yet  the  hand 
of  the  English  craftsman  can  hardly  ever  be  mis- 
taken. 

In  some  examples  of  Queen  Anne  chairs  the 
carving  was  slight,  consisting  of  a  leaf,  shell,  or 
scroll  on  the  top  rail;  the  same  design  appeared 
on  the  "  knee  "  of  the  leg,  on  a  "  drop  "  ornament  on 
the  front  of  the  seat  and  on  the  under-framing.  In 
these  simple  chairs  the  splat  was  a  solid,  curved 
and  hollowed  or  spoon-shaped  panel,  sometimes 
with  a  small  piercing,  and  often  decorated  with 
marquetry.  The  side  uprights  almost  invariably 
curved  into  the  top  rail,  and  the  stuffed  seat  was 
let  into  a  rebate  or  groove.  There  were,  besides, 
numerous  examples  of  elaborate  carving  in  which 
the  ornamental  details  were  principally  drawn  from 
the  architectural  decorations  of  Gibbons  and  his 
fellow  craftsmen.  The  splat  was  pierced  with  various 
openings  and  the  spaces  were  filled  in  with  fine  carv- 
ing; the  whole  framework,  the  legs,  and  the  arms, 
were  decorated  with  acanthus  leaves,  with  Gibbons's 
favourite  riband  and  forget-me-not  pattern,  with 
cord  and  tassels,  and  egg  and  tongue  mouldings. 
At  the  beginning  of  the  eighteenth  century  mar- 
quetry rapidly  went  out  of  fashion.  The  chair- 
backs  were  made  lower  and  wider,  and  the  pierced 
splat  gradually  developed  into  an  open  back  cut 
into  wide  sections.  Dragons,  lions,  and  birds  of 


6         ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

prey  were  frequently  introduced,  and  the  escalop 
shell,  though  still  used  occasionally,  was  no  longer 
the  principal  ornament.  Side  and  cross  under-braces, 
which  had  characterized  nearly  all  the  earlier  chairs, 
were  now  omitted,  and  sometimes  only  a  single  rail 
was  employed  to  join  the  back  legs. 

The  foot  accompanying  the  cabriole  leg  was 
made  in  several  different  shapes,  of  which,  besides 
the  "  claw-and-ball,"  the  conventional  "hoof,"  the 
"  club,"  and  the  "  scroll  "  foot  were  the  chief. 

The  chair  in  illustration  I  is  an  example  of  the 
earliest  Queen  Anne  style,  which  came  very  much 
under  Dutch  influences.  It  is  executed  in  walnut; 
the  shaped  splat  is  inlaid  with  ivory  and  various 
light  coloured  woods  in  a  floral  design.  A  leaf 
pattern  is  carved  on  the  top  rail,  and  on  the  "  knees  " 
of  the  cabriole  legs.  With  the  exception  of  the  legs, 
the  whole  frame  is  inlaid  with  coloured  woods. 
This  chair  is  one  of  a  suite  once  in  the  possession 
of  Mr.  James  Orrock.  The  design  of  the  marquetry 
varies  in  every  piece. 

The  walnut  chairs  in  group  II,  formerly  in  the 
possession  of  Mr.  Orrock,  are  very  fine  examples  of 
Queen  Anne  carving,  dating  from  about  the  begin- 
ning of  the  eighteenth  century. 

In  chair  A  the  splat  is  pierced  with  small  open- 
ings, and  has  a  little  scroll  and  leaf-carving  on  either 
side.  The  top  rail  is  ornamented  with  an  escalop 
shell,  and  this  is  again  repeated  on  the  knees. 


Fig.  i.  QUEEN  ANNE  COURT  CUPBOARD. 


Fig.  vi.  DESK  AND  CHAIR— QUEEN  ANNE. 

To  face  page  6. 


o 
z 

OS 
< 

u 

u 
Z 

z 

< 

z 

u 

W 
D 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  7 

Eagles'  heads  appear  at  the  juncture  of  the  side  up- 
rights and  top  rail,  and  also  at  the  extremity  of  the 
arms.  The  feet  are  club-shaped,  and  the  upholstery 
of  the  seat  is  drawn  over  the  seat-frame. 

Chair  B  exhibits  Gibbons's  influence  upon  the 
cabinet-makers  of  his  day.  On  the  top  rail  carved 
drapery  is  interwoven  with  cord  and  tassels.  On 
either  side  a  vulture's  head  is  depicted  and  the  claws 
of  the  same  bird  appear  as  feet.  The  side  supports 
and  splats  are  ornamented  with  foliage  and  flowers; 
a  leaf  design  is  carved  on  the  knees  and  arms,  and  a 
shell  on  the  front  rail  of  the  seat.  The  lower  end  of 
the  splat  is  formed  into  two  rolling  scrolls,  and  there 
is  a  squab  seat. 

In  the  large  armchair  c,  Gibbons's  style  of  orna- 
mentation is  again  noticeable  in  the  flowers  of  vari- 
ous kinds  which  are  intermingled  with  the  carved 
foliage.  In  the  centre  of  the  top  rail  a  large  shell  is 
combined  with  leaves  and  scrolls.  The  foot  is  a 
lion's  claw-and-ball. 

Chair  D  resembles  in  size  and  general  outline 
the  earliest  Queen  Anne  chairs  with  a  solid  spoon- 
shaped  splat,  but  in  this  example  the  whole  back  is 
elaborately  pierced  and  carved.  The  details  are 
chiefly  acanthus  leaves,  honeysuckles  and  scrolls. 
There  is  a  large  acanthus  leaf  on  the  knee  and  on 
the  front  rail  of  the  shaped  cross-stretchers.  The 
foot  is  a  conventional  hoof. 

The   armchair   in   figure  VI,  which  is    in   the 


8          ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

possession  of  Mr.  Guy  Dawber,  belongs  to  the  late 
Queen  Anne  period.  It  is  lower  and  broader  than  an 
average  Chippendale  chair — the  height  is  3  ft.,  the 
width  of  the  seat  in  front,  i  ft.  1 1  in.,  depth,  i  ft.  6  in. 
from  front  to  back.  The  splat  is  formed  of  broad 
bands  representing  a  scroll-design,  the  top  rail  bows 
slightly  and  the  protruding  corners  terminate  in  a 
rolling  scroll.  There  is  some  delicate  leaf-carving 
on  the  top  rail,  on  the  knee  of  the  cabriole  legs,  and 
on  the  arm  supports.  At  the  lower  end  of  the  splat 
are  two  small  carved  tassels  and  a  row  of  forget- 
me-nots.  The  arms  end  in  conventionalized  claws 
which  are  further  ornamented  on  the  inner  side  with 
roses.  The  upholstered  seat  lies  in  a  rebate ;  the  foot 
is  an  eagle's  claw-and-ball ;  a  single  rail  joins  the 
back  legs. 

The  large  chairs  in  illustration  III,  owned  by 
Mr.  J.  E.  Schunck,  were  known  as  drunkard's 
chairs,  probably  because  their  large  size  enabled  our 
forefathers  to  repose  comfortably  therein  after  an 
evening's  carouse.  The  height  is  3  ft.  i  in.  (back,  i  ft. 
9%  in.);  the  width  of  the  seat  in  front  is  2  ft.  9  in., 
the  depth,  i  ft.  10  in.  The  wood  is  mahogany;  the 
pierced  splat  is  unornamented,  but  the  top  rail  has 
four  scrolls  rolling  outwards.  The  arms,  also  quite 
plain,  are  curiously  twisted.  The  front  cabriole  legs 
have  some  delicate  leaf-carving  on  the  knees,  and  end 
in  a  spiral  scroll. 

Though  chiefly  limited  to  country  districts,  "slat- 


- 
u 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  9 

back  "  chairs1  were  very  popular.  Three,  five,  or  six 
cut  and  shaped  slats — sometimes  perforated — ex- 
tended from  side  to  side  across  the  upright  back. 
These  chairs  had  a  rush  seat,  a  "  turned  "  foot  and 
leg,  and  the  side  uprights,  which  were  often  "  turned," 
ended  in  small  rounded  terminals.  Similar  chairs 
were  made  throughout  the  century,  but  those  of  the 
later  periods  were  more  elegant  in  form.  Both  the 
slat -back  and  the  picturesque  Windsor  chairs  were 
generally  carried  out  in  home-grown  woods. 

Three-cornered  chairs,  with  two  splats  and  a 
semicircular  top  rail,  corresponded  in  their  general 
details  with  the  ordinary  Queen  Anne  chairs.  Illus- 
tration IV  represents  A  a  large-sized  Queen  Anne 
three-cornered  chair,  executed  in  mahogany.  It  has 
an  extension-top  or  headrest,  shaped  splats,  and  an 
escalop  shell  carved  upon  the  knee  of  the  front  leg. 

In  B  is  shown  a  mahogany  armchair  with  a 
spindle-back,  a  pierced  top  rail,  and  a  cane  seat.  It 
is  one  of  a  set  of  six,  of  Westmorland  make — date 
about  1745.  It  runs  on  small  lignum  rollers  which 
are  fixed  in  the  bottom  of  the  side  rails.  Chairs  of 
similar  shape  were  produced  about  the  same  period 
in  other  parts  of  the  country.  In  an  old  house  in 
Devonshire,  for  example,  are  two  beech  and  syca- 
more chairs,  painted  white,  with  wooden  seats,  in 
shape  exactly  like  that  in  the  illustration. 

The  armchair  c  is  also  of  Westmorland  manu- 

1  Called  in  Lancashire  "  laggan  "  or  ladder-backed  chairs. 


io       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

facture,  and  although  the  Queen-Anne-shaped  splat 
is  employed,  the  centre  panel  is  supported  by  two 
side  rails  instead  of  being  joined  into  the  frame- 
work of  the  seat.  It  is  unusual  to  find  a  chair  of 
this  type  with  arms;  the  single  chairs  of  a  similar 
style  may  often  be  met  with  in  that  district.  The 
date  is  probably  1735,  but  may  have  been  much  later 
in  the  century,  since  the  old  shapes  lingered  on  for 
a  long  time  in  the  country  districts.  All  three  chairs 
are  owned  by  Mr.  Dan.  Gibson. 

Stuffed-backed  and  open-backed  settees1 — a  de- 
velopment of  the  old  "  settle  " — as  well  as  couches, 
with  headpiece  only,  were  designed  to  harmonize  with 
the  prevailing  style  of  the  chairs. 

"  Grandfather  "  stuffed-back  chairs  had  been  in 
use  for  some  considerable  time,  many  fine  examples 
date  back  to  Jacobean  days.  Even  at  the  beginning 
of  the  eighteenth  century  the  legs  of  such  chairs 
were  often  "  turned,"  not  cabriole,  and  had  curved 
stretchers  between  them.  The  coverings  were  either 
tapestry,  or  velvet  and  silk  brocade.  The  arms  rolled 
outwards  in  a  graceful  sweep,  and  many  specimens 
had  well-shaped  wings  on  either  side  of  the  back. 

TABLES 

Tables,  in  common  with  every  kind  of  furniture, 
went  through  various  phases  of  evolution.  The 

1  Also  known  as  Darby  and  Joan  chairs.  »  £ 


>    o 

~"    r- 
M 


. 

U3 
U 

Cd 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  n 

earliest  type  of  table  consisted  of  a  simple  board 
placed  upon  folding  trestles  and  removable  at  will. 
At  the  beginning  of  the  Queen  Anne  period,  how- 
ever, fixed  table-tops  were  almost  universal,  and 
were  generally  supported  by  heavily  "turned  "  legs. 
With  the  advent  of  Dutch  fashions  lighter  and  more 
elegant  tables  were  executed  in  large  quantities. 
Flap-tables,  round,  square  or  oval  card-tables  and 
small  writing-tables  were  all  in  general  use.  The 
gate  dining-table,  with  its  elaborate  underframing 
and  numerous  "turned"  legs,  was  a  common  type  in 
country  districts.  But,  as  a  general  rule,  tables  were 
provided  with  cabriole  legs  either  plain  or  slightly 
carved. 

Illustration  V  represents  three  tables:  A  and  c 
are  country-made  oak  tables  of  the  early  Queen 
Anne  period  with  "  turned  "  legs.  They  are  good 
types  of  the  furniture  produced  in  Westmorland, 
Cumberland,  and  North  Lancashire  about  the  last 
quarter  of  the  seventeenth  century.  The  table  B  is 
of  mahogany  and  of  somewhat  later  date.  The 
cabriole  legs  and  claw-and-ball  feet  are  beautifully 
formed  and  of  fine  workmanship:  the  mounts  also 
are  of  excellent  finish.  The  elegant  little  stool  is  of 
walnut.  All  four  pieces  are  in  the  possession  of 
Mr.  Dan.  Gibson. 

The  court-cupboard  in  group  i  (formerly  in  the 
possession  of  Mr.  J.  Orrock)  is  an  example  of  the  fine 
English  marquetry  in  walnut  and  boxwood,  which 


12       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

was  at  its  best  at  the  time  of  Charles  II  and  William 
and  Mary.  The  court-cupboard  is  the  old  traditional 
shape  which  had  been  executed,  with  little  alteration 
in  form,  since  the  Elizabethan  period.  The  doors  are 
veneered  and  inlaid  with  delicate  intertwined  foliage. 
The  two  sides  of  the  cupboard,  the  inside  of  the 
doors,  as  well  as  the  interior  drawers  and  small 
cupboard  are  similarly  decorated,  but  in  a  somewhat 
coarser  manner.  The  same  two  colours  are  em- 
ployed in  a  border  round  the  doors,  and  in  the  mar- 
quetry on  the  shelves  which  brace  the  lower  part. 
Here,  however,  the  inlay  is  dark  on  a  light  ground. 
The  ormolu  drop-handles  are  pear-shaped  and  hollow 
at  the  back. 


WRITI  NG-TABLES 

The  square  "Scriptor"  or  bureau  writing-desk 
with  a  slanting  top,  appeared  far  more  graceful  upon 
its  new  bandy  legs.  Another  form  of  writing-bureau 
had  a  bookcase  or  cabinet  top,  with  doors  of  glass 
or  wood,  and  drawers  below  reaching  almost  to  the 
ground.  The  interior  or  well  of  the  desks  was  fitted 
with  numerous  small  drawers  and  partitions,  and 
both  the  outside  and  inside  were  often  banded  and 
inlaid. 

The  desk,  illustration  VI,  in  the  possession  of 
Mr.  Guy  Dawber,  is  an  excellent  example  of  the  early 
Queen  Anne  type.  The  wood  is  oak,  and  the  inlaid 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  13 

centre  plaque  and  stars  on  the  lid  are  of  ebony,  box, 
holly,  and  walnut;  the  banding  round  the  top  and 
the  drawers  is  of  walnut.  The  interior,  of  stained 
oak,  is  fitted  with  six  drawers  of  varying  sizes — three 
on  either  side  and  pigeon-holes  in  the  centre.  When 
opened  the  desk  top  rests  on  two  slides  which  draw 
out.  The  cabriole  legs  are  very  typical  of  the  period ; 
the  knees  form  a  rolling  scroll  and  bulge  outwards 
and  upwards.  Legs  of  this  shape  seem  to  afford  so 
little  support  to  the  framework  above,  that  only  per- 
fection of  workmanship  can  account  for  the  number 
of  pieces  of  this  type  which  are  still  in  good  preser- 
vation at  the  present  day. 

CORNER  CUPBOARDS 

A  type  of  Queen  Anne  furniture  common  to 
nearly  every  house  was  the  "corner  cupboard." 
This  was  often  framed  into  the  panelling  and  treated 
as  a  structural  part  of  the  room.  The  lower  part 
had  two  folding  doors,  and  the  upper  and  larger 
portion  had  a  recess  of  open  shelves  for  the  display 
of  china.  These  shelves  were  curved  to  follow  the 
shape  of  the  back  and  were  sometimes  inclosed 
either  by  a  single  or  double  door  (glazed  or  solid). 
The  top  was  often  finished  with  a  large  shell  in  the 
form  of  an  apse  and  with  little  or  no  pediment 
above. 

Such  cupboards  designed  by  architects,  together 


H       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

with  the  panelling  and  other  fittings,  were  after- 
wards copied  by  the  cabinet-makers  and  adapted  to 
form  a  separate  piece  of  furniture.  A  Queen  Anne 
corner  cupboard  is  illustrated  in  the  chapter  on 
lacquer  work. 


CHESTS  OF  DRAWERS 

The  chest  had,  from  time  immemorial,  been  put 
to  a  greater  number  of  different  uses  than  any  other 
article  of  furniture.  It  had  served  as  a  receptacle 
for  clothes  or  goods,  as  a  seat,  a  table,  a  desk,  and 
even  a  bed.  A  chest  of  drawers  —  that  is,  a  chest  to 
which  one  or  two  long  drawers  were  added  below 
—  was  a  variation  adopted  in  England  during  the 
seventeenth  century;  it  was  made  to  stand  on  small 
square  or  rounded  supports.  The  Dutch  "  high 
boy"  or  "tall  boy"  was  first  introduced  in  the 
Queen  Anne  period,  and  these  quaint  articles  were 
executed  in  slightly  varying  styles  throughout  the 
eighteenth  century.  The  pediment,  mouldings, 
handles,  escutcheons,  and  supports  are  the  main 
guides  as  to  the  date  of  manufacture.  The  shape 
was  that  of  an  upper  set  of  drawers  placed  upon 
and  fixed  to  a  lower  set.  In  the  earliest  examples 
the  lower  part  usually  had  only  one  long  drawer, 
or  three  small  ones  placed  side  by  side,  and  the  set 
above  —  which  was  finished  with  a  moulded  or  (later) 
a  broken  scroll  pediment  —  ended  at  the  top  with 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  15 

two  small  drawers  also  side  by  side.  The  orna- 
mentation often  consisted  of  a  large  single  or  double 
moulding  upon  the  frame  around  the  drawers.  The 
brass  handles  were  either  solid  pear-shaped  drops, 
generally  hollowed  at  the  back,  or  small  drooping 
handles  forming  a  section  of  an  oblong  ring.  Some 
chests  had  six  "turned"  legs  with  stretchers  between, 
and  others  had  four  cabriole  legs  with  two  "  turned  " 
drops  on  the  lower  edge  of  the  front  framework. 
The  dressing-tables,  now  known  as  "low  boys," 
were  made  to  correspond  with  the  chests  of  drawers, 
and  consisted  practically  of  the  lower  part  of  a 
"high  boy"  with  a  flat  table-top.  The  toilet-glass 
was  rarely  attached  to  the  dressing-table. 

CLOCK-CASES 

About  1680  an  important  change  took  place  in 
the  shape  of  clock-cases.  It  was  at  this  time  that 
the  pendulum,  in  connection  with  weights  and  chains, 
first  came  into  general  use  for  the  regulation  of 
clocks.  The  pendulum  required  protection,  and  a 
long  wooden  case  was  devised  for  the  purpose.  All 
the  early  clock-cases  had  been  made  of  metal,  and  it 
was  only  at  the  time  of  the  Restoration  that  wooden 
hoods  were  provided  for  "  bracket  clocks."  Both  tall 
clocks  and  bracket  clocks  were  divided  into  "hood," 
"waist,"  and  "base,"  and  these  main  features  were 
retained  throughout  the  eighteenth  century.  The 


16       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

details  of  moulding  and  ornamentation  varied  ac- 
cording to  the  fashions  of  the  day,  but  the  beautiful 
outlines  and  proportions  seem  to  have  been  deter- 
mined upon  at  a  very  early  date. 

The  grandfather  clocks  of  the  Queen  Anne 
period  were  tall  and  severe;  narrow  in  the  waist 
and  without  any  strongly  marked  base.  The  hood 
was  treated  in  the  classical  style,  with  architrave, 
frieze  and  cornice  (later  cornice  only),  supported  by 
columns — often  twisted — at  the  angles,  and  was 
sometimes  surmounted  with  a  domed  top.  The  door 
in  the  trunk  was  square-headed ;  it  was  finished  with 
a  plain  half-round  moulding,  and  a  small  glass, 
circular  or  oval,  was  let  into  the  woodwork  just 
opposite  the  pendulum.  The  ornamentation  con- 
sisted of  brass  work,  perforated  or  repoussd  (later 
fretted  wood),  in  the  frieze;  brass  balls  or  cups 
attached  to  the  hood;  and  engraved  or  repoussd 
cupids  and  foliage  on  the  spandrels  (or  angles  of  the 
face).  Until  the  middle  of  the  eighteenth  century 
the  numerals  were  rarely  cut  directly  on  the  dial 
itself;  an  hour-circle  of  silvered  brass  was  fixed  to 
the  face  of  the  clock,  and  on  this  the  figures  were 
blackened  to  contrast  with  the  chased  or  engraved 
brass  groundwork  below.  The  hands  of  the  early 
clocks  were  elaborately  shaped,  carved,  and  pierced. 
At  first  the  framework  around  the  dial  was  square, 
and  the  name  of  the  maker  was  inscribed  in  Latin 
immediately  below  it,  or,  a  few  years  later,  on  the 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  17 

lower  portion  of  the  clock-face.  The  frame  of  the 
dial-circle  next  received  an  arched  top,  and  the  maker's 
name  was  engraved  in  English,  after  about  1715,  on 
a  name-plate  within  the  arched  space.  Some  clocks 
were  marked  with  the  name  of  the  owner,  or  had  a 
motto  or  crest  in  lieu  of  a  name.  In  many  instances 
dolphins  appeared  on  either  side  of  the  name-plate. 

Bracket  clocks  also  had  a  square  case,  and  the 
earliest  examples  had  a  dome  top  of  perforated 
metal  with  a  handle  in  the  middle.  When  an  arch 
was  introduced  into  the  upper  part  of  the  dial-frame, 
the  dome  gave  place  to  a  bell-shaped  or  curved  top. 

The  wood  of  both  grandfather  and  bracket 
clocks  was  usually  oak,  or  oak  veneered  with  beau- 
tifully figured  walnut  and  inlaid  with  rich  marquetry. 
A  great  many  clocks  also  had  their  oak  cases  covered 
with  English  lacquer-painting. 


MIRROR  FRAMES 

Hanging-mirrors  with  wooden  frames  first  came 
into  general  use  in  Italy  during  the  sixteenth  cen- 
tury. These  frames  began  to  be  imitated  both  in 
England  and  France  about  the  close  of  that  century, 
but  it  was  not  until  the  time  of  the  Restoration 
that  decorative  mirrors  were  produced  in  any  quan- 
tity in  this  country.  Our  early  wood-frames  were 
architectural  in  character  and  were  generally  used  to 

c 


i8       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

inclose  a  space,  such  as  the  panel  over  a  chimney- 
piece.  Occasionally  the  gilded  frames  of  Charles  II 
period  were  almost  exact  facsimiles  of  the  stone- 
work frames  (with  entablature  and  supporting 
pillars)  which  encircled  church  memorial  tablets 
of  the  time.  The  only  difference  was  the  orna- 
mentation, the  memorial  frames  having  skulls  and 
bones  instead  of  shells,  festoons,  or  masks.  The 
early  Queen  Anne  frames  were  of  much  simpler 
construction,  often  consisting  only  of  a  narrow 
moulded  margin  of  walnut,  either  square  or  oblong, 
and  shaped,  at  first  at  the  top,  later  both  top  and 
bottom.  The  glass  was  nearly  always  bevelled,  and 
the  outline  of  the  bevel  followed  exactly  the  grace- 
ful curves  of  the  inner  frame.  Owing  to  the  small 
size  of  the  early  Vauxhall  plates,  the  mirrors  were 
frequently  divided  into  two  separate  pieces.  The 
upper  panel  was  then  finished  with  a  dull  surface, 
figures  or  patterns  were  cut  in  the  back  of  the  glass, 
the  coating  of  mercury  showed  through  from  the  front, 
and  an  effect  was  thus  produced  which  resembled 
intaglio  or  gem-cutting  (see  illustration  LIV).  In 
other  examples  two  or  three  plates  were  framed 
together  and  the  joints  were  hidden  by  bands  of 
metal  or  strips  of  coloured  glass  fastened  with 
metal  or  glass  rosettes. 

The  wide  frames  carved  by  Grinling  Gibbons 
had  a  very  distinctive  character,  they  were  executed 
in  lime  or  other  soft  woods  and  gilded.  The  chief 


QUEEN  ANNE  SCHOOL  19 

ornaments  were  fruit,  flowers,  and  knots  of  ribbon 
carved  in  bold  relief. 

Plate  XLI  shows  a  Gibbons  mirror-frame  of 
beautiful  workmanship.  It  is  of  gilded  limewood, 
size  3  ft.  3  in.  high  by  2  ft.  9  in.  wide.  The  carvings 
of  flowers  and  fruit  are  wonderfully  realistic.  They 
are  executed  in  high  relief  and  deeply  undercut. 
An  animal's  head  appears  in  the  centre  of  the  upper 
margin,  and  on  the  corresponding  portion  of  the 
lower  border  is  a  cluster  of  flowers  and  some  fruit ; 
many  other  objects  are  wreathed  around  the  frame, 
and  form  graceful  lines  and  curves.  Grapes,  pears, 
figs,  and  pomegranates  are  the  most  noticeable 
among  the  fruits,  and  the  chief  flowers  are  the  rose, 
the  sunflower,  and  the  convolvulus.  In  low  relief 
are  numberless  leaves  and  small  forget-me-nots. 
The  mirror  itself  is  an  old  piece  of  Vauxhall  glass, 
without  a  bevel  at  the  edge.  This  frame  belongs  to 
Mr.  Alfred  Davis. 

The  French  Huguenot  workmen,  who  fled  to 
England  after  the  revocation  of  the  Edict  of  Nantes 
in  1685,  greatly  stimulated  the  taste  for  frames  in 
the  style  of  Louis  Quatorze.  There  are  many  ex- 
amples of  the  work  of  these  refugees  at  Hampton 
Court  Palace.  About  this  time,  also,  a  quantity  of 
French  mirrors  were  imported  ready  framed  and 
glazed  with  plate-glass  from  the  works  at  St.  Go- 
bain. 

Even  before  the  beginning  of  the  eighteenth 


20       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

century  frames  covered  with  old  English  lac  were 
by  no  means  uncommon.  Illustration  LIV  shows 
a  mirror  thus  ornamented. 

About  the  time  of  the  first  two  Georges,  mirror- 
frames  of  gilded  pinewood  or  mahogany  were  made 
in  many  different  shapes.  The  one  perhaps  most 
often  met  with  consists  of  a  flat,  wide  margin  cut 
into  fantastic  outlines.  A  long-beaked  bird,  which 
appears  to  be  flying  through  a  hole  in  the  top,  is 
introduced  by  way  of  ornament.  The  glass,  often 
bevelled,  has  a  simple  moulding  round  it  as  well  as 
a  small  inner  member,  which  is  carved  and  gilt. 


CHAPTER  II 

THE  CHIPPENDALES 

THE  eighteenth  century  is  still  so  near  to  us 
that  it  seems  hard  to  imagine  that  men  of 
any  note  at  the  time  could  have  lived,  worked,  and 
died  without  leaving  any  record  of  their  existence. 
Yet  greatly  as  we  appreciate  the  work  of  the  de- 
signers of  this  period  we  know  but  little  of  the 
personality  of  the  workers.  They  were  seldom  con- 
sidered worthy  of  notice  by  chroniclers  in  their  own 
day,  and  their  books  of  design  contain  very  few 
autobiographical  details.  It  is  only  by  a  diligent 
search  of  old  newspapers,  registers,  and  wills  that 
it  is  possible  to  obtain  any  information  on  the 
subject  of  their  history.  Those  craftsmen  who  did 
not  publish  their  designs,  and  others  who  did  pub- 
lish, but  omitted  to  sign  their  drawings,  cannot 
now  be  identified  even  by  name. 

J.  T.  Smith  in  his  gossiping  volumes  on  "  Nolle- 
kens  and  his  Times,"  1828,  gave  an  amusing  account 
of  a  neighbour  and  contemporary  of  Chippendale's, 
a  cabinet-maker  named  Cobb,  who  was  frequently 
employed  by  George  III.  He  lived  at  No.  72,  St. 


21 


22        ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Martin's  Lane,  and  was  said  to  have  brought  into 
fashion  a  table  with  a  rising  desk  for  drawing, 
writing,  or  reading  while  in  a  standing  position. 
He  was  "  perhaps  one  of  the  proudest  men  in  Eng- 
land, always  appeared  in  full  dress  of  the  most 
superb  and  costly  kind,  in  which  state  he  would 
strut  through  his  workshop  giving  orders  to  his 
men." 

But  of  Chippendale  himself  Smith  was  unable 
to  give  any  character  sketch,  though  his  reference 
to  him  is  not  without  interest.  "The  extensive 
premises,  No.  60,"  he  writes,  "were  formerly  held 
by  Chippendale,  the  most  famous  upholsterer  and 
cabinet-maker  of  his  day,  to  whose  folio  work  on 
household  furniture  the  trade  formerly  made  con- 
stant reference.  ...  As  most  fashions  come  round 
again,  I  should  not  wonder,  notwithstanding  the 
beautifully  classic  change  brought  in  by  Thomas 
Hope,  Esq.,1  if  we  were  to  see  the  unmeaning  scroll- 
and  shell-work  with  which  the  furniture  of  the  reign 
of  Louis  Quatorze  was  so  profusely  encumbered, 
revive,  when  Chippendale's  work  will  again  be 
sought  after  with  redoubled  avidity,  and  as  many 
of  the  copies  must  have  been  sold  as  waste  paper, 
the  few  remaining  will  probably  bear  rather  a  high 

1  "  Anastasius  "  Hope,  of  Deepdene,  near  Dorking,  author  of 
"  Household  Furniture  and  Interior  Decoration"  (1807),  a  folio  for 
which  he  made  most  of  the  drawings,  and  "  procured  classic  models 
and  casts  from  Italy." 


THE  CHIPPENDALES  23 

price."  After  the  lapse  of  about  fifty  years,  during 
which  a  great  decadence  took  place  in  furniture 
design,  Smith's  prophecy  came  true;  Chippendale's 
book  and  Chippendale's  work  were  sought  after 
and  treasured  by  countless  lovers  of  the  beautiful. 
Smith's  words  are  of  especial  value  as  an  additional 
proof  of  the  high  position  Chippendale  held  among 
the  craftsmen  of  his  day. 

Besides  this  notice  and  a  passing  allusion  in 
Sheraton's  "  Drawing  Book,"  the  only  reference  to 
the  great  cabinet-maker  within  fifty  years  of  his 
death  appears  to  be  that  in  George  Smith's 
"Cabinet-maker  and  Upholsterer's  Guide"  (1826): 
"  The  importation  of  it  [French  taste]  into  England 
changed  the  whole  feature  of  design  as  it  related  to 
Household  furniture.  This  taste  continued  almost 
unchanged  through  the  reign  of  George  II  and  the 
earlier  part  of  George  III.  The  elder  Mr.  Chippen- 
dale was,  I  believe,  the  first  who  favoured  the  public 
with  a  work  consisting  of  designs  drawn  from  this 
school  with  great  merit  to  himself  however  defective 
the  taste  of  the  time  might  be." 

Details  of  Chippendale's  life  and  personal  sur- 
roundings can  only  be  gleaned  from  fragmentary 
passages  scattered  here  and  there  in  records  of  his 
time.  Many  new  facts,  however,  have  thus  been 
brought  to  light  which  enable  us  to  follow  his 
career  and  that  of  his  son  with  more  accuracy  than 
has  been  possible  hitherto. 


24       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

The  first  Thomas  Chippendale  known  to  history 
was  a  carver  and  picture-frame  maker  of  consider- 
able standing  in  Worcester  during  the  last  half  of 
the  seventeenth  century.  There  his  son,  the  cele- 
brated Thomas  Chippendale  (Chippendale  II)  was 
born  and  spent  a  part  of  his  early  life.  Both  father 
and  son  settled  in  London  before  the  year  1727  and 
Chippendale  (I)  continued  his  former  work  with 
great  success  in  the  metropolis.  According  to 
Redgrave  ("  Dictionary  of  Artists  of  the  English 
School,"  1878),  Chippendale  (II)  first  found  em- 
ployment in  London  as  a  joiner,  and,  by  his  own 
industry  and  taste,  became  in  the  reign  of  George  I 
a  "  most  eminent  cabinet-maker  and  carver."  At 
Christmas,  1749,  Chippendale  (II)  took  a  shop  in 
Conduit  Street,  Long  Acre,  and  in  1753  removed 
to  the  larger  premises,  No.  60,  St.  Martin's  Lane, 
with  which  his  name  was  henceforth  to  be  associated. 
It  is  not  known  when  Chippendale  (II)  started 
business  on  his  own  account,  but  by  the  time  of  his 
removal  his  trade  had  already  grown  so  extensive 
that  he  was  obliged  to  take  over. the  three  houses 
adjoining  his  own.  The  rent  and  taxes  on  the  four 
houses  amounted  to  a  considerable  sum  for  that 
period.  The  Parish  Register  for  1755  records  an 
appeal  he  made  against  an  overcharge  on  his  rates. 
On  i Qth  May,  1748,  a  marriage  is  recorded  in  the 
Parish  Register  of  St.  George's  Chapel,  Mayfair, 
between  Thomas  Chippendale  and  Catherine  Red- 


THE  CHIPPENDALES  25 

shaw  of  St.  Martin-in-the-Fields.1  The  identity  of 
this  Thomas  Chippendale  with  the  cabinet-maker 
is  extremely  probable.  Chippendale  is  by  no 
means  a  common  name  and  it  is  unlikely  that 
there  were  two  Thomas  Chippendales  living  in  the 
same  parish.  Following  the  example  of  a  few  en- 
terprising competitors,  Chippendale  resolved  to 
publish  his  designs,  and  by  the  aid  of  a  number  of 
subscribers,  he  was  enabled  to  issue  his  original 
sketches  in  book  form.  "  The  Gentleman  and  Cab- 
inet-Maker's Director"  was  what  would  now  be 
known  as  a  trade  catalogue,  but  with  its  long  and 
totally  extraneous  introduction  dealing  with  the  five 
orders  of  Architecture,  it  evidently  aspired  to  be 
quite  an  elaborate  work  on  houses  and  their  furni- 
ture. The  book  was  announced  among  the  "  New 
Publications  "  in  the  "  Gentleman's  Magazine  "  for 
April,  1754: 

"Thomas  Chippendale  published  the  'Gentle- 
man and  Cabinet-Maker's  Director,'  /V  8.  o." 2 

There  were  one  hundred  and  sixty  engraved 
plates.  The  list,  nf  snhsr.Hhers  appended  to  the 
"  Director "  proves  that  Chippendale  had  patrons 
and  customers  in  all  classes  of  society.  From  the 
preface — an  address  to  his  customers — something 
of  the  writer's  character  can  be  inferred.  Pushing, 

1  Register  (Harleian  Society). 

2  It  may  be  mentioned  that  the  present  value  of  this  edition  is 
about  £2$. 


26       ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

energetic,  conscious  of  his  superiority  over  his 
rivals,  full  of  the  self-assurance  due  to  a  knowledge 
of  his  powers,  an  excellent  business  man — such  is 
the  rough  sketch  of  Chippendale  as  he  showed  him- 
self in  this,  the  only  writing  of  his  that  now  exists. 
Genius  as  he  was  from  an  artistic  point  of  view  it  is 
evident  that  in  general  culture  and  education  he  was 
not  above  the  class  to  which  he  belonged. 

His  book  of  designs  attrartpH  mnrh  attention, 
the  public  appreciated  his  work  and  seems  to  have 
bought  largely,  but  the  true  greatness  of  his  pro- 
ductions was  not  recognized  until  nearly  a  century 
after  his  death.  It  is  a  curious  fact  that  the  greater 
portion  of  the  furniture  bearing  the  impress  of  his 
genius,  or  known  to  have  been  designed  and  made 
in  his  shops,  is  not  illustrated  in  any  of  the  three 
editions  of  the  "  Director."  The  elegant  ball-and- 
claw  foot  which  is  seen  so  constantly  in  connection 
with  his  chairs  and  tables  is  conspicuous  by  its 
absence,  nor  does  this  design  appear  in  any  of 
the  illustrated  works  published  by  his  contempor- 
aries. 

Furniture  is  now  made  for  the  most  part  in  large 
factories,  machinery  taking  the  place  of  the  skilled 
craftsman.  Designers  leave  to  others  the  execution 
of  their  ideas.  It  is  not  the  object  of  this  chapter 
to  discuss  the  technical  qualities  of  the  Chippen- 
dales' work,  but  it  must  be  remembered  that  they 
themselves  not  only  designed  but  carved  much  of  the 


THE  CHIPPENDALES  27 

best  furniture  that  left  their  workshop.  Their  work- 
men who  were  not  employed  as  draughtsmen  made 
every  chair,  table,  etc.,  by  hand,  under  their  masters' 
guidance. 

About  four  years  ago  a  curiously  carved  doorway 
was  left  temporarily  standing  near  the  site  of  No. 
60,  St.  Martin's  Lane,  though  the  premises  them- 
selves had  been  pulled  down.  This  doorway  once 
formed  the  entrance  to  the  Chippendales'  house  and 
shop.  Even  that  last  relic  of  the  old  days  has  now 
disappeared,  and  the  home  of  the  famous  cabinet- 
makers has  given  place  to  a  pile  of  tall  red-brick 
buildings. 

The  year  1755  brought  calamity  to  the  Chippen- 
dale shop  and  its  inhabitants — a  calamity  which 
may  have  threatened  its  very  existence. 

''Saturday,  April  5th,  1755. 

"  A  fiie  broke  out  in  the  workshop  of  Mr.  Chip- 
pendale, a  cabinet-maker,  near  St.  Martin's  Lane, 
which  consumed  the  same,  wherein  were  the  chests 
of  twenty-two  workmen." — Gentleman  s  Magazine. 

Such  is  the  simple  announcement,  and  unfor- 
tunately no  further  details  appeared  in  the  daily 
papers.  Nevertheless  even  this  meagre  account  of 
the  fire  is  of  interest,  as  it  shows  the  condition  of 
the  Chippendale  business  at  that  time.  There  is  no 
means  of  ascertaining  how  far  the  damage  went, 
nor  whether  the  shop  itself  was  burned.  All  that 


28       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

can  be  known  for  certain  is  that  the  disaster  had 
no  permanent  results. 

A  second  edition  of  the  "Director"  was  pub- 
lished in  1759,  and  a  third,  with  300  plates,  in 
1761  (price  -^i  is.).  The  bookseller,  T.  Becket,  of 
Tully's  Head,  in  the  Strand,  advertised  the  second 
edition  among  his  new  books  in  the  daily  papers. 
Thus: 

"Sept.  4.  1760. 

"  Chippendale's  elegant  designs  for  Household 
furniture." 

A  more  elaborate  advertisement  appeared  in  1766: 

"  Household  Furniture — being  the  completest 
book  of  the  kind  extant. 

"This  day  is  published  in  one  large  volume,  folio, 
price  ^3.  o.  CL  bound.  The  'Gentleman  and  Cabinet- 
Maker's  Director:'  containing  200  Copper  Plates 
elegantly  engraved  from  designs  of  the  most  useful 
and  ornamental  Household  Furniture:  consisting  of 
Chairs,  Beds,  Bookcases,  Library  Tables,  Cabinets, 
Organs,  China-Cases,  Candlesticks,  Pier-glasses, 
Chandeliers,  Girandoles,  Chimney-pieces,  Stove- 
grates  and  other  Ornaments  in  the  newest  and  most 
fashionable  taste. 

"  By  Thomas  Chippendale,  Cabinet-Maker  in 
St.  Martin's  Lane.  Printed  for  the  Author  and  sold 
by  him  at  his  House  in  St.  Martin's  Lane." 


THE  CHIPPENDALES  29 

In  the  year  1760  Chippendale  was  elected  a 
member  of  the  Society  for  the  Encouragement  of 
Arts,  Manufactures,  and  Commerce.  This  useful 
body,  generally  known  as  the  Society  of  Arts,  was 
founded  in  1754,  and  is  still  flourishing.  At  the  end 
of  the  eighteenth  century  it  enrolled  many  of  the 
greatest  men  in  the  world  of  art,  literature,  and 
science.  In  a  small  volume  containing  the  auto- 
graphs of  the  earliest  members,  Chippendale's  name 
appears  beside  those  of  Sir  Joshua  Reynolds, 
Edward  Gibbon,  Richardson,  Dr.  Johnson,  David 
Garrick,  Horace  Walpole,  the  Earl  of  Bute,  and 
John  Wilkes.  The  Society,  when  Chippendale  was 
elected,  had  its  quarters  in  the  Strand,  near  Beau- 
fort Buildings.  The  house  it  now  occupies  in  John 
Street,  Adelphi,  was  built  by  Robert  Adam,  also 
a  member,  in  1774.  One  cannot  help  speculating 
as  to  the  terms  upon  which  Chippendale  stood 
with  his  fellow  members.  However  certain  of  his 
powers  as  a  craftsman  he  must  have  felt  ill  at  ease 
in  the  company  of  men  of  learning  and  distinction. 
He  continued  in  the  Society  until  his  death. 

In  1766  a  change  took  place  in  the  Chippendale 
firm,  owing  to  the  death  of  a  partner,  a  Scotsman 
named  James  Rannie.1 

1  Rannie  died  very  well-to-do.  His  will,  as  "of  the  parish  of 
Saint  Martin  in  the  Fields  .  .  .  upholder  and  cabinet  maker,"  was 
made  I7th  and  proved  2ist  January,  1766  ;  it  is  registered  in  the 
Prerogative  Court  of  Canterbury,  32  Tyndall. 


30       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

On  Monday,  roth  February,  1766,  the  follow- 
ing announcement  appeared  in  the  "  Public  Adver- 
tiser": 

"Whereas  by  the  Death  of  Mr.  James  Rannie 
late  of  St.  Martin's  Lane,  Cabinet  Maker  &  Up- 
holder, the  Partnership  between  him  &  Mr.  Thomas 
Chippendale,  dissolved  at  his  death  &  the  Trade 
will  for  the  future  be  carried  on  by  Mr.  Chippendale 
on  his  own  account.  All  Persons  who  have  any 
Claim  on  the  said  Partnership  are  desired  forthwith 
to  send  in  their  Accounts  up  to  the  20  January  in- 
clusive, to  Mr.  Thomas  Haig  at  the  House  of  Mr. 
Chippendale.  And  all  Persons  indebted  to  the  said 
Partnership  are  desired  to  pay  the  Same  to  the  said 
Thomas  Haig,  who  is  lawfully  authorised  to  receive 
the  Same." 

In  the  following  month  a  great  sale  of  stock  was 
held.  Between  March  3rd  and  24th  this  sale  was 
advertised  nearly  every  day  in  the  "  Public  Adver- 
tiser "  as  follows: 

"To  be  sold  by  Audion  by  Mr.  Pervil. 

"  Some  Time  this  month  on  the  Premises  in 
St.  Martin's  Lane. 

"  All  the  genuine  Stock  in  Trade  of  Mr.  Chip- 
pendale and  his  late  partner  Mr.  Rannie,  deceased, 
Cabinet-makers,  consisting  of  a  great  Variety  of 
fine  Cabinet-Work,  Chairs  and  a  Parcel  of  fine 


THE  CHIPPENDALES  31 

seasoned  Feathers ;  as  also  all  the  large  unwrought 
Stock  consisting  of  Mahogany  and  other  Woods  in 
Blank  Boards  and  Wainscot,  of  which  sale  timely 
notice  will  be  given  in  this  and  other  Papers. 

11  The  Business  to  be  carried  on  for  the  future 
by  Mr.  Chippendale  on  the  Premises  upon  his  own 
Account." 

On  Monday,  lyth,  the  day  of  the  auction  was 
fixed  for  the  24th  of  that  same  month,  and  some 
further  items  were  added  to  the  original  announce- 
ment: 

"A  great  Variety  of  fine  Mahogany  £  Tulup 
(sic)  Wood,  Cabinets,  Desks,  &  Bookcases,  Cloaths 
Presses,  double  Chests  of  Drawers,  Commodes, 
Buroes,  fine  Library,  Writing,  Card,  Dining  and 
other  Tables,  Turkey  &  other  Carpets,  one  of  which 
is  13  feet  by  19  feet,  Six  fine  Pattern  Chairs  with 
sundry  other  Pieces  of  curious  Cabinet  Work.  .  .  . 

"The  whole  to  be  viewed  on  Friday  next  to  the 
Hour  of  Sale  (Sunday  excepted)  which  will  begin 
each  day  punctually  at  Twelve. 

"  Catalogues  to  be  had  the  Days  of  Viewing  at 
the  Place  of  Sale  &  at  Mr.  Pervil's,  the  Upper  End 
of  Bow  Street,  Covent  Garden." 

The  Sale  appears  to  have  lasted  three  days, 
during  which  time  it  was  advertised  daily. 

The  exact  year  of  the  death  of  Chippendale  (II) 


32        ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

has  been  ascertained  for  the  first  time  from  the  fol- 
lowing entry  in  the  burial  register  of  St.  Martin's 
Church: 


"  November  13.  ...  Thomas  Chippendale." 

No  age  is  given.  The  fact  that  a  man  so  busi- 
ness-like and  practical  should  have  left  no  will 
seems  to  point  to  a  death  of  some  sudden  nature. 
Appended  is  the  entry  relating  to  his  estate  in  the 
Administration  Act  Book,  Prerogative  Court  of 
Canterbury  : 

"  December  1779 
"Thomas  Chippendale. 

"On  the  sixteenth  day,  administration  of  the 
goods,  chattels  and  credits  of  Thomas  Chippendale, 
late  of  the  parish  of  Saint  Martin  in  the  ffields  in 
the  co.  of  Middlesex,  deceased,  was  granted  to  Eliza- 
beth Chippendale  widow,  the  relict  of  the  said  de- 
ceased, having  been  first  sworn  duly  to  administer." 

Another  grant  was  made  in  January,  1784,  and 
from  this  later  record  we  are  able  to  complete  the 
account  of  the  Chippendale  family.  Chippendale  (I  I) 
left  four  children,  Thomas,  Mary  (spinster),  John, 
and  Charles.  If  the  marriage  register  at  St.  George's 
betaken  to  refer  to  the  cabinet-maker,  Elizabeth  must 
have  been  the  second  wife.  She  administered  to  her 
late  husband's  "goods,  chattels  &  credits"  until 


THE  CHIPPENDALES  33 

her  death,  which  occurred  previously  to  1784.  A 
certain  Philip  Davies  was  then  appointed  as  ad- 
ministrator in  her  place  in  order  to  "  attend  and 
confirm  proceedings  then  impending  in  the  Court  of 
Chancery." 

The  said  proceedings  were  for  the  recovery  of  a 
long  outstanding  debt  of  the  Chippendale  firm.  The 
debtor  was  no  other  than  the  notorious  singer  and 
entertainer,  Theresa  Cornelys,  of  Carlisle  House, 
Soho  Square.  According  to  John  Taylor1  (of  "  Mon- 
sieur Tonson  "  fame),  she  was  known  at  one  time 
"as  the  empress  of  the  region  of  elegance  and 
fashion."  Subscription  concerts,  balls,  and  mas- 
querades patronized  by  royalty  and  half  the  peerage 
were  held  at  her  house.  These  entertainments  were 
said  to  be  of  "  unparalleled  splendour,"  but  she  en- 
countered much  opposition  from  the  proprietors  of 
the  Italian  Opera  House  and  theatrical  managers, 
and  lost  money  year  by  year.  In  November,  1772, 
she  was  declared  a  bankrupt.  For  some  time  before 
her  death  she  made  shift  to  live  as  a  "vendor  of 
asses'  milk,  trailing  a  small  hand-cart  from  door  to 
door";  but  she  ended  her  days  in  the  Fleet  Prison 
in  1797.  Upon  her  bankruptcy  she  had  assigned  her 
estate  and  property  to  Chippendale  and  various 
other  creditors.  Subsequently  it  was  discovered 
that  the  greater  part  of  what  she  owned  had  been 
previously  mortgaged  to  a  certain  Arthur  Jones. 

1  "  Records  of  My  Life"  (1832). 
D 


34       ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

The  final  result  of  the  law-suit  between  these  con- 
tending creditors  is  not  known;  but  since  Jones,  as 
mortgagee,  had  the  prior  claim,  it  seems  unlikely  that 
the  Chippendales  recovered  much  of  their  debt. 

On  the  death  of  Chippendale  (II),  his  eldest  son 
succeeded  to  the  business. 

The  third  Thomas  Chippendale  entered  into  part- 
nership with  Thomas  Haig,  a  Scotsman,  who  had 
been  bookkeeper  to  James  Rannie,  and  also  one  of 
executors.  Haig  probably  had  no  practical  know- 
ledge of  upholstery.  Rannie's  widow,  Grizzle,  who 
survived  her  husband  for  many  years,  lent  Haig 
money,  which  he  put  into  the  business.  According 
to  the  directories  the  firm  from  1779  to  1784  was 
styled  "Chippendale  and  Haig";  but  in  1785  Haig 
appears  as  the  senior  partner.  Haig  withdrew  from 
the  firm  in  1796,  and  made  his  will  on  ist  October 
of  that  year.  He  left  many  liberal  legacies,  includ- 
ing one  of  ;£i,ooo  to  his  "  very  old  friend  and  late 
partner  Thomas  Chippendale."  Unluckily  these 
generous  bequests,  together  with  all  debts  and  "  in- 
cidental expenses,"  were  to  be  paid,  so  Haig  directed, 
"  out  of  the  Monies  secured  to  me  on  several  Bonds 
of  Thomas  Chippendale,  my  Successor  in  Business, 
and  to  be  so  paid  and  drawn  out  according  to  the 
Tenor  of  such  Bonds."  As  Chippendale  still  con- 
tinued a  defaulter,  Haig  in  a  codicil  dated  i6th 
August,  1802,  directed  his  executors  to  take  such 
measures  for  the  recovery  of  the  money,  immediately 


THE  CHIPPENDALES  35 

after  his  death,  as  they  might  see  fit,  the  legacy  to 
Chippendale  to  become  null  and  void  unless  he 
settled  within  a  twelvemonth.1 

In  1814  Chippendale  opened  a  shop  in  the  Hay- 
market — No.  57 — and  for  four  years  carried  on  the 
old  St.  Martin's  Lane  business  simultaneously  with 
the  new  venture.  In  1821  he  removed  to  42,  Jermyn 
Street.  Like  his  father  he  was  a  member  of  the  Society 
of  Arts;  his  name  appears  on  the  list  of  members 
from  1794  to  1814.  George  Smith  (1826)  says  of 
him  that  "he  was  known  only  amongst  a  few  .  .  . 
but  possessed  a  great  degree  of  taste  with  great  ability 
as  a  draughtsman  and  designer." 

This  Chippendale  devoted  himself  not  only  to 
decorative,  but  to  fine  art  as  well,  and  exhibited 
five  pictures  at  the  Royal  Academy. 

In  1784,  "  A  Gang  of  Gypsies,"  and  "Mirth  in 
Low  Life." 

In  1785,  "A  Watchman,"  and  "  An  Orange  Girl." 

In  1801,  "  Inside  of  a  Prison  with  the  effect  of 
lamplight." 

1  Haig  died  unmarried  23rd  May,  1803,  in  St.  Martin's  Lane  in 
his  seventy-sixth  year  ("Gentleman's  Magazine,"  June,  1803,  p. 
598).  In  his  will,  proved  2nd  June  following,  he  described  himself  as 
"  of  Saint  Martin's  Lane,  gentleman,"  and  desired  to  be  buried  in 
the  vault  of  St.  Martin's  church  "  near  to  the  Body  of  my  late  re- 
vered and  venerable  Master  Mr.  Rannie  who  lays  there  interred  " 
(Prerogative  Court  of  Canterbury,  536  Marriott).  His  cousin  and 
one  of  his  numerous  legatees,  John  Haig,  cabinet-maker,  of  the 
parish  of  St.  Martin-in-the- Fields,  may  have  been  in  Chippendale's 
business. 


36       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

His  will,  of  which  the  following  is  an  abstract, 
was  dated  from  61,  Regent  Street,  Vincent  Square, 
Westminster,  2nd  December,  1822. 

"  I  being  of  sound  mind,  but  considering  myself 
in  a  dying  state  give  and  bequeath  to  Sarah  Wheat- 
ley,  wife  of  Henry  Wheatley  of  Regent  Street  afor- 
said,the  whole  of  my  personal  property  of  whatsoever 
description  I  may  die  possessed  of,  for  her  whole 
and  sole  use  independent  of  her  husband  and  I 
hereby  constitute  her  my  sole  executrix."1 

The  will  was  proved  by  Sarah  Wheatley  on  28th 
January,  1823. 

From  time  to  time  the  Chippendales  received 
orders  to  furnish  large  country  houses,  and  this 
proved  a  considerable  source  of  profit  to  them.  Chip- 
pendale (I  I)  worked  at  Harewood  House,  Yorkshire; 
at  Lord  Poulett's  seat,  Hinton  St.  George;  at  Row- 
ton  Castle,  Salop;  and  probably  at  Stourhead,  Bath. 
In  each  case  documents  or  bills  have  been  preserved 
which  prove  that  the  great  cabinet-maker  was  pre- 
sent in  person  to  supervise  the  work. 

Chippendale  (III)  and  his  men  spent  some 
months  at  Lord  Townshend's  country  place,  Rayn- 
ham  Hall,  Norfolk.  In  a  letter  dated  3rd  July,  1819, 
Lord  Townshend  informed  Chippendale  that  he 
had  put  the  sum  of  ^1,200,  "in  payment  of  work 

1  Prerogative  Court  of  Canterbury,  1 1  Richards. 


THE  CHIPPENDALES  37 

done,"  to  the  cabinet-maker's  credit  at  Messrs.  Bart- 
lay  and  Co.,  bankers,  Aylsham. 

Some  original  sketches  by  Chippendale  (II)  are 
preserved  in  the  Art  Library,  Victoria  and  Albert 
Museum.  Three  of  the  drawings  have  the  subscrip- 
tion "T.  Chippendale"  written  in  ink  at  the  foot, 
and  are  perhaps  the  only  diagrams  now  in  existence 
which  bear  his  autograph  signature  as  designer. 
These  were  the  original  designs  for  some  of  the  new 
plates  in  the  third  edition  of  the  "  Director,"  1761. 

The  circumstances  under  which  the  portfolio 
was  presented  to  the  Victoria  and  Albert  Museum 
are  a  sufficient  proof  of  their  authenticity.  In  1862 
Mr.  George  Lock  contributed  a  number  of  pen- 
sketches  by  eighteenth-century  designers  to  the 
Edinburgh  section  of  the  International  Exhibition. 
Of  these,  seventy  were  by  Chippendale's  contem- 
porary, Matthias  Lock  (the  grandfather  of  the  ex- 
hibitor) ;  and  twenty,  representing  chandeliers,  glass 
and  picture-frames,  tables,  etc.,  were  by  Chippen- 
dale himself.  When  the  exhibition  was  over,  Mr. 
George  Lock's  whole  collection  was  sent  as  a  gift  to 
the  Museum. 

It  is  interesting  to  observe  from  the  amount  of 
detail  given  in  these  diagrams,  that  Chippendale 
did  not,  as  so  often  asserted,  roughly  sketch  his 
ideas  and  leave  to  the  engraver  the  task  of  working 
out  his  suggestions.  The  drawings  are  all  executed 
in  Indian  ink,  a  "  brass-pen  "  was  used  for  the  out- 


38       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

lines  and  a  <(  hair-pencil  "  for  the  curves  and  delicate 
shading.  In  many  of  the  Chippendale  designs  which 
are  not  signed,  the  names  of  the  subjects  depicted 
are  noted  in  a  handwriting  identical  with  that  of  the 
signatures. 

At  some  time  between  1820  and  1834,  eleven 
plates,  without  the  name  of  either  designer  or 
engraver,  were  issued  as  "Chippendale's  Designs 
for  Sconces,  Chimney  and  Looking-glass  Frames, 
In  the  Old  French  Style,"  etc.  These  have  lately 
been  proved x  to  be  a  mere  reproduction  of  sketches 
by  Thomas  Johnson.  Again,  in  1834,  John  Weale, 
a  well-known  publisher,  of  No.  59,  High  Holborn, 
brought  out  another  book  of  supposed  Chippendale 
designs  (if,  indeed,  he  was  not  responsible  for  the 
first),  calling  it  "  Chippendale's  One  Hundred  and 
Thirty-three  Designs  of  Interior  Decorations  in  the 
Old  French  and  Antique  Styles."  But  it  has  been 
clearly  shown  that  this  also  was  a  forgery,  since  the 
drawings  were  all  by  Johnson  and  Matthias  Lock. 
The  signatures  of  the  real  designers  were  stoned 
out  and  that  of  Chippendale  substituted  at  the  foot 
of  each  plate — the  object  being  probably  to  make 
the  book  more  saleable.  In  1858-9  a  second  edition 
of  this  book,  with  additional  sketches,  was  pub- 
lished by  Weale  as  "  Old  English  and  French 
Ornament." 

1  Cf.  "Thomas  Chippendale,"  by  R.  S.  Clouston,  Part  III,  in 
"  The  Connoisseur  "  for  September,  1903. 


CHAPTER  III 

MATTHIAS   DARLY 

AMONG  the  numerous  designers  of  the  second 
half  of  the  eighteenth  century,  Matthias  Darly 
has  a  place  apart.  He  devoted  himself  to  two  dis- 
tinct branches  of  art,  the  designing  nf  ornament 
and  the  drawing-  of  caricatures.  As  a  designer  of 
ceilings,  frames,  brackets,  and  panels  for  decorative 
carving,  he  was  second  to  none  of  the  great  masters 
of  the  period,  and  he  was  equally  well  known  as  a 
caricaturist  and  printseller.  The  greater  part  of  his 
productions  were  etcher^  coloured,  or  engraved  by 
his  own  hand,  and  in  the  capacity  of  engraver  he 
was  employed  by  Thomas  Chippendale. 

Owing,  no  doubt,  to  Darly's  remarkable  ver- 
satility it  has  been  hitherto  supposed  that  there 
were  two  designers  and  engravers  of  his  name. 
Darly  the  publisher  and  caricaturist  was  held  to  be 
a  very  inferior  decorative  artist l  and  an  altogether 
different  man  from  Darly  the  designer  of  note 
(author  of  the  "  Ornamental  Architect ").  After  a 
careful  comparison  of  style,  dates,  addresses  and 

1  To  this   Darly  was   attributed  "  A    New  Book  of  Chinese 
Designs"  (1754). 

39 


40       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

signatures,  it  is  now  certain  that  the  two  Darlys 
were  in  fact  one  and  the  same  person. 

During  the  first  part  of  his  career  Matthias  (or 
Matthew)  Darly  (spelt  also  Barley)  often  removed 
from  one  part  of  the  Strand  to  another — sometimes 
his  business  was  carried  on  at  two  or  three  branch 
depots  simultaneously,  but  his  shops  were  always 
known  by  the  sign  of  the  "Acorn"  or  "Golden 
Acorn."  An  address  was  printed  on  all  his  publica- 
tions, and  by  tracing  him  from  shop  to  shop  it  can 
easily  be  seen  that  the  same  class  of  productions 
was  issued  from  each  fresh  address. 

Darly  is  supposed  to  have  begun  life  as  an 
architect,  afterwards  giving  up  his  profession  to 
start  as  a  publisher  with  a  partner  named  Edwards. 
His  first  known  publication  was  an  engraved  carica- 
ture partly  coloured  by  hand,  "The  Cricket-players 
of  Europe  "(Edwards  and  Darly,  1741,  "The  Acorn," 
opposite  Hungerford  Strand).  By  the  middle  of  the 
eighteenth  century  a  distinct  English  school  of 
satirical  drawing  had  come  into  existence.  Shops 
were  opened  for  the  sale  of  caricatures,  which  af- 
forded a  most  profitable  trade.  Darly  in  the  Strand 
and  Carrington  Bowles  in  St.  Paul's  Churchyard 
were  the  best  known  of  these  printsellers.  Thus,  in 
a  print  entitled  "  Ecce  Homo"  (1775),  a  rival  pub- 
lisher was  shown  attacking  Darly's  shop  windows 
with  a  cane.  Another  view  of  his  windows,  with  their 
display  of  caricatures,  was  given  in  "  The  Macaroni 


MATTHIAS  DARLY  41 

Print  Shop  "  (i  772)  ;  and  in  a  print  dated  1  762,  "  The 
Hungry  Mob  of  Scribblers  and  Etchers,"  Lord  Bute 
was  represented  as  distributing  money  from  the 
steps  of  a  portico,  while  the  publisher  himself  and 
Dr.  Johnson  were  among  the  spectators  of  the  scene. 
The  importance  of  Darly's  shop  at  the  time  is  further 
shown  by  J.  T.  Smith,  who,  in  his  entertaining 
book  "  Nollekens  and  his  Times"  (1828),  wrote  of 
Richard  Cosway,  R.A.  :  "So  ridiculously  foppish 
did  he  become  that  Matth.  Darly  the  famous  carica- 
ture print  seller,  introduced  an  etching  of  him  in  his 
window  in  the  Strand  as  the  '  Macaroni  Miniature 
Painter.'  " 

Among  the  marriage  registers  of  St.  George's 
Chapel,  Mayfair  (Register,  Harleian  Soc.),  there  is  an 
entry  on  ist  April,  1750,  which  records  the  marriage 
of  "  Matthias  Darly  and  Elizabeth  Harold  of  St. 
Martin's  in  the  Fields."  This  is  in  all  probability  a 
record  of  Darly's  first  marriage. 

In  1754  Darly  issued  his  earliest  book  of  decor- 
ative drawings.  It  was  entitled:  "A  new  book  of 
Chinese  designs  price  4/-  (published  by  Edwards 
and  Darly  and  sold  by  the  Authors,  first  house  on 
the  right  Northumberland  Court,  Strand,  and  also 
in  Westminster  Hall)." 

In  the  same  year  Darly  engraved  jnany  nf  the 
platen  in  Thomas  Chippendale's  "  Direfonr  "  It 
is  known  that  he  and  Chippendale  were 


fn'enrk,  and  as  Darly  was  an  architect,  the  supposi- 


42       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

tion  is  probably  correct,  which  credits  him  with 
having  made  the  draughts  and  plans  for  many  of 
Chippendale's  designs. 

Between  1757  and  1763  Darly  and  Edwards 
published  a  highly  interesting  series  of  political 
prints.  They  were  issued  separately  on  small  cards 
and  also  bound  together  in  book  form  under  the 
name:  "A  Political  and  Satirical  History."  Each 
year  a  new  edition  appeared  in  which  fresh  plates 
were  added  to  the  series. 

This  history  represented  accurately  the  state  of 
party  feeling  at  the  close  of  George  II's  reign  and 
the  opening  of  George  Ill's.  It  might  be  said  to 
form  a  set  of  illustrations  for  Horace  Walpole's 
"  Letters,"  so  exactly  did  it  verify  the  facts  and  de- 
tails there  recorded.  The  habits  and  peculiarities  of 
the  Duke  of  Newcastle  were  vividly  portrayed,  and 
Holdernesse,  Anson,  Henry  Fox,  as  well  as  George 
Ill's  hated  favourite,  Lord  Bute,  all  figured  in  some 
grotesque  form.  A  number  of  the  best  caricatures 
were  by  George,  Marquis  Townshend,  who,  under 
thenom  de phtme  "  Leonardo  da  Vinci,"  passed  his 
spare  time  in  satirizing  his  fellow  statesmen.  Other 
acting  politicians  of  the  day  also  contributed  to  the 
volume.1 

In    1756    Darly   and    Edwards    removed   from 

1  The  five  editions  of  this  book,  as  well  as  the  spurious  copy 
issued  under  the  title  "  England's  Remembrances  "  are  in  the  British 
Museum. 


MATTHIAS  DARLY  43 

"  Northumberland  Court,"  and  returned  to  the 
Strand  "Opposite  Hungerford."  A  second  address 
also:  "The  Acorn,  Ryders  Court (Cranbourne  Alley), 
Leicester  Fields,"  was  given  in  the  "  History"  and 
was  printed  on  most  of  Darly's  publications  for  a 
period  often  years  (1757-1767).  Mary  Darly,  evid- 
ently the  second  wife  of  Matthias,  appears  to  have 
been  the  manager  of  this  branch.  She  advertised  in 
the  daily  papers  in  her  own  name  as  "  etcher  and 
publisher,"  and  from  the  year  1762  onwards  brought 
out  many  well-known  caricatures.  There  is  a  small 
engraved  portrait  of  Mrs.  Darly  in  the  Print  Room, 
British  Museum,  under  the  title  "  The  Female 
Connoisseur"  (February,  1772),  where  she  is  repre- 
sented as  examining  a  caricature  sketch.  Another 
print  (July,  1772)  called  "The  Female  Macaroni"1 
undoubtedly  depicts  the  same  woman.  It  was  pub- 
lished by  "  M.  Darly,  39,  Strand." 

Darly  was  a  member  of  two  Art  Societies,  "  The 
Incorporated  Society  of  Artists"  and  "The  Free 
Society  of  Artists  " :  both 2  had  sprung  out  of  the 

1  Macaronies   came   into   fashion   about   1764  and   flourished 
between   1770  and  1772.    They  were  young  fops — foolish  rather 
than  vicious — who  affefted  ridiculous  costumes.    They  wore  false 
hair  which  hung  down  to  their  shoulders  in  a  huge  bunch,  and 
absurd  hats  that  lay  on  their  heads  and  did  not  cover  them  at  all. 
Their  coat-sleeves  were  very  tight  and  so  were  their  breeches,  which 
were  generally  white  or  striped.   The  female  Macaronies  wore  huge 
towering  toupees. 

2  A  few  years  after  the  foundation  of  the  Royal  Academy  both 
societies  ceased  to  exist. 


44       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Old  Academy  in  St.  Martin's  Lane.  Their  Exhibi- 
tions were  held  respectively  in  "  Spring  Gardens, 
Charing  Cross,"  and  at  "  Christie's  Great  Rooms, 
Pall  Mall." 

In  the  Exhibition  catalogue  of  the  "  Incorporated 
Society  "  are  the  following  entries : 

(1765.  M.  Darly,  Cranbourne  Alley.)  "A  sec- 
tion of  the  Gallery  of  Mr.  Wyndham's  house  at 
Hammersmith." 

(1766.  M.  Darly,  Cranbourne  Alley.)  "Front 
of  the  Mansion  House — Section  of  Ditto,"  (from 
Drawings  of  Mr.  Dance). 

(1767.  M.  Darly,  39,  Strand?)  "Elevation  of 
the  Duke  of  Bedford's  house  in  Hampshire." 

(1768.  Darly,  39,  Strand?)  "A  specimen  of 
vases  and  brackets  for  embellishing  print-rooms." 

(1770.  Mr.  Darly,  Strand?)  "  Sketches  of  vases 
&  other  antique  ornaments." 

From  the  Free  Society's  Catalogue : 

(1771.  Mr.  Darly  professor  and  teacher  of  orna- 
ment, No.  39,  Strand?)  "  Fifty-six  vases  in  imita- 
tion of  the  antique  for  the  different  manufacturers 
of  great  Britain,  etc." 

(1775.)  "A  profile  etching  of  M.  Darly"  (carica- 
turist), 39,  Strand. 

Of  this  likeness  of  Darly  by  himself,  shown  in 
illustration  VII  there  are  two  copies  in  the  Print 
Room.  Two  other  portraits  are  in  the  Print  Room 


M    DAKLY 


V  £??£.   t      Wwr-  39 


Fig.  VII. 

To  face  page  44. 


MATTHIAS  DARLY  45 

collection  of  caricatures.  One  depicts  a  stout  man 
wearing  a  wig,  and  i  s  marked  "  M.  Darly,  P.O.  A.  G.B." 
(Professor  of  Ornament  to  the  Academy  of  Great 
Britain) — a  title  in  all  probability  of  his  own  inven- 
tion. It  is  dated  1771,  and  also  bears  the  words 
"  Print-seller  and  publisher,  Strand."  This  affords 
a  further  proof  of  the  identity  of  the  publisher  with 
the  designer  of  "  Ornaments."  The  second  full- 
length  portrait  (undated)  signed  on  the  border 
"Matt  Darley,"  shows  a  placard  with  the  words 
"  The  political  designer  of  pots,  pans  &  pipkins." 
Two  of  his  business  cards  are  in  the  same  collec- 
tion. 

The  fashion  of  designing  vases  in  the  classical 
style  was  shown  in  Darly's  publication  of  1767, 
"  Sixty  Vases  by  English,  French,  and  Italian 
Masters,"  and  the  book  was  followed  by  the  exhi- 
bition, as  mentioned  above,  of  similar  studies  in  the 
two  following  years. 

A  caricature  of  1763  gives  the  publisher's  name 
and  address  as  "  M.  Darly,  Mays  Buildings,  Coven' 
Garden  Place."  After  this  year  there  is  no  longer 
any  mention  of  the  partner  Edwards,  who  had  by 
this  time  either  died  or  left  the  firm.  In  1766,  Darly 
took  the  house  and  shop,  No.  39,  Strand  (corner  of 
Buckingham  Street),  where  he  lived  for  the  next 
fifteen  years.1  In  1777  he  had  a  branch  shop  at 

1  Coloured  views  and  plans  of  this  house  as  it  was  in  Darly's 
time  are  in  the  British  Museum  Library. 


46        ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

1 20,    New  Bond  Street,  and  another  in    1780  at 
159,  Fleet  Street. 

"  The  Ornamental  Architect,  or  Young  Artist's 
Instructor,"  Darly's  greatest  book  of  original  de- 
signs, appeared  in  1770-1.  A  few  of  the  plates  had 
been  published  separately  as  early  as  1769.  In 
another  edition  (1773)  the  title  was  changed  to  "  A 
compleat  body  of  architecture  embellished  with  a 
great  variety  of  ornaments."  The  dedication  (by 
"the  author  and  publisher,  Matthias  Darly,  Pro- 
fessor of  Ornament,  and  engraver,  39,  Strand")  is 
in  reality  a  short  essay  on  the  art  of  design : 

"  To  the  Artists,  Manufacturers  &  mechanics  of 
Great  Britain  &  Ireland  " — "  Ornamental  drawing 
has  been  too  long  neglected  .  .  .  this  kingdom  is 
more  indebted  to  a  Richd.  Langcake  (neglected  by 
his  own  country,  is  now  teaching  the  French  the 
art  of  design  .  .  .  they  having  not  his  equal  in  all 
France)  than  to  a  Godfrey  Kneller  and  we  must 
own  that  some  of  the  present  architects  of  this 
nation  by  their  introducing  the  ornaments  made 
use  of  by  the  ancients,  have  done  more  good  than 
all  the  other  polite  artists  put  together.  Witness 
the  pottery  of  this  kingdom ;  there  is  now  perform- 
ances in  clay  which  will  make  the  heavy-handed 
silversmith  blush.  ..."  He  further  explained  that 
his  book  of  102  plates  had  "  something  in  it  adapted 
to  every  profession." 

About  this  time  (1770-1)  Darly  was  the  means  of 


MATTHIAS  DARLY  47 

first  bringing  Henry  Bunbury's  humorous  sketches 
to  the  public  notice.  Several  of  this  famous  artist's 
drawings  were  produced  in  the  volume  "Twenty- 
four  caricatures  by  Ladies,  Gentlemen  and  Art- 
ists." The  designs  in  this  book  as  well  as  the  six 
volumes  of  "  Characters,  Macaronies  and  Carica- 
tures," which  began  to  appear  in  1771,  were  ob- 
tained by  advertisement.  Darly  announced  that 
any  satirical  drawings  that  were  sent  to  him  should 
be  "  engraved  or  etched  on  copper  plates  and  then 
published."  In  1776,  Mrs.  Darly  (address,  39, 
Strand)  brought  out  "  Darly 's  comic  prints  of 
Characters,  Caricatures  and  Macaronies,"  by  Bun- 
bury,  Darly,  Sandby,  Topham  and  others,  price 
^4  45.,  dedicated  to  D.  Garrick,  Esq.  Two  years 
later  Darly  himself  advertised  that  he  was  about 
to  hold  a  "  comic  exhibition,  admittance  one 
shilling." 1 

John  Williams,  who  under  the  name  Anthony 
Pasquin  was  afterwards  famous  as  a  dramatist  and 
miscellaneous  writer,  studied  in  his  early  days  in 
Darly's  studio,  for  with  all  his  other  work,  Darly 
found  time  to  give  lessons  in  "  dry-needle  engrav- 
ing "  and  "  dry  colouring  " ;  indeed,  he  often  adver- 
tised for  pupils.  He  engraved  plates  for  the  illus- 
trated catalogues  of  other  cabinet-makers  besides 
Chippendale,  and  was  constantly  engaged  in  design- 
ing and  executing  bookplates  (Ex  Libris).  Among 

1  See  Redgrave's  "  Di6lionary  of  the  English  School." 


48       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

the  most  interesting  of  his  engravings  were  the  illus- 
trations for  a  quaint  book  of  1764,  "The  Savages 
of  Europe." 

Darly  was  several  times  brought  into  close 
connection  with  the  political  movements  of  his 
time.  His  zealous  partisanship  of  the  famous  John 
Wilkes  is  illustrated  by  two  letters  given  below. 
In  1763  he  was  the  means  of  saving  the  life  of  that 
popular  hero  from  the  would-be  assassin,  James 
Dunn.  Darly's  letter  was  read  in  the  Court  of 
King's  Bench,  where  he  appeared  to  bear  witness 
to  the  facts. 

"Dec.  ;th,  1763.' 

"  SIR, 

"  I  should  not  do  my  duty  if  I  did  not 
acquaint  you  that  the  young  Scotch  Officer  that 
wanted  entrance  at  your  house  is  a  villain  and  his 
intentions  are  of  blackish  dye.  I  had  been  in  his 
company  for  near  four  hours.  That  part  of  our  con- 
versation that  relates  to  you,  consisted  chiefly  of 
his  intentions  of  massacreing  you  the  first  oppor- 
tunity and  that  there  were  thirteen  more  Gentlemen 
of  Scotland  of  the  same  resolution,  and  confederates 
of  his,  who  was  resolved  to  do  it  or  die  in  the  at- 
tempt. Last  night  when  your  trial  was  over  the 
Gentlemen  at  the  Coffee-House  quitted  the  room 
that  I  was  in  (on  account  of  the  shouts  in  the  Hall) 

1  From  "Lloyd's  Evening  Post  and  British  Chronicle,"  9th  and 
1 2th  December,  1763. 


MATTHIAS  DARLY  49 

and  left  the  Scotch  Hero  &  I  together  but  I  abruptly 
left  the  room,  and  went  after  the  people  to  Great 
George  Street  and  on  hearing  a  noise  at  your  door, 
I  went  up,  and  to  my  great  surprise  saw  the  Scots- 
man a-trying  for  entrance;  I  knocked  and  had  ad- 
mittance, which  enraged  the  hero  so  much,  that  he 
swore  revenge  against  the  servant,  and  was  very 
troublesome;  when  I  went  out,  I  heard  a  Gentle- 
man taking  him  to  task  about  his  vowing  vengeance 
on  you  or  your  servant,  upon  which  I  told  the  Gen- 
tleman a  small  part  of  what  I  knew,  and  he  put  him 
in  the  hands  of  two  Watchmen,  and  ordered  him 
to  the  Round-house,  but  at  the  corner  of  Great 
George  Street  I  am  told,  he  was  rescued,  and  ran 
away.  There  was  conversation  passed  between  him 
and  the  company  that  is  not  safe  to  communicate 
by  letter;  his  principles  and  zeal  make  it  unsafe  for 
such  an  abandoned  wretch  to  be  at  large.  Your  own 
discretion,  I  hope,  will  guide  you  to  prevent  any- 
thing that  may  be  intended. 

"  I  am,  with  all  respect,  Sir,  yours, 
11  M.  DARLY, 

"  Cranborn  Alley, 

"  Leicester  Fields. 
"  To  MR.  WILKES, 

"  Great  George  Street." 

This  episode  was  illustrated  in  a  caricature  en- 
titled, "The  Scotch  Damien  "  (1763,  Mary  Darly, 
publisher). 


50       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

The  second  letter  was  an  address  on  "General 
Warrants." 

"  No  GENERAL  WARRANTS 

MATT  DARLY  CITIZEN   AND   CLOCK   MAKER, 

To  HIS  BRETHREN  THE  WORTHY  AND 

INDEPENDENT  LIVERY  OF  LONDON 

"  GENTLEMEN, 

"In  the  Year  1747  a  GENERAL  WARRANT 
was  issued  from  the  Secretary  of  State,  to  appre- 
hend, seize,  and  take,  all  such  persons,  papers,  &c. 
&c.  that  the  acting  messenger  then  in  vogue  should 
think  proper;  when  (with  sundry  other  persons)  the 
said  messenger  did,  in  my  absence,  enter  my  house, 
and,  by  force,  did  search  and  examine  my  premises, 
but  did  not,  at  that  time,  take  or  carry  anything 
away;  but  two  days  after  the  said  messenger  did 
forcibly  enter  the  said  premises,  with  a  great  num- 
ber of  thief-takers  and  other  infamous  assistants, 
and  did  take  away  in  bags,  part  of  my  stock  in 
trade,  vny  private  papers,  and  other  things  of  value, 
which  goods  were  never  returned;  and  part  of  them 
was  sold  by  one  REELE,  an  assistant  to  the  Said 
Messenger.  Upon  such  treatment  and  open  violence 
on  the  body  and  property  of  a  CITIZEN,  let  every 
liveryman  of  London  reflect,  and  make  the  case  his 
own;  consider  his  situation,  to  be  torn  from  his 
family,  imprisoned  for  fourteen  days  without  exam- 
ination, his  property  taken  from  him  and  not  re- 


MATTHIAS  DARLY  51 

turned,  roughly  handled  by  an  Attorney  General, 
though  honourably  acquitted  by  the  judge  of  the 
Court  of  King's  Bench,  as  he  not  seeing  any  cause 
of  complaint.  At  that  time  of  day,  the  bare  mention 
of  a  Secretary  of  State's  Warranter  the  appearance 
of  a  King's  Messenger,  was  the  terror  of  every 
Englishman  that  should  chance  to  come  in  their 
way,  they  not  knowing  how  to  get  redress,  till  the 
late  valuable  and  glorious  decisions  obtained  by  the 
Patriotic  and  Inflexible  MR.  WILKES  shewed  the 
People  of  England,  that  their  Persons,  Cabinets, 
and  Property,  was  not  to  be  taken  away  by  arbitrary 
and  nameless  GENERAL  WARRANTS. 

"  MATT  DARLY. 

"  No.  39,  Strand." 

A  copy  of  this  document  is  in  the  Guildhall 
Library.  It  is  not  dated,  but  was  probably  called 
forth  by  the  strong  popular  feeling  manifested  on 
the  occasion  of  Wilkes's  candidature  for  the  County 
of  Middlesex  in  1768.  Darly  called  himself  a  "livery- 
man and  clockmaker  " — apparently  his  right  to  join 
the  Clockmaker's  Guild  must  have  been  as  a  de- 
signer of  clock  cases. 

The  exact  date  of  Darly's  death  is  not  known. 
All  that  can  be  ascertained  is  the  fact  that  his  shop, 
No.  39,  Strand,  was  let  to  a  new  tenant  in  1781, 
and  that  he  issued  no  caricatures  after  October, 
1780. 


CHAPTER  IV 

THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL 

NO  Queen  Anne  cabinet-maker  appears  to  have 
stood  out  among  his  fellows;  not  one  at  least 
is  accredited  with  having  established  a  school  of 
design,  and  the  high  place  accorded  by  tradition  to 
Thomas  Chippendale  must  have  been  due  to  some 
very  special  skill  in  the  combined  arts  of  carving  and 
furniture  making. 

There  is  much  difference  of  opinion  among  con- 
noisseurs on  the  question  whether  Chippendale  was 
the  first  to  introduce  into  England  the  style  which 
bears  his  name,  or  was  simply  one  of  the  craftsmen 
who  best  succeeded  in  crystallizing  and  putting  into 
concrete  form  the  floating  ideas  fashionable  at  the 
time.  Furniture  of  a  specific  school,  known  as 
"Chippendale,"  was  executed  all  over  the  kingdom 
during  a  great  part  of  the  eighteenth  century.  A 
similar  type  of  decoration  was  adopted  by  silver- 
smiths, potters,  and  engravers,  and  the  English  de- 
signs were  widely  imitated  by  contemporary  crafts- 
men, both  in  our  American  and  other  colonies.  In 
Ireland,  also,  much  beautiful  work  was  produced 

52 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  53 

during  the  Chippendale  period,  and  though  no 
doubt  based  on  the  designs  of  the  London  makers, 
the  Irish  style  of  carving  showed  marked  individu- 
ality. On  the  whole  it  was  heavier  in  design  than 
the  English,  and  had  a  flatter  surface. 

Chippendale's  sketches,  published  as  trade  ad- 
vertisements in  the  "  Gentleman's  and  Cabinet- 
maker's Director"  (1754),  contained  some  of  the 
most  beautiful  examples  of  this  "  English  Rococo  " 
style,  and  though  there  can  be  no  historic  proof 
that  the  style  itself  owed  its  existence  to  his  genius 
alone,  it  is  certain  that  his  sphere  of  influence  was 
greater  than  that  of  any  of  his  contemporaries.  Not 
only  was  he  "  the  most  famous  cabinet-maker  of  his 
day," l  but  had  the  reputation  of  being  one  of  the 
finest  carvers  also. 

During  the  eighteenth  century  French  taste  per- 
vaded the  decorative  art  of  nearly  every  country  in 
Europe,  and  the  more  refined  influences  of  Italy 
were  kept  in  the  background.  The  mirror-frames 
made  in  England  by  Huguenot  refugees  have  already 
been  noticed,  and  there  is  no  doubt  that  this  work 
helped  greatly  in  popularizing  French  designs.  Just 
as  Dutch  models  had  been  modified  through  the 
influence  of  Wren's  classicism  and  of  Gibbons's 
carving,  so  ornamentation  of  a  gay  and  almost 
dramatic  inventiveness  now  began  to  take  the  place 
of  the  classic.  Before  the  eighteenth  century  had  far 

1  J.  T.  Smith's  "  Nollekens  and  his  Times"  (1828). 


54       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

advanced,  the  massive  Louis-Quatorze  decoration 
and  the  more  extravagant  shapes  of  the  Louis- 
Quinze  period  had  grafted  themselves  upon  every 
kind  of  furniture.  But  Chippendale  designs  were 
composed  of  many  elements,  and  the  great  crafts- 
men showed  their  skill  by  so  blending  and  harmon- 
izing as  to  evolve  from  a  number  of  different  types 
a  beautiful  and  architectural  whole.  The  passion 
for  all  things  Chinese  was  greatly  stimulated  by 
the  researches  of  Sir  William  Chambers  (1726- 
1796),  who  returned  to  England  from  his  travels 
in  the  East  Indies,  China,  and  Italy  in  1755.  His 
"  Designs  of  Chinese  buildings,  furniture,  dresses, 
machines  and  utensils,"  published  in  1757,  un- 
doubtedly gave  a  great  impulse  to  the  Chinese 
craze.  Yet,  before  Sir  William  Chambers  began 
his  work,  both  Chippendale's  "Director"  (1754) 
and  Edwards  and  Darly's  book  of  Chinese  designs, 
buildings  and  furniture,  which  appeared  the  same 
year,  prove  that  the  adoption  of  Chinese  forms  in 
\  furniture  decoration  was  already  very  popular  in 
this  country.  In  France,  during  the  period  of  Louis- 
Quatorze  and  Louis-Quinze,  Chinese  devices  entered 
very  largely  into  the  scheme  of  rococo  decoration. 
Watteau,  one  of  the  greatest  masters  of  the  rococo 
age,  contributed  largely  to  the  Chinese  movement. 
When  the  English  adopted  the  French  style  of  orna- 
mentation at  the  beginning  of  the  Chippendale  era, 
the  French  "  Chinoiserie,"  might  very  naturally  have 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  55 

been  borrowed  also.  Yet  the  large  importations,  even 
in  the  seventeenth  century,  of  Chinese  screens  and 
cabinets,  the  popularity  of  English  lacquer-ware  in 
imitation  of  the  Chinese  style,  as  well  as  the  many 
fine  collections  of  Chinese  porcelain,  all  point  to  an 
independent  "Chinese  craze"  on  this  side  of  the 
Channel.  It  was  imitative  of,  but  not  necessarily 
copied  from,  the  French. 

The  Gothic  revival,  ardently  encouraged 
Horace  Walpole,  showed  itself  in  Chippendale  fur- 
niture by  the  introduction  of  pointed  curves,  tre- 
foils, and  sunken  panels.  In  spite  of  occasional 
breaks,  the  Gothic  style,  from  its  first  appearance 
in  the  twelfth  century,  was  always  a  radical  con- 
stituent of  English  decorative  art.  And  although 
"Chippendale-Gothic"  had  little  in  common  with 
its  prototype  in  the  middle  ages,  the  recurrence  of 
certain  Gothic  motives  in  work  of  this  and  even 
of  the  Adam  period  was  not  a  mere  affected  imita- 
tion, but  a  direct  consequence  of  the  national  tend- 
ency to  repeat  the  elemental  and  original  types. 
Furniture  fanciers  are  much  inclined  to  depreciate 
such  chairs  and  cupboards  based  on  Gothic  forms 
because  curves,  arches,  and  ornaments  were  intro- 
duced which  were  unknown  to  any  period  of  Gothic 
architecture.  Nevertheless,  if  the  general  effect  alone 
be  taken  into  consideration,  it  will  be  found  that 
the  finest  examples  display  not  only  beauty  and 
originality,  but  are  perhaps  more  truly  national  in 


56       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

/their  ornamentation  than  any  productions  of  the 

^Chippendale  school. 

Lastly,  there  was  the  influence  of  the  architects. 
As  during  the  Queen  Anne  period,  so  throughout 
the  Chippendale  era  the  main  outlines,  especially 
of  the  larger  pieces,  were  entirely  architectural  in 
form. 

The  principal  men  who  issued  books  of  design 
in  the  Chippendale  style  were  Mayhew  and  Ince, 
Johnson,  Manwaring  and  his  fellow  members  of  the 
"  Society  of  Upholsterers,"  Lock  and  Copland. 

J.  Mayhew  and  W.  Ince's  publication  was  en- 
titled "The  Universal  System  of  Household  Fur- 
niture "  (undated).  The  plates  were  engraved  by  M. 
Darly,  and  the  letterpress  was  both  in  French  and 
English.  William  Ince,  cabinet-maker,  appeared 
among  the  list  of  subscribers  in  Chippendale's  "  Di- 
rector "  in  1759;  and  the  firm,  "  Mayhew  and  Ince, 
cabinet-makers,  upholders,  dealers  in  plate  and 
glass,  Broad  Street,  Carnaby  Market,"  was  given  in 
the  "  London  Directory  "  for  I776.1  They  and  their 
sons  continued  the  business  until  1812.  Want  of 
proportion  and  exaggeration  characterized  a  great 
deal  of  their  published  work;  but  there  are  existing 
specimens  of  chairs  distinctly  traceable  to  these 
makers  which  exhibit  much  artistic  feeling  and  a 
beautiful  flow  and  movement  in  the  ornamenta- 
tion. 

1  And  20,  Marshall  Street,  1781-1812. 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  57 

Thomas  Johnson,  carver,  Westminster,  was  the 
author  of  two  books  of  design  (1758  and  1761).  His 
sketches  for  frames,  girandoles,  and  clock-cases  were 
very  extravagant  types  of  rococo  and  Chinese- 
Chippendale.  They  seem  to  have  been  intended 
to  advertise  his  skill  as  a  carver — to  show  that  no 
curves,  twists,  scrolls  and  ornaments,  however  fan- 
ciful, were  beyond  his  powers  of  execution — and 
can  hardly  have  represented  furniture  which  was 
actually  made.  A  few  of  his  small  mirrors  and  hall- 
lanthorns,  however,  were  simple  and  graceful  in 
design.  Some  earlier  plates  giving  sketches  of 
"Twelve  girandoles,"  dated  from  "Queen  Street 
near  Seven  Dials  1755,"  were  inserted  in  his  pub- 
lication of  1758,  and  these  also  were  less  extravagant 
than  the  majority  of  his  work. 

Robert  Manwaring,  chair-maker  and  cabinet- 
maker, issued  between  1765  and  1766  two  books  of 
furniture-design.  A  number  of  his  plates,  depicting 
chairs  of  all  kinds,  were  also  reprinted  in  the  second 
edition  of  a  publication  brought  out  about  1766  by 
the  "  Society  of  Upholsterers,"  of  which  Manwaring 
was  a  member.  In  spite  of  many  exaggerations,  his 
style  was,  as  a  whole,  typical  of  some  of  the  best 
work  of  the  period.  He  gave  numerous  drawings  of 
chairs  showing  plain,  graceful  scrolls,  conceived  very 
much  on  the  same  lines  as  those  of  Chippendale 
himself.  In  the  preface  to  Manwaring's  "  Cabinet- 
maker's and  chair-maker's  real  friend  and  com- 


58       ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

panion "  (Haymarket,  1765),  there  is  a  quotation 
from  Chippendale's  "Director,"  and  Manwaringwas 
doubtless  considerably  influenced  by  that  master. 
The  Chinese  chairs  in  Manwaring's  books  were, 
in  many  instances,  extremely  elegant.  A  small 
bracket  between  the  top  of  the  leg  and  the  front  rail 
of  the  seat,  may  be  regarded  as  especially  character- 
istic of  this  designer. 

Matthias  Lock  and  H.  Copland  were  the  authors 
of  numerous  decorative  designs  which  were  pub- 
lished between  the  years  1740  and  1770.  In  Cop- 
land's first  book,  called  "A  New  Book  of  Orna- 
ments" (1746),  he  was  assisted  by  Bucksher,  and 
these  two  men  seem  to  have  been  in  partnership  in 
Gutter  Lane,  Cheapside.  The  title-page  of  a  sub- 
sequent volume  of  ornaments  which  appeared  in 
1752,  gave  the  names  Copland  (of  Cheapside),  and 
Matthias  Lock  (of  "Ye  Swan,  Tottenham  Crt.  Road"). 
Both  were  well-known  cabinet-makers,  and  from  that 
time  onwards  they  continued  to  publish  together. 
Their  work,  which  can  be  studied  at  the  South 
Kensington  Museum  Art  Library  from  a  number  of 
original  drawings  as  well  as  from  their  published 
books,  belonged  not  only  to  the  Chippendale  school, 
but  also  to  the  later  Adam,  or  Classical  school.  Their 
productions  in  the  Chippendale  style,  to  which  class 
all  their  earlier  designs  belonged,  were  in  many  cases 
overladen  with  ornament,  the  multiplicity  of  lines 
and  curves  being  often  quite  without  meaning.  In 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  59 

their  later  work,  however,  such  as  "  A  New  Book  of 
Ornaments"  (1768),  the  frames,  girandoles,  and  de- 
corations were  in  purely  classical  taste. 

Matthias  Darly,  designer,  publisher,  engraver 
and  caricaturist,  like  Lock  and  Copland,  identified 
himself,  as  far  as  decorative  art  was  concerned,  with 
both  the  Chinese  and  the  Classical  movements  of 
the  eighteenth  century.  The  book  of  Chinese  de- 
signs which  has  already  been  mentioned,  contained 
fantastic  Chinese  ornaments  adapted  to  pier-tables, 
frames,  and  girandoles.  The  style  cannot  be  de- 
scribed as  Chippendale-Chinese,  for  the  sketches 
in  no  way  resembled  Chippendale's  treatment  of 
similar  subjects.  A  few  girandoles,  and  a  couple  of 
mirror-frames,  not  too  overcrowded  with  detail,  are 
the  only  examples  worthy  of  serious  consideration 
in  that  part  of  the  book  devoted  to  furniture.  The 
great  value  of  the  publication,  as  stated  in  Chapter 
XII,  lies  in  the  numerous  designs  suitable  for  lac- 
quer work. 

By  the  year  1766  Darly  had  abandoned  Chinese 
ideas  in  favour  of  classical  subjects.  This  is  clearly 
shown  by  his  "  Book  of  Vases,"  which  came  out  the 
following  year,  and  by  his  magnum  opus,  "The 
Ornamental  Architect"  (1769),  in  which  the  tripods, 
mirrors,  panels,  ceilings,  and  fireplaces  were  severe 
and  chaste,  both  in  outline  and  decoration.  It  is 
evident  that  he  had  imbibed  a'll  that  was  noblest 
in  the  classical  methods  of  Adam  and  Pergolesi. 


6o       ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

The  best  work  of  the  Chippendale  period  was 
characterized  by  dignity,  strength,  and  well-propor- 
tioned lines.  The  carving,  though  often  of  a  different 
type,  was  quite  as  beautiful  as  that  of  Gibbons  and 
his  school.  The  greatest  attention  was  paid  to  the 
laws  governing  the  arrangement  of  masses.  A  vary- 
ing play  of  light  and  shade,  a  soft  transition  from 
one  surface  to  another,  and  an  absence  of  sharp 
angles  and  raw  edges  is  always  perceptible.1  Span- 
ish mahogany  of  the  finest  quality  and  curl,  dark  in 
colour  and  very  heavy,  was  the  wood  principally 
employed  as  a  veneer  for  every  kind  of  furniture. 
The  black-brown  shade  of  this  timber  is  very  notice- 
able ;  it  was  much  deeper  than  that  used  by  later 
craftsmen.  No  inlay  of  any  kind  was  employed; 
carving,  fretting,  gilding,  and  a  little  brass-work 
were  the  only  forms  of  ornamentation.  Many  speci- 
mens of  lacquered  furniture  also  belong  undoubtedly 
to  this  period.  But  as  such  pieces  were  probably 
only  constructed  in  Chippendale  workshops,  and 
decorated  elsewhere,  they  will  be  considered  in  a 
separate  chapter. 

CHAIRS 

The  chairs  of  the  Chippendale  era  displayed  a 
taste  and  individuality  of  expression  which  have 

1  The  ordinary  tools  used  for  oak  and  lime  wood-carving  would 
not  cut  mahogany ;  special  highly-tempered  blades  were  therefore 
manufactured  for  working  the  newly  imported  timber. 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  61 

never  been  surpassed  in  this  class  of  work.  The 
evolution  of  the  chair  from  the  designs  in  use  at  the 
close  of  the  seventeenth  century  can  be  perceived  in 
the  treatment  of  the  splat.  First,  a  shaped  panel, 
solid  or  pierced  with  a  small  opening;  then  a  larger 
opening  and  more  elaborate  piercing;  next,  a  divi- 
sion of  the  splat  into  broad  bands  or  sections. 
Finally,  in  Chippendale  chairs  the  old  panel  shape, 
joined  into  the  framework  of  the  seat,  was  still  re- 
tained, but  in  many  cases  a  finer  division  of  the 
woodwork  imparted  a  new  lightness  and  grace.  The 
backs  were  slightly  lower  and  broader  than  those  of 
the  late  Queen  Anne  period,  and  the  side  uprights, 
instead  of  rounding  into  the  top  rail,  usually  ended 
in  a  carved  and  projecting  angle.  The  great  beauty 
of  these  chairs  consists  in  the  elegance  of  the  back, 
for  the  construction  of  the  lower  part  often  appears 
too  heavy  for  the  delicate  treatment  displayed  in  the 
splat. 

Several  modifications  of  the  cabriole  leg  were  in 
use.  Some  were  of  Louis-Quinze  type,  and  others 
a  modification  of  Queen  Anne,  with  a  "  ball-and- 
claw,"  a  "  club,"  or  a  "  hoof"  foot.  The  square  legs 
of  the  period  were  quite  a  new  feature,  and  were 
sometimes  plain  or  fluted  and  sometimes  elaborately 
carved.  They  were  pentagonal,  not  quadrangular 
as  would  at  first  sight  appear,  for  the  inner  angle 
was  planed  off  to  form  a  small  fifth  side.  This  pecu- 
liarity is  almost  invariably  noticeable  in  the  so- 


62       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

called  square  leg  of  the  Chippendale  school.  The 
fact  is  very  little  known,  but  is  a  valuable  guide  in 
the  recognition  of  a  genuine  piece. 

Whereas  most  Queen  Anne  chairs  had  been 
made  with  a  back  rail  only,  or  with  side  rails  joined 
together  by  a  shaped  stretcher  in  the  middle,  Chip- 
pendale cabinet-makers  oddly  enough  reverted  to 
Elizabethan  and  Jacobean  models,  and  in  the  square- 
legged  chairs  we  often  find  four  rails  all  tied  to- 
gether. The  wide  stuffed  seat,  mostly  carried  on  the 
traditional  method  of  being  separate  and  dropping 
into  a  rebate,  and  the  frame  surrounding  it  was 
either  carved  or  left  plain.  Sometimes,  however, 
the  upholstery  was  drawn  over  and  secured  to  the 
woodwork  by  closely-studded,  brass-headed  nails. 

The  covering  is  thus  fastened  down  in  chair  A, 
illustration  VIII.  This  interesting  example  of  a 
Chippendale  chair,  with  legs  in  the  French  style,  is 
in  the  possession  of  Mr.  Sidney  Letts.  The  splat  is 
pierced  and  carved  with  foliage,  and  leaves  are  also 
used  to  decorate  the  knee,  the  foot,  and  the  seat 
rail.  The  wood  is  mahogany. 

Chair  B,  also  owned  by  Mr.  Letts,  is  of  chestnut. 
The  open-work  splat  is  carved  with  an  elegant  de- 
sign of  leaves,  and  a  conventional  flower  in  the 
centre.  There  is  a  suggestion  of  the  Gothic  arch  in 
the  spaces.  The  square  legs,  frame,  and  braces  are 
enriched  with  carved  ornaments.  The  seat  in  this 
example  is  let  into  a  rebate. 


3C 
U 


. 


Q 

W 
— 
0- 

X 
U 


Fig.  ix.  CHIPPENDALE  CHAIR. 


Fig.  x.  CHIPPENDALE-GOTHIC  CHAIRS. 

To  face  page  62. 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  63 

Colledtors,  following  the  method  suggested  by 
Chippendale  himself,  class  his  chairs  according  to 
the  motives  which  predominate. 

Where  French  influences  prevail,  the  principal 
ornaments  were:  the  Louis-Quatorze  ribbon-pattern, 
or  looped-bows ;  the  curled  endive  leaf  inseparable 
from  the  style  of  Louis-Quinze ;  crinkled  shellwork,  or 
"coquillage,"  often  used  on  the  outer  edge  of  back  or 
splat ;  scrolls  of  various  shapes  and  sizes,  and,  in  the 
earlier  pieces,  a  large  shell.  Illustration  IX  shows 
an  unusually  fine  example  of  a  mahogany  Chippen- 
dale armchair,  with  carving  of  the  rococo  type.  The 
design  is  chiefly  foliage,  with  a  shell  in  the  middle 
of  the  top  rail,  and  a  drooping  flower  in  the  centre 
of  the  splat  and  of  the  deep  seat  frame.  The  side 
uprights  and  arm  supports  are  also  richly  decorated 
with  carving.  The  feet  are  composed  of  a  massive 
lion's  claw-and-ball. 

In  Gothic  chairs  Louis-Quinze  ornamentation 
was  often  mingled  with  Gothic  forms.  The  legs  were 
generally  square.  Illustration  X  depicts  two  ma- 
hogany Gothic  chairs  which  are  characteristic  types 
of  this  class  of  work.  The  chair,  with  projecting 
scroll-corners,  is  ornamented  with  carved  foliage. 
There  is  also  some  carved  decoration  above  the 
pointed  arches,  both  on  the  back  and  arm  supports. 
The  legs  are  square  and  fluted,  and  the  seat  lies  in  a 
rebate.  The  outlines  of  the  oval-backed  chair  are 
more  undulating  than  in  the  last  example.  The 


64       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

front  legs  are  fluted,  have  carved  cross-bands,  and 
are  further  enriched  at  the  top — this  is  most  un- 
usual— with  Gothic  arches  to  correspond  with  the 
chair  back. 

In  Chinese  examples  the  space  between  the  back 
uprights  was  crossed  and  recrossed  by  bars  and  rails, 
but  Chinese  straight  lines  were  often  varied  by 
French  curves  and  ornaments.  As  a  rule  a  Chinese 
back  was  accompanied  by  a  square  leg  (often  fretted) 
in  similar  style. 

Illustration  XXI  depidts  a  beautiful  Chinese 
Chippendale  chair  once  in  the  possession  of  Mr. 
Sidney  Letts.  It  is  of  mahogany  and  is  very  finely 
proportioned.  The  pierced  splat  and  arm  supports 
are  composed  of  elegant  arches  and  cross-pieces; 
the  uprights  and  top  rail  are  carved  and  moulded, 
and  a  pagoda-top  ornament  appears  as  though  rest- 
ing on  the  protruding  corners.  The  centre  ornament 
of  the  top  rail,  and  a  similar  device  on  either  side  of 
the  splat,  also  represents  a  pagoda-top.  The  legs  are 
in  separate  parts,  joined  together  by  bands  ;  they  are 
further  ornamented  by  curved  brackets.  Both  the 
arms  and  the  seat  frame  are  plain,  and  the  contrast 
this  presents  to  the  decorated  portion  of  the  chair  is 
most  pleasing. 

Upholstered  easy  chairs  were  wide  and  roomy, 
and  were  carved  or  fretted  on  the  legs,  the  frame, 
and  the  end  of  the  arms.  The  exquisite  "  petit- 
point"  embroidery  used  for  chair  coverings  was  a 


Fig.  XI. 


PETIT-POINT  CHAIR  AND  SCREEN. 


Fig.  XII.  FRENCH  CHIPPENDALE  CHAIR. 

To  face  page  65, 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  65 

very  important  feature  of  the  period.  The  pattern 
was  generally  a  checquer  design,  and  was  worked 
in  many-coloured  wools  and  silks  on  a  canvas 
ground.  The  materials  were  so  strong  and  durable 
that  the  work  is  often  found  in  a  perfect  state  of 
preservation  at  the  present  day.  In  the  opinion  of 
well-known  experts,  these  covers,  as  well  as  certain 
kinds  of  silk  damask  and  thick  velvet,  are  the  only 
examples  of  upholstery  which  have  been  able  to 
withstand  the  wear  and  tear  of  time.  Horsehair  or 
leather  covers,  and  cane  seats,  being  very  perishable, 
are  probably  never  "  original."  The  seat  coverings, 
mentioned  in  the  "  Director,"  were  "  Spanish  leather 
.  .  .  damask  .  .  .  tapestry  and  other  needlework"; 
and  for  ribbon-back  chairs,  red  morocco. 

The  Queen  Anne  easy  chair,  illustration  XI,  has 
a  covering  of  very  fine  "  petit-point  "  embroidery 
set  in  a  beautiful  framework  of  mahogany.  The 
cabriole  legs  have  a  carved  shell  on  the  knee,  and 
are  finished  with  a  club  foot. 

In  illustration  XII  we  have  a  good  type  of 
French  Chippendale. 

Many  of  the  armchairs,  as  well  as  a  few  tables 
and  heavier  pieces,  were  fitted  with  leather  casters. 
These  curious  old  rollers  were  formed  of  wide 
pieces  of  leather  or  hard  wood,  with  brass  mounts  at 
either  end ;  they  were  often  sunk  so  deeply  into  the 
woodwork  of  the  foot  as  scarcely  to  protrude  beyond 
the  surface  level.  It  was  not  till  nearly  the  end  of  the 

F 


66       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

century  that  brass  casters,  more  like  those  of  modern 
times,  began  to  be  made. 

Illustration  XIII  shows  a  Chippendale  mahog- 
any settee,  once  the  property  of  Mr.  James  Orrock, 
which  is  fitted  with  leather  casters.  The  open-work 
back  is  boldly  carved  with  knots  of  ribbon,  tassels, 
scroll  foliage,  and  shellwork;  the  cabriole  legs  are 
also  carved.  The  settee  forms  part  of  a  suite  of  eleven 
chairs.1 

SIDEBOARDS 

The  sideboard  as  designed  by  Chippendale  was 
merely  a  serving  table  or  carving  board.  The  stand 
consisted  of  a  rail  some  four  or  six  inches  deep, 
generally  widening  in  the  centre  where  a  lion's  head 
or  coat  of  arms  was  carved  in  relief.  The  supports 
were  four  cabriole  or  square  legs,  the  former  with 
carved,  the  latter  with  fretwork  ornamentation.  In 
the  majority  of  examples  the  top  was  formed  of  a 
slab  of  marble  which  fitted  into  a  groove  in  the 
framing;  occasionally,  however,  mahogany  was  used 
instead  of  marble.  The  sideboard  of  that  date  thus 
provided  no  storing  place  for  wine  or  crockery, 
though  most  oak  buffets,  even  in  Jacobean  times, 
had  been  constructed  in  the  form  of  a  cupboard 
or  dresser  with  drawers. 

An  interesting  fact  in  connection  with  Chippen- 

1  Sold  at  Christie's,  June,  1904,  for  1,800  guineas. 


Fig.  XIII. 


CHIPPENDALE  SETTEE. 


Fig.  XIV. 

To  face  page  66. 


IRISH  CHIPPENDALE  SIDEBOARD. 


67 

dale  sideboards  is  a  record  in  the  old  books  of  John 
Broadwood,  the  famous  piano  maker.  The  entry 
states  that  in  March,  1790,  a  piano  was  sold  to 
"Mr.  Chippendale;  to  be  put  in  a  sideboard."  It 
was  by  no  means  uncommon,  both  in  France  and 
England,  to  combine  a  spinet  or  a  piano  with  some 
useful  piece  of  furniture,  a  writing-bureau  being 
perhaps  most  frequently  chosen  for  this  purpose. 

The  sideboard,  illustration  XIV,  owned  by  Mr. 
Burghard,  is  of  especial  interest,  as  it  is  a  fine 
example  of  Irish-Chippendale.  The  peculiarity  of 
the  carving  is  its  extreme  flatness,  even  the  flower- 
basket  in  the  middle  being  in  quite  low  relief.  The 
festoons  of  foliage  on  either  side  of  this  central  sub- 
ject-piece present  a  very  graceful  effect.  It  will  be 
observed  that  the  leaf  ornamentation  on  the  cabriole 
legs  extends  very  far  down,  and  that  the  claw  foot 
is  surmounted  by  leaves.  The  side  of  the  table, 
hardly  visible  in  the  illustration,  is  enriched  with 
a  large  flat  escalop  shell  as  well  as  leaf  scrolls  and 
flowers  matching  those  in  front.  The  whole  piece, 
including  the  top,  is  carried  out  in  mahogany. 

Pier-tables  were  very  similar  to  the  sideboard 
tables,  but  rather  smaller,  as  they  were  designed  to 
correspond  with  the  width  of  the  pier-glass  beneath 
which  they  stood.  Bracket  console-tables  were 
often  very  elaborate  in  their  ornamentation,  and 
both  these  and  the  pier-tables  were  usually  gilded 
and  burnished. 


68       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 


LARGE  PIECES 

Bookcases  and  cupboards  were  architectural  and 
classical  in  outline,  and  generally  had  triangular  or 
broken  pediments.  The  ornamentation  was  often 
very  elaborate,  and  in  many  cases  was  made  to  form 
a  part  of  the  construction  itself.  As  in  the  case  of 
the  chairs,  either  Gothic,  Chinese,  or  French  types 
entered  into  the  scheme  of  decoration,  but  probably 
not  in  a  single  instance  was  an  absolute  unity  of  treat- 
ment preserved.  The  cupboard  doors  were  of  plain 
glass,  looking-glass,  or  wood.  The  panel  or  frieze 
borderings  on  all  such  pieces  as  well  as  on  chests 
of  drawers  and  writing-desks  were  generally  exe- 
cuted in  low  relief.  Interlacing  ribbons,  the  twisted 
ribbon  and  rose,  the  rose  and  strap,  interwoven 
leaves,  or  the  egg  and  tongue,  were  perhaps  the  most 
usual  of  these  border  patterns.  Frequently,  however, 
frets  were  employed  instead.  Corners  and  hanging- 
borders  were  often  enriched  by  carvings  in  bolder 
relief,  and,  in  a  few  instances,  hanging  festoons  in  the 
Grinling  Gibbons  style  were  made  to  depend  from  a 
pediment  or  other  prominent  part.  Carving  of  this 
type  is  seen  in  the  splendid  mahogany  china  cabinet, 
illustration  XV,  a  very  rare  piece  in  the  possession 
of  Mr.  Sidney  Letts.  The  upper  portion  is  com- 
paratively plain  except  fora  leaf  bordering  and  carved 
flowers  at  wide  intervals  on  the  mouldings  around 


Fig.  XV.  CHIPPENDALE  CHINA  CABINET. 

To  face  page  68. 


Fig.  XIV.  DETAIL  OF  CHIPPENDALE  CHINA  CABINET. 

To  face  page  68. 


Fig.  XVII. 

To  face  page  68. 


HANGING  CUPBOARD. 


Fig.  xvm.  CHIPPENDALE-GOTHIC  BOOKCASE. 

To  face  page  68. 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  69 

the  glass  panels.  But  the  carved  work  on  the  stand 
and  legs  is  of  quite  unusual  beauty.  The  middle 
leg  and  part  of  the  festoon  on  either  side,  is  shown 
in  detail  in  illustration  XVI.  In  the  centre  is  a 
crest — that  of  the  nobleman  for  whom  the  cabinet 
was  originally  made.  Although  the  flowers  and  fruit 
are  deeply  undercut,  and  are  treated  somewhat  after 
the  manner  of  Gibbons,  there  are  also  distinct  traces 
of  rococo  influence,  which  point  to  a  later  date  for 
this  piece  than  the  time  of  that  celebrated  carver. 
Those  who  concur  with  Mr.  James  Orrock's  views, 
as  stated  in  Chapter  XIII,  will  be  inclined  to  as- 
cribe this  style  of  work  to  carvers  who  directly 
followed  in  the  footsteps  of  Gibbons  rather  than  of 
Chippendale.  The  hanging  cupboard,  illustration 
XVII,  is  of  much  earlier  date  than  the  last  example, 
and  belongs  to  the  late  Queen  Anne  or  the  earliest 
Chippendale  era.  The  shallow  carved  borders  of  the 
egg  and  tongue,  of  the  ribbon  and  rose,  and  of  the 
leaf  design,  are  most  delicately  worked;  there  are 
many  who  consider  such  fine  borderings  to  be  of 
more  artistic  beauty  than  all  the  twists  and  twirls 
displayed  in  most  examples  of  Chippendale.  The 
heads  on  either  side  of  the  pediment,  and  the  one 
used  as  a  supporting  bracket  below  the  cupboard, 
are  carried  out  in  brass. 

The  Gothic  bookcase,  illustration  XVIII,  is  of 
solid  dark  mahogany.  The  egg  and  strap  mouldings 
round  the  glass  doors,  which  intersect  so  as  to  form 


70       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Gothic  arches,  produce  a  most  pleasing  effect.  This 
bookcase,  one  of  a  pair,  was  probably  designed  for 
a  Gothic  room  in  which  all  the  furniture  was  of  a 
similar  type.  But  even  apart  from  its  original  sur- 
soundings  it  loses  but  little  of  its  charm ;  there  is 
something  poetically  imaginative  about  this  style  of 
decoration,  even  though  the  Gothic  is  of  a  debased 
type.  The  fretted  cornice  is  of  a  different  character 
from  the  remainder  of  the  work. 

The  mahogany  bookcase,  illustration  XIX,  is  in 
the  possession  of  Mr.  James  Ivory.  It  is  thoroughly 
architectural  in  character,  and  the  broken  scroll  pedi- 
ment, with  its  open-work  carving,  is  a  good  example 
_  of  Chippendale's  use  of  this  ornament. 

The  coin-cabinet,  illustration  XX,  lately  in  the 
possession  of  Mr.  Sidney  Letts,  has  an  interesting 
history.  It  was  made  for  Horace  Walpole's  house 
at  Strawberry  Hill,  Twickenham  (built  between 
1753-1776),  and  was  sold  by  auction  with  the  other 
contents  of  that  historic  mansion  in  1842.  The 
cabinet  appears  thus  in  the  sale  catalogue:  "Tenth 
day — lot  104.  A  very  handsome  carved  mahogany 
cabinet  for  coins,  pair  of  folding  doors  enclosing  60 
trays  and  6  deep  drawers  on  finely  carved  antique 
frame,  locks  and  key."  A  further  record  states  that 
it  was  bought  by  Charles  S.  Bale  for  £g  gs. 

The  antique  frame  above  referred  to  is  a  mag- 
nificent example  of  the  Chippendale  school  of  carv- 
ing. The  design  represents  a  lion's  head  in  bold 


Fig,  xix.  CHIPPENDALE  BOOKCASE 

To  face  page  70. 


Fig.  XX. 

To  face  page  70. 


COIN  CABINET. 


Cu 

D 
O 

oi 
O 

w 
J 

< 

Q 
Z 

w 
a, 
— 

I 
U 


Z 

x 

U 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  71 

relief  in  the  middle,  grouped  with  a  conventionalized 
hollyhock  and  other  flowers.  On  either  side  the 
outlines  are  equally  fine — here  the  central  carving 
is  a  large  rose  in  full  bloom.  The  feet  are  lion's 
claws. 

Small  cabinets,  hanging  shelves,  and  ornamental 
tables  intended  for  the  display  of  china  relied  mostly 
upon  Chinese  ornamentation  for  their  effect.  The 
cabinets,  small  and  light  in  construction,  had  pagoda- 
tops  or  fretwork  friezes,  and  glass  or  wooden  doors 
to  inclose  the  shelves.  Illustration  XXI  represents 
a  fine  cabinet  of  this  type  in  mahogany.  The  stand 
has  a  fretted  pattern  of  scrolls  and  curves,  and  on  the 
legs  both  tassels  and  Gothic  arches  are  cunningly 
introduced.  The  cabinet  itself  has  a  single  glass 
door  with  a  plain  fretted  border,  and  is  surmounted 
by  a  deeply-fluted  pagoda-shaped  top.  Secretary 
writing-desks,  with  three  or  four  drawers,  were 
frequently  made  with  similar  china-cabinets  above. 
The  small  tables  had  a  carved  or  fretted  border 
round  the  frame,  and  were  often  finished  with  a  rim 
of  pierced  brass  or  woodwork.  They  were  supported 
either  by  a  pillar  and  claws,  or  by  four  firm  but 
slight  legs  finely  carved.  Larger  tables  had  flaps 
which  could  be  let  down,  were  fitted  with  drawers 
— ornamented  with  brass  handles — and  had  square 
or  cabriole  legs.  The  pillar  and  claw  was  not  used 
for  large  tables  until  almost  the  close  of  the  century. 
Group  XXI  includes  a  folding  table:  the  frame  and 


72       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

legs  are  decorated  with  fretwork;  on  the  legs  this 
decoration  is  broken  here  and  there  by  the  intro- 
duction of  carved  foliage. 

Card-tables  on  an  extending  frame  with  a  fold- 
ing top,  were  lined  with  green  cloth  or  fancy  em- 
broidery. The  ornamentation  of  the  frame  and  of 
the  legs  (square  or  cabriole)  was  either  carving  or 
fretwork. 

The  card  table,  illustration  XXII,  belonged  to 
the  late  Mr.  S.  T.  Smith.  The  carving  around  the 
frame,  as  well  as  on  the  knee  and  foot,  is  of  the 
most  delicate  type.  The  design  represents  curling 
leaves  and  rococo  curves,  while  the  lower  border  is 
composed  of  crinkled  shellwork.  The  graceful  lines 
of  the  legs  are  worthy  of  special  notice. 

Writing-tables  were  made  in  many  different 
shapes,  generally  with  a  knee-hole  or  wide  space 
which  separated  a  row  of  drawers  reaching  to  the 
ground  on  either  side.  Sometimes  cupboards  were 
used  instead  of  drawers,  and  many  very  wide  tables 
were  fitted  both  at  the  front  and  back. 

DINING-TABLES 

The  dining-tables,  from  the  beginning  of  the 
eighteenth  century  and  throughout  the  Chippendale 
period,  consisted  of  two  centre-pieces  with  wide 
flaps  on  either  side  and  two  semicircular  end-pieces, 
all  four  divisions  being  joined  together  or  separated 


Fig.  xxn.  CHIPPENDALE  CARD  TABLE  AND  FRAME. 

To  face  page  72. 


Cd 
J 
— 
< 

H 
O 

z 

z 
5 

Cd 


Q 
Z 

Cd 
o. 
cu 

I 
U 


S  O 
X  E- 
X 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  73 

at  will  by  means  of  small  brass  adjustments.  Each 
of  the  two  larger  portions  stood  on  four  cabriole 
legs,  and  the  semicircular  pieces  on  two  legs  only; 
the  latter,  when  not  in  use,  were  pushed  up  against 
the  wall  and  served  as  side-tables. 

But  what,  it  may  be  asked,  has  become  of  these 
old  dining-tables  beneath  which  our  ancestors  were 
wont  to  repose  in  drunken  slumber?  They  are,  in 
fact,  very  rarely  met  with  now  in  their  entirety,  for 
the  various  parts  have  often  in  the  course  of  time 
been  separated  from  one  another ;  they  are  thus  re- 
garded as  single  tables,  and  few  collectors  realize 
the  original  use  for  which  they  were  intended. 

The  fine  example  in  illustration  XXIII  is  in  the 
possession  of  Mr.  Burghard.  It  is  another  variety  of 
a  Chippendale  mahogany  dining-table,  the  exten- 
sion being  obtained  by  means  of  additional  leaves 
in  the  centre.  These  leaves  are  intended  to  be  fixed 
to  the  octagonal  ends  by  small  rods  of  brass  which 
fit  into  grooves  made  for  the  purpose,  and  are  further 
supported  by  an  adjustment  of  the  movable  legs. 
These  legs  are  beautiful  specimens  of  Chippendale's 
Chinese  fretwork.  The  whole  frieze  of  the  table  is 
enriched  in  a  similar  manner. 

Firescreens,  single  or  double,  were  mostly  Louis- 
Quinze  in  style — low  frames  inclosing  fancy  em- 
broidery on  small  curved  supports.  There  were  also 
screens  on  a  pillar  and  claws  elaborately  carved 
(see  illustration  XI),  besides  a  few  examples  which 


74       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

were  composed  of  solid  masses  of  carved  mahogany 
with  small  glass  panels  in  the  upper  portion.  These 
latter  were  doubtless  designed  for  special  rooms  and 
ornamented  in  harmony  with  the  general  character 
of  the  chairs.  In  houses  where  the  original  Chip- 
pendale furniture  still  remains  intact  this  fact  is 
very  noticeable. 

Not  only  the  furniture  of  the  dining-room  and 
drawing-room,  but  that  of  the  bedroom  also  was 
more  elaborate  than  in  former  days.  The  old  shapes 
were  varied  and  improved.  Toilet-tables  for  ladies 
and  shaving-tables  for  men  were  well  fitted  with 
cupboards  and  drawers  and  provided  with  swinging 
glasses.  The  bedposts  which  supported  the  large 
canopy  bedsteads  were  delicately  "  turned  "  —almost 
the  only  instance  of  turning  in  furniture  of  this  era. 
"Tall-boys"  became  more  ornamental  and  were 
often  decorated  with  a  swan-necked  pediment,  open- 
work frets  and  carving.  Commodes  or  cupboards 
were  sometimes  supported  by  a  stand  and  square 
legs  in  the  Chinese  style;  in  other  instances  the 
lower  portion  consisted  of  a  deep  drawer  with  a 
bombd  curve.  Many  plain  models  of  bedroom  fur- 
niture were  illustrated  in  the  "  Director,"  and  pieces 
are  often  to  be  found  without  any  ornamentation 
whatever. 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  75 


CLOCK-CASES 

Clock-cases  displayed  hardly  any  carving  at  all, 
and  the  fantastic  designs  which  were  published  by 
some  of  the  cabinet-makers  seem  never  to  have  been 
executed.  F.  J.  Britten  in  his  "  Old  Clocks  and 
Watches  "  (1897)  remarks  upon  the  slight  resem- 
blance which  the  clocks  illustrated  in  the  "  Direc- 
tor "  bear  to  those  now  attributed  to  Chippendale. 
There  can  be  no  doubt  that  the  question  of  the 
actual  origin  of  so-called  Chippendale  clock-cases 
is  wrapped  in  the  same  obscurity  as  that  of  other 
pieces  of  furniture.  The  designs  were  based  upon 
the  Queen  Anne  shapes,  and  displayed  the  in- 
fluence of  the  prevalent  rococo  curves  and  orna- 
ments. Chippendale  may  very  probably  have  been 
one  of  the  most  popular  case-makers,  but  there 
seems  little  reason  to  suppose  that  he  alone  was 
responsible  for  the  special  types  which  bear  his 
name. 

"  Pillars  and  pilasters  rising  at  the  front  corners 
of  the  case  from  the  plinth  to  the  entablature  under 
the  hood  " ;  the  bases  and  caps  being  generally  of 
metal  and  the  shafts  fluted ;  a  high  hood  ending  in 
a  pediment  finished  with  two  outward  curves  or 
two  horn-shaped  terminals  curving  inwards.  Such 
are  the  main  features  noted  by  Britten  as  char- 
acteristic of  Chippendale  grandfather  clocks.  The 


76        ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

principal  wood  used  was  fine,  dark  mahogany,  re- 
lieved by  pierced  frets  in  the  hood  and  occasionally 
by  a  little  carving  round  the  door  or  at  the  corners. 
Within  the  space  inclosed  by  the  arch  in  the  upper 
portion  of  the  dial-frame  there  frequently  appeared 
a  painted  pidlure  which  by  a  mechanical  contriv- 
ance was  set  in  motion.  Ships  heaving  on  the  sea 
were  favourite  subjects  for  such  decorative  paintings. 
The  mahogany  clock,  illustration  XXIV,  has  the 
characteristic  fluted  shafts,  curved  pediment,  and 
fretted  ornamentation  of  the  Chippendale  style. 
The  capitals  of  the  lower  columns  are  of  brass.  The 
face  is  white  enamel,  and  the  hours  are  painted 
black.  The  maker's  name  "  Sam1  Toulmin,  Strand, 
London,"  appears  within  the  arch.  He  was  a  mem- 
ber of  the  Clockmakers'  Company  from  1765  to 

1783- 

The  bracket-clocks  often  had  pagoda-tops  and 

Chinese  fret  decoration.  In  other  examples  the  hood 
was  plain,  and  the  lower  portion  decorated  with 
foliage  and  similar  carved  ornamentation. 

MIRRORS 

Gilded  mirror- frames,  picture-frames,  and  giran- 
doles were  in  bolder  relief,  and  required  ornamenta- 
tion of  a  more  massive  character  than  most  pieces 
of  mahogany  furniture.  Louis-Quinze  repoussd 
scrolls  and  the  endless  convolutions  of  the  Louis- 


Fig,  XXIV. 

To  face  page  76. 


CHIPPENDALE  CLOCK. 


THE  CHIPPENDALE  SCHOOL  77 

Quinze  order  were  combined  with  pagoda-tops, 
Oriental  figures,  rockwork,  dripping  water,  flowers, 
bones  bound  together,  cherub-heads  or  long-beaked 
birds.  Large  plates  of  glass  were  only  within  reach 
of  the  wealthy  classes,  and  most  mirrors  were  made 
up  of  two  or  more  small  plates  of  Vauxhall  glass 
framed  together.  The  joints  were  hidden  by  minute 
pilasters  and  gilt  mouldings,  and  the  bevelled  edge, 
almost  universal  at  the  beginning  of  the  century, 
was  often  omitted  altogether.  Mahogany  and  wal- 
nut frames  in  this  style  are  rarely  met  with  un- 
gilded. 

Chippendale's  picture-frames  seem  often  to  have 
been  designed  with  a  view  to  the  picture  they  were 
to  inclose.  Frames,  enriched  at  the  sides  and  corners 
with  trophies  of  war  were,  according  to  the  "  Direc- 
tor," intended  for  a  war  picture;  if  emblems  of  the 
sea  appeared  in  the  carving,  the  painting  was  to  be 
some  nautical  subject. 

A  Chippendale  mirror-frame  is  seen  in  illustra- 
tion XXXIX,  and  a  picture-frame  in  illustration 
XII. 

The  door  in  illustration  XXV  was  taken  from 
an  old  house  in  Soho.  It  is  a  splendid  piece  of 
carving  in  the  manner  of  the  Chippendale  school. 
The  wood  is  dark  mahogany,  and  the  carving  is 
executed  in  relief.  The  ornamentation  on  the  side 
pilasters  is  of  stucco,  stained  and  painted  to  match 
the  rest  of  the  work.  The  broken  pediment  is  en- 


;8       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

riched  with  a  design  of  scroll  foliage  and  egg  and 
tongue  mouldings,  and  the  frieze  is  left  plain.  The 
pilasters,  curiously  enough,  although  alike  in  their 
general  proportions,  have  their  capitals  and  shafts 
each  decorated  in  a  different  way.  The  panels  of 
the  door  itself,  however,  match  one  another  exactly. 
The  design  represents  exotic  birds,  figures,  and  fish 
amidst  flowers,  scrolls,  leaves,  and  fruit.  The  birds 
are  no  doubt  adapted  from  Oriental  lacquer-work. 


Fig.  XXV. 

To  face  page  78. 


CHIPPENDALE  DOOR. 


CHAPTER  V 

THE  BROTHERS  ADAM 

BY  far  the  largest  portion  of  eighteenth-century 
architecture  still  to  be  seen  in  London  was 
the  work  of  Robert  Adam.  And  though  most  of 
his  houses  have,  during  the  last  fifty  years,  been 
remodelled,  or  partially  rebuilt,  even  the  little  that 
remains  of  the  original  design  is  sufficient  to  show 
the  transformation  he  wrought  in  the  appearance  of 
our  squares  and  terraces. 

The  Adams  were  a  Scotch  family  of  good  social 
position.  Robert,  the  most  famous  of  the  four 
brothers — John,  Robert,  James,  and  William — was 
born  at  Kircaldy,  co.  Fife,  3rd  July,  1728,  and  was 
educated  at  Edinburgh  University.  His  father, 
William  Adam,  of  Maryburgh,  co.  Fife,  also  a  dis- 
tinguished architect,  held  the  office  of  King's,  or 
Master  mason  in  Edinburgh.  His  mother  was 
Mary  Robertson,  of  Gladney,  co.  Fife.  William 
Adam,  the  elder,  probably  gave  his  sons  their  first 
architectural  training.  Robert's  juvenile  drawings, 
dating  from  his  sixteenth  year,  are  in  the  Soane 
Museum.  Among  his  early  friends  were  Adam 

79 


8o       ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Smith,  William  Robertson,  Adam  Ferguson,  David 
Hume,  and  the  dramatist  John  Home.  William 
Adam,  senior,  died  in  1748,  and  his  son  John  suc- 
ceeded him  in  his  office  and  also  carried  on  his 
business. 

Robert,  full  of  ambition  and  high  ideals,  deter- 
mined to  strike  out  a  new  path  for  himself  by  some 
years  of  study  in  Italy.  Old  Roman  architecture 
appealed  to  him  just  as  Greek  architecture  appealed 
to  James  Stuart  and  Nicholas  Revett,  who,  at  the 
time  of  Adam's  journey,  were  exploring  the  ruins 
of  Athens.  All  three  sought  to  find  among  classic 
models  the  inspiration  they  required  to  bring  about 
a  reform  in  English  architecture. 

From  Robert's  sketches  at  the  Soane  Museum 
we  are  able  to  follow  him  first  to  France — Nimes 
— December,  1754,  then  to  western  Italy,  1755,  and 
to  Rome  in  1756. 

During  three  years  of  travel  and  hard  work  he 
made  much  progress,  but  he  had  not  yet  attained 
the  main  object  of  his  search.  He  wished  to  examine 
a  private  dwelling-house  of  the  old  Romans,  in 
order  that  he  might  apply  their  ideas  to  domestic 
architecture  in  this  country.  At  that  time  the 
excavations  at  Pompeii  had  barely  begun,  and 
at  Rome,  and  indeed  throughout  Italy,  the  ruins 
were  all  those  of  public  buildings.  Adam  therefore 
decided  that  only  a  voyage  to  Venetian  Dalmatia 
would  serve  his  purpose.  Accordingly,  on  i  ith  July, 


THE   BROTHERS  ADAM  81 

1757,  he  set  sail  from  Venice  with  the  French  archi- 
tect, Charles  Louis  Cle'risseau1  and  two  draughts- 
men, and  in  eleven  days  arrived  in  sight  of  Spalatro. 
Magnificently  situated,  with  a  great  terrace  over- 
looking the  sea  —  Adam's  description  is  most 
graphic — were  the  remains  of  Diocletian's  palace. 
At  last  he  had  found  what  he  sought;  the  noble 
ruins  were  to  influence  all  his  future  work.  The 
vast  structure,  nine  and  a  half  acres  in  extent,  or 
about  the  size  of  the  Escurial  in  Spain,  was  a  villa 
residence  which  the  Emperor  Diocletian  had  built 
for  himself  on  his  abdication  in  A.D.  305.  Within 
the  inclosure  were  private  apartments,  regimental 
quarters,  and  several  temples.  On  the  death  of  the 
Emperor  the  Palace  is  said  to  have  been  used  as 
a  cloth  factory,  and  later  the  inhabitants  of  Spalatro 
took  a  portion  of  the  building  material  of  the 
original  edifice  in  order  to  erect  a  town  on  the  old 
foundations.  It  was  thus  no  easy  task  which  Robert 
Adam  had  set  himself — to  reconstruct  in  imagina- 
tion all  the  missing  parts. 

It  has  been  related  that  at  Spalatro  Adam's 
sketches  were  confiscated  and  he  himself  imprisoned 
as  a  spy.  It  is  strange  that  this  story  should  have 
arisen,  since  Robert's  own  account  of  his  journey 
appears  in  the  introduction  to  his  book.  This 
folio  work  was  brought  out  in  1764  as  "  Ruins  of 

1  Author  of  "Antiques  de  la  France,"  Paris,  1778,  folio,  of 
which  Part  I  ("  Monumens  de  Nismes  ")  only  appeared. 

G 


82       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

the  Palace  of  the  Emperor  Diocletian  at  Spalatro  in 
Dalmatia,"  with  engravings  by  Bartolozzi  and  others 
from  the  designs  of  Adam  and  Cle'risseau,  price 
£3  105. 

The  following  is  Robert's  story  of  his  difficulties. 
The  architects'  permit  from  the  Venetian  Senate  had 
not  arrived,  and  the  Governor  of  Dalmatia,  being 
unaccustomed  to  the  visits  of  strangers,  thought 
that  under  pretence  of  taking  views  and  making 
architectural  plans  they  were  actually  surveying  the 
fortifications.  Accordingly  he  sent  an  officer  to  com- 
mand Adam ' '  to  desist. "  Fortunately  the  commander- 
in-chief  of  the  Venetian  forces,  a  great  lover  of  the 
arts,  happened  to  be  in  the  town,  and  was  able  to 
interpose  on  Adam's  behalf.  The  artists  were  allowed 
to  continue  their  work  and  the  only  precaution  taken 
by  the  Governor  was  the  appointment  of  an  officer 
to  attend  them  each  day.  By  dint  of  great  industry 
the  sketches  were  all  completed  in  five  weeks. 

The  next  biographical  note  to  be  found  among 
the  volumes  at  the  Soane  Museum  is  a  drawing 
marked  "  Done  since  my  return  to  England — 1758," 
and  signed  Robert  Adam.  He  settled  in  London, 
and  immediately  began  many  important  works. 
The  sketches  for  the  Admiralty  screen,  Kedleston, 
and  Sion,  or  Syon,  House  are  all  dated  between 
1759  and  1762. 

In  the  "  Library  of  the  Fine  Arts,"  a  short-lived 
monthly,  there  appeared  in  October  and  November, 


THE  BROTHERS  ADAM  83 

1831,  a  "  Journal  of  a  tour  in  Italy  in  1760-1763," 
printed  from  the  original  MS.,  and  wrongly  ascribed 
to  Robert  Adam.  It  was,  in  fact,  written  by  James 
Adam.  This  is  amply  proved  by  the  evidence  of 
James's  signed  sketches  at  the  Soane  Museum.  One 
of  these  bears  the  date,  "Venice,  Aug.  24th,  1760, 
and  Rome,  1762."  The  diary  opened  on  ist  Odto- 
ber,  1760,  in  Venice,  where  the  writer  was  staying 
with  Clerisseau  and  the  painter  Zucchi.  It  is 
evident  that  he  had  already  been  there  some  time, 
as  the  first  pages  of  his  chronicle  contain  descrip- 
tions of  visits  to  neighbouring  cities  of  northern 
Italy.  He  proceeded  to  Rome  in  1761,  then  to 
Naples,  and  then  back  again  to  Rome  in  Novem- 
ber of  the  same  year.  The  remainder  of  the  journal 
was  not  printed,  but  we  learn  from  the  editorial 
summary  of  it  that  Adam  had  been  unable  to  visit 
the  Levant,  as  the  vessel  sent  out  for  the  purpose  by 
his  brother  William  had  been  taken  by  Spaniards, 
and  detained  in  the  port  of  Algiers.  He  commenced 
his  route  homewards  in  May,  1763,  returning  by 
Florence,  Bologna,  and  Parma. 

The  diary  is  written  in  homely  language,  and 
was  clearly  not  intended  for  publication,  but  it 
leaves  a  remarkable  impression  of  the  writer's  un- 
tiring industry  and  perseverance.  Every  day  was 
devoted  to  architectural  study.  To  cite  one  instance : 

[Friday  the  2Oth  November,  1761.]  "  We  went 
by  sea  to  Pesto.  There  are  here  the  remains  of  two 


84       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Basilica,  and  one  temple  of  the  Doric  order.  Of 
these  ...  we  made  two  views  that  can  enter  into 
the  work." 

The  personal  notes  are  few :  [Monday  3Oth  No- 
vember, 1761].  "  The  same  evening  received  Betty's 
letter,  informing  me  of  Bet's  interview  with  the 
King."  This  refers  to  his  sister  Elizabeth. 

[Tuesday,  iyth  November,  1761].  "  Clerisseau 
took  this  opportunity  to  talk  to  me  of  his  situation, 
and  seemed  to  dread  the  uncertainty  of  his  share  of 
the  designs."  It  was  arranged  that  the  architect  was 
to  receive  a  fixed  annual  salary  in  return  for  his 
designs  and  general  assistance. 

A  further  proof  of  the  authorship  of  the  "  Tour 
in  Italy"  is  that  the  designs  for  the  "  New  Parlia- 
ment House,"  which  appear  in  James's  name  in  the 
Soane  Museum,  are  spoken  of  in  the  "  Journal "  as 
being  the  work  of  the  writer. 

Robert  Adam  appears  to  have  leapt  quite  sud- 
denly into  fame,  and  in  1762  was  appointed  architect 
to  the  King.  His  nomination  to  this  office  occa- 
sioned some  bitter  comment  among  those  who  hated 
his  great  patron,  Lord  Bute,  and  resented  Scotch 
favouritism  in  general.  In  libellous  pamphlets  Adam 
was  accused  of  "  bringing  his  hungry  Scotch  kins- 
men in  his  train  ";  nevertheless,  he  continued  to  rise 
in  the  public  estimation,  and  became  the  most  popu- 
lar and  fashionable  architect  of  his  day. 

He   had   learnt   in    Italy  a  recipe  for  making 


THE  BROTHERS  ADAM  85 

"composition  ornaments,"  and  the  secret  of  this 
preparation  was  a  great  factor  in  the  prosperity  of 
his  career.  This  "compo,"  used  to  the  present  day 
for  decorating  doors,  ceilings,  mantles,  etc.,  was  cast 
according  to  various  patterns  in  wood-moulds,  and 
then  applied  direct  to  the  wooden  framework  it  was 
intended  to  cover.  Being  far  cheaper  than  wood- 
carving,  or  the  plaster  carving  which  had  until  then 
been  executed  on  the  wall  or  ceiling  itself,  the  new 
process  was  invariably  used  by  Adam  for  his  grace- 
ful effects  of  festoon  and  tracery.  The  same  substance 
was  of  sufficient  strength  and  hardness  to  form 
hanging  -  ornaments  unsupported  save  by  wire. 
Neither  carton-pierre  nor  any  similar  material  was 
known  at  that  time  in  England,  and  Adam  deter- 
mined to  keep  the  monopoly  of  his  innovation.  The 
Italian  artisans  whom  he  had  brought  over  for  the 
purpose,  were  made  to  work  in  locked  rooms,  and 
during  Adam's  lifetime,  the  secret  of  the  "  compo" 
was  never  divulged.  A  clerk  of  the  works  named 
Thomas  Jackson,  who  had  penetrated  the  mystery, 
set  up  in  business  for  himself  when  Robert  died,  and 
managed  to  obtain  nearly  all  the  latter's  original 
wood-moulds.  These  are  still  in  daily  use  by  Jack- 
son's descendants,  Messrs.  Jackson,  of  Rathbone 
Place. 

Robert  was  a  man  of  considerable  culture ;  his 
work  on  Diocletian's  palace  showed  a  wide  know- 
ledge of  the  Latin  writers ;  he  was  a  Fellow  of  the 


86       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Royal  Society,  of  the  Society  of  Antiquaries,  and 
of  the  Royal  Society  of  Edinburgh.  In  1768  he  en- 
tered Parliament  as  member  for  Kinross-shire,  and 
was  in  consequence  obliged  to  resign  his  office  at 
Court,  in  which  he  was  succeeded  by  his  brother 
and  partner,  James. 

From  this  time  onwards  the  firm,  besides  execut- 
ing numerous  private  orders  for  noblemen's  houses 
throughout  the  country,  began  to  undertake  specu- 
lative building  on  a  large  scale.  Their  greatest  enter- 
prise of  this  kind  was  the  design  of  the  Adelphi  (the 
brothers).  In  this  work  all  the  brothers  participated. 

On  the  low-lying  ground  known  as  Durham 
Yard,  between  the  Strand  and  the  river,  had  once 
stood  a  palace  which  Queen  Elizabeth  presented  to 
Sir  Walter  Raleigh.  This  had  given  place  to  a  ter- 
race of  houses,  in  one  of  which  David  Garrick  lived 
before  he  became  an  adlor,  with  "  three  quarts  of 
vinegar  in  the  cellar,  calling  himself  a  wine- 
merchant."  l  These  houses  were  now  pulled  down, 
and  an  Adi  of  Parliament  having  been  obtained  for 
the  purpose  in  1771,  a  series  of  underground  arches, 
two  stories  in  height,  were  constructed  to  raise  the 
land  above  the  level  of  the  Thames.  The  plan  of  the 
magnificent  Adelphi  Terrace  over  the  river-wharf  was 
suggested  to  Robert  Adam  by  the  terrace  at  Dal- 
matia.  Here  Garrick,  already  famous,  and  Topham 
Beauclerk,  the  witty  friend  of  Dr.  Johnson,  very  soon 

1  Samuel  Foote. 


THE  BROTHERS  ADAM  87 

took  houses.  Robert  and  James  also  lived  for  many 
years  in  Robert  Street,  Adelphi.1 

The  bill  was  not  allowed  to  pass  through  parlia- 
ment without  encountering  much  opposition  from 
the  Corporation  of  London.  "They  have  stolen 
the  very  river  from  us,"  was  the  burden  of  a 
set  of  verses  directed  against  the  brothers.  It  was 
not,  however,  the  opposition  of  their  enemies,  but 
the  expense  involved  in  the  vast  sub-struclures, 
which  made  the  work  a  commercial  failure.  The 
Adams  were  almost  ruined,  and  in  1773  another 
bill  was  passed,  allowing  the  whole  property  to  be 
disposed  of  by  lottery.  The  tickets  were  £50  each, 
and  the  prize-winners  were  to  have  the  houses 
equally  divided  between  them.  David  Garrick,  in  a 
letter  to  John  Wilkes,  states  that  his  "friends  and 
neighbours  the  Adams  "  have  asked  him  "  to  desire 
Wilkes's  interest  with  the  Lord  Mayor  that  they 
may  be  permitted  to  draw  their  lottery  in  the  Guild- 
hall."2 

Another  letter  from  Garrick  (printed  in  Hone's 
11  Every-Day  Book")3  written  a  few  years  earlier, 

1  There  is  a  story  told  of  a  City  dinner  at  which  two  royal 
princes  were  present.    As  the  princes  were  brothers,  one  of  the 
company,  wishing  to  show  off  his  scholarship,  toasted  them  as  "  the 
Adelphi."   "  Now  that  we  are  on  the  subject  of  streets,"  retorted  a 
jocular  alderman,  "  I  beg  leave  to  propose  '  Finsbury  Square.' " 

2  Report  of  Royal  Commission  on  Hist.  MSS.,  Appendix  IV, 
p.  402. 

3  Edit.  1838,  vol.  i,  p.  327. 


88       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

shows  the  terms  of  friendship  which  existed  be- 
tween him  and  the  brothers,  and  as  it  refers  to  the 
building  undertakings  in  the  Strand,  may  be  quoted 
here.  It  contained  a  request  that  the  Adams  should 
assign  the  corner  house  of  Adam  Street — then  in 
course  of  erection — to  Thomas  Becket,  the  well- 
known  bookseller  of  the  Strand,  whose  name  appears 
as  the  publisher  on  the  title-page  of  the  Adams' 
"Works  in  Architecture,"  though  the  authors  bore 
the  sole  cost  of  production. 


"  Hampton.    Monday,  8. 

"  MY  DEAR  ADELPHI, 

"  I  forgot  to  speak  to  you  last  Saturday 
about  our  friend  Becket.  We  shall  all  break  our 
hearts  if  he  is  not  bookseller  to  ye  Adelphi,  &  has 
not  ye  corner  house  that  is  to  be  built.  Pray,  my 
dear  &  very  good  friends,  think  a  little  of  this 
matter,  &  if  you  can  make  us  happy,  by  suiting  all 
our  conveniences,  we  shall  make  his  shop,  as  old 
Jacob  Tonson's  was  formerly,  ye  renddvouz  for  ye 
first  people  in  England.  I  have  a  little  selfishness 
in  this  request — I  never  go  to  coffee-houses,  seldom 
to  taverns,  &  should  constantly  (if  this  scheme 
takes  place)  be  at  Becket's  at  one  at  noon,  &  6  at 
night ;  as  ye  monkey  us'd  to  be  punctual  in  Piccadilly. 
.  .  .  Make  yr  peace  wth  heav'n  by  an  act  of  right- 
eousness, &  bestow  that  corner  blessing  (I  have 


THE  BROTHERS  ADAM  89 

mention'd)  upon   Becket  &  his  family — this  is  ye 

pray'r  &  petition 

"of  yr 

"  affectionate 

"& 

"devoted 
"  D:  GARRICK." 

Needless  to  say,  Becket  had  the  "corner  bless- 
ing" conferred  upon  him. 

We  are  constantly  brought  face  to  face  with  the 
fact  of  the  rapid  growth  of  the  outlying  districts  of 
London,  but  it  seems  hard  to  realize  that  one  hun- 
dred and  thirty  years  ago  Bloomsbury  was  a  small 
suburb,  and  Marylebone  a  country  village.  A  great 
part  of  the  Adams'  work  lay  in  the  building  up  of 
these  districts. 

The  mere  enumeration  of  the  streets  in  which 
most  of  the  houses  were  built  by  Robert  Adam 
shows  the  great  extent  of  his  labours  in  the  metro- 
polis. We  cite  from  the  list  given  by  Mr.  Fitz- 
gerald: the  Adelphi  (R.  and  J.  Adam),  Portland 
Place  (James  Adam's  work,  with  the  exception  of 
No.  25,  which  Robert  built  and  decorated  for  his 
own  use),  Mansfield  Street,  a  portion  of  Harley 
Street,  Stratford  Place  in  Oxford  Street,  Finsbury 
Square,  portions  of  Dover  Street  and  Grafton 
Street,  Spring  Gardens,  one  side  of  Portman  Square, 
Portman  Street,  Hamilton  Place,  George  Street 


90       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

(Westminster),  Bedford  Square,  Gower  Street,  Cum- 
berland Place,  Seymour  Street,  Bryanston  Square, 
mansions  in  Whitehall,  Gwydyr  House,  houses  in 
Berkeley  Square  and  Hart  Street,  Upper  and  Lower 
Phillimore  Place  (Kensington),  Fitzroy  Square,  York 
Place,  houses  in  Weymouth  Street,  also  in  Devon- 
shire Street  and  Manchester  Square,  the  late  Duke 
of  Cambridge's  house  in  Park  Lane,  houses  in 
Bruton  Street,  Soho  Square,  and  Russell  Square, 
terraces  in  the  Old  Kent  Road,  in  Walworth  Road, 
and  in  Kennington. 

Besides  Lansdowne  House,  Harewood  House 
(London),  Montague  House,  and  Osterley  House, 
there  were  mansions  and  public  buildings  (such  as 
the  North  British  Coffee  House)  throughout  Lon- 
don and  the  neighbourhood.  Robert's  work  is  to 
be  seen  in  Edinburgh,  Dublin,  Glasgow,  Newcastle, 
Bath,  and  many  other  parts  of  the  United  King- 
dom. Kedleston,  which  he  built  for  Lord  Scarsdale, 
was  probably  the  largest  of  his  noblemen's  mansions. 
Most  of  the  houses  erected  by  Robert  Adam  were 
decorated  and  furnished  from  his  own  designs.  The 
chimney-pieces,  cornices,  doors,  chairs,  tables, 
cabinets,  mirrors,  the  wall-papers,  chair  coverings, 
door-knockers — even  once,  for  the  King,  a  counter- 
pane— no  part  of  the  house  and  its  contents  was  too 
insignificant  to  be  included  in  his  sketches.  Every- 
thing was  carried  out  in  the  same  style,  a  style 
which  combined  comfort  with  elegance. 


THE   BROTHERS  ADAM  91 

There  is  no  doubt  that  Robert  was  greatly 
helped  in  his  decorative  work  by  Michele  Angelo 
Pergolesi,1  who  came  over  with  him  from  Italy. 
Angelica  Kauffmann,  Cipriani,  Zucchi,  and  Colum- 
bani  also  contributed  painted  plaques  and  orna- 
mental designs  of  many  kinds.  A  great  deal  of 
"  Adam  "  decorative  work  is  wrongly  attributed  to 
Angelica  Kauffmann.  According  to  Miss  Gerard,2 
Angelica  was  employed  by  Adam  on  her  return  from 
Ireland  in  1771  until  1781,  when  she  returned  to 
Italy.  James  Adam  does  not  appear  to  have  been  a 
furniture  designer,  but  merely  an  architect  pure  and 
simple. 

In  1773  appeared  the  first  part  of  the  Adams' 
magnificent  volumes,  "  The  Works  in  Architec- 
ture of  Robert  and  James  Adam  Esquires."  The 
book  came  out  in  folio  numbers  between  1773 
and  1778,  and  a  fifth,  or  posthumous,  part  was 
published  in  1822.  The  descriptive  portions  were 
printed  in  parallel  columns  in  French  and  English. 
The  plates,  125  in  number,  consisted  of  views — 
of  the  exterior  and  interior  of  great  mansions — 
Sion  House,  Luton  House,  Caenwood,  or  Kenwood, 
Shelburne  (now  Lansdowne)  House,  and  many 
public  buildings.  Sixty-four  of  the  plates  contained 

1  Author   of  "  Designs   for   Various    Ornaments   on   Seventy 
Plates,"  1777-1801,  folio. 

2  "  Angelica  Kauffmann :  a  Biography,"  by  Frances  A.  Gerard 
(1892). 


92       ENGLISH  FURNITURE   DESIGNERS 

designs  for  furniture,  cabinets,  mirrors,  and  other 
carved  work. 

In  1773  the  Adams  purchased  the  patent  of  a 
special  cement  for  covering  the  exterior  of  a  build- 
ing. This  preparation,  which  had  all  the  appearance 
of  stone,  and  was  yet  flexible,  was  the  invention  of 
John  Liardet,  a  Swiss  clergyman  resident  in  London. 
Rival  builders  often  infringed  the  rights,  and  the 
account  of  one  of  the  prosecutions  which  ensued  was 
printed  as  a  pamphlet.1  The  defendant's  case  is  most 
amusing :  '  'Unless  the  walls  of  houses  are  to  be  coated 
with  porridge,  almost  any  mixture  might  be  con- 
strued into  counterfeiting,  imitating,  or  resembling 
that  of  Liardet": — "Messrs.  Adams'  patent,  like 
Aaron's  rod,  has  swallowed  up  all  the  rest " ; — such 
were  the  main  arguments  in  the  defence.  There  are 
many  examples  of  fa$ades  and  pillars  covered  with 
Adams'  patent  stucco  which  prove  it  to  have  been 
the  most  lasting  material  of  the  kind  before  the  use 
of  Portland  cement. 

Considering  the  amount  of  work  which  Robert 
Adam  undertook,  it  is  indeed  wonderful  that  he 
should  have  found  time  to  pradlise  landscape-paint- 
ing. Yet  even  in  this  branch  of  art,  he  was  re- 
garded as  a  water-colour  painter  of  considerable 
merit. 

1  "  Observations  on  Two  Trials  at  Law  respecting  Messieurs 
Adams'  new-invented  Patent-Stucco.  By  a  Practical  Plaisterer," 
8vo  (1778). 


THE   BROTHERS  ADAM  93 

Four  of  his  water-colour  sketches  with  pen 
outlines  are  in  the  Print  Room,  British  Museum. 

(1)  "  A  Rocky  Landscape  and  Castle." 

(2)  "  Landscape    with     Figures,"    depicting    a 
raised  road  winding  away  under  trees. 

(3)  "A  Castle  in  a  Mountainous  Landscape." 

(4)  "  Landscape  with  Figures,"  representing  a 
sunset  among  trees  on  the  shores  of  a  lake.    A  cot- 
tage stands  on  the  further  bank. 

All  the  paintings  have  a  certain  stiffness  and 
want  of  freedom.  They  have  rather  the  appearance 
of  coloured  etchings,  but  this  effect  is  probably  due 
to  the  pen  outlines  and  the  subdued  tones  of  the 
colouring. 

Robert  died  on  3rd  March,  1792,  at  his  house, 
No.  13,  Albemarle  Street,  hardly  a  fortnight  after 
the  death  of  Sir  Joshua  Reynolds.  He  was  buried 
on  the  ninth  in  the  south  transept  of  Westminster 
Abbey.  The  " Gentleman's  Magazine,"  in  an  obituary 
notice,  thus  compared  him  with  Reynolds  : — "  It  is 
difficult  to  know  which  excelled  most  in  his  par- 
ticular profession.  Sir  Joshua  introduced  a  new  and 
superior  style  of  portrait-painting.  It  is  equally  true 
that  Mr.  Adam  produced  a  total  change  in  the  archi- 
tecture of  this  country,  and  his  fertile  genius  was 
not  confined  to  the  decoration  of  buildings,  but  has 
been  diffused  into  almost  every  branch  of  manufac- 
ture." On  nth  March,  a  short  sketch  of  Adam  ap- 
peared in  the  "  Morning  Advertiser,"  one  of  the 


94       ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

most  important  daily  papers.  It  was  there  stated 
that  the  year  preceding  his  death  he  was  engaged 
upon  eight  public  and  twenty-five  private  buildings. 
The  list  of  his  pall-bearers  was  given  as  follows: 
the  Duke  of  Buccleuch,  the  Earl  of  Coventry, 
the  Earl  of  Lauderdale,  Viscount  Stormont,  Lord 
Frederick  Campbell,  and  Mr.  Pulteney. 

Robert  never  married.  In  his  will,  signed  the  day 
before  his  death,  he  left  all  he  possessed  to  his  two 
unmarried  sisters,  Elizabeth  and  Margaret  Adam, 
and  appointed  his  brothers,  James  and  William,  as 
his  executors. 

He  was  a  very  popular  man,  had  a  high  moral 
character,  a  kindly  disposition,  and  sweet  manners. 
He  won  the  affection  of  all  his  friends.  Among  his 
many  admirers  the  Italian  architect,  painter  and  en- 
graver, Giovanni  Battista  Piranesi,  should  not  be 
forgotten. 

A  posthumous  volume  of  Robert's  drawings  ap- 
peared in  print:  "Designs  for  vases  and  foliage 
composed  from  the  antique"  (1825), — thirteen  plates 
engraved  by  Pastorini.  His  decorative  designs  are 
best  seen  in  the  fifty-five  volumes  of  original 
sketches  (by  the  brothers  Robert  and  James),  which 
are  preserved  in  the  Soane  Museum.  These  draw- 
ings were  put  up  for  auction  in  Edinburgh  after 
the  death  of  William  Adam,  the  last  of  the  four 
brothers,  in  1822.  They  were  bought  by  Sir  John 
Soane  for  about  ^800,  a  fourth  of  the  sum  at 


Pig.  XXVI. 


ROBERT  ADAM— PORTRAIT. 


To  face  page  95. 


ROBERT  ADAM— SIGNATURE. 


THE  BROTHERS  ADAM  95 

which  they  had  been  valued  during  the  authors' 
lifetime. 

James  Adam  died  in  Albemarle  Street  on  2Oth 
October,  1794.  He,  too,  remained  single.  By  will 
he  directed  his  property  to  be  equally  divided  among 
his  brother  William  and  his  two  sisters  Elizabeth 
and  Margaret.  He  published  two  octavo  volumes 
of  "  Practical  Essays  on  Agriculture  .  .  .  carefully 
collected  and  digested  from  the  most  eminent  au- 
thors, with  experimental  remarks"  (ist  edition,  1789, 
2nd  edition,  1794),  and  at  the  time  of  his  death  was 
engaged  upon  a  "  History  of  Architecture,"  which 
he  left  unfinished.  He  held  the  office  of  architect  to 
the  King,  until  Burke,  in  bringing  about  the  reform 
of  the  Board  of  Works,  abolished  the  post.  He  was 
likewise  master  mason  to  the  Board  of  Ordnance 
in  North  Britain.  The  descendants  of  John  and 
William  Adam  number  many  well-known  men,  in- 
cluding the  Right  Hon.  William  Adam  (1751-1839), 
Lord  Chief  Commissioner  of  the  Scottish  Jury 
Court;  Admiral  Sir  Charles  Adam  (1780-1853),  and 
William  Patrick  Adam  (1823-1881),  Liberal  "Whip" 
in  the  House  of  Commons,  and  afterwards  Governor 
of  Madras. 

The  signature,  illustration  XXVI,  is  from  a 
letter  addressed  by  Robert  Adam  to  Lord  Scars- 
dale  of  Kedleston,  and  is  reproduced  by  kind  per- 
mission of  the  present  Earl. 


CHAPTER  VI 

THE   ADAM   SCHOOL 

THE  short-lived  classical  revival  which  over- 
lapped the  close  of  the  Chippendale  era,  is 
distinctly  attributable  to  the  Adam  brothers.  A  re- 
action from  the  rococo  to  a  severer  style  of  decora- 
tion took  place  almost  simultaneously  in  France,  and 
French  classicism  had  a  considerable  influence  upon 
our  cabinet-makers  at  the  end  of  the  eighteenth  cen- 
tury. But  the  Adams,  basing  their  designs  upon 
their  studies  and  researches  in  Dalmatia  and  Italy, 
were  the  first  to  re-establish  the  taste  for  Roman 
and  Grecian  architecture  and  ornamentation  in  this 
country.  Robert  Adam  extended  the  province  of  his 
art  to  include  interior  decorations,  fittings  and  furni- 
ture, and  thus  brought  about  quite  a  revolution  in 
furniture  design.  "The  Works  in  Architecture  of 
Robert  and  James  Adam  Esquires,"  which  began  to 
appear  in  1773,  comprised  a  large  number  of  de- 
corative designs,  and  assisted  greatly  in  establishing 
the  Adam  style  by  enabling  cabinet-makers  and 
others  to  grasp  with  accuracy  the  details  of  the  new 
ideas. 

96 


THE  ADAM  SCHOOL  97 

If  there  was  a  certain  monotony  in  Adam 
methods  and  decorations,  this  was  due  to  the  re- 
currence of  the  same  kind  of  ornamentation  in  every 
part  of  the  room.  The  pattern  of  the  carpet  often 
repeated  exactly  the  design  of  the  ceiling,  and  the 
walls,  either  in  "  composition  "  or  paper,  were  made 
to  correspond.  The  furniture,  for  which  Robert  Adam 
provided  the  sketches,  harmonized  both  in  colour 
and  general  treatment  with  its  surroundings ;  every 
piece  was  specially  made  for  the  room,  and  for  the 
particular  part  of  the  room  for  which  it  was  intended. 
Adam's  work  was  always  richly  embellished,  yet  the 
ornaments  did  not  appear  to  be  introduced  merely 
for  the  sake  of  ornamentation,  but  in  order  to  give 
expression  to  some  specific  idea  in  an  artistic, 
logical,  and  intelligible  form.  The  details  were  never 
confused,  and  were  full  of  movement  and  animation. 

"  Grotesques  " l  from  the  walls  of  old  Roman 
baths,  or  from  Raphael's  ceilings  at  the  Vatican; 
Greek  and  Roman  altarpieces ;  the  Palace  at  Spa- 
latro — all  these  proved  fruitful  sources  of  inspiration 
to  the  talented  brothers,  but  the  mode  of  treatment 
they  adopted  was  quite  original.  Their  designs  were 
never  slavish  copies  of  the  antique,  and  might,  per- 
haps, be  best  described  as  Anglicized  adaptations. 

1  Grotesques  are  fantastic  ornaments  representing  winding  stalks 
and  conventionalized  foliage  interspersed  with  flowers,  fruit,  birds, 
and  other  ornaments  or  human  figures.  The  name  is  derived  from 
the  old  Roman  grottoes,  or  subterranean  chambers,  on  the  walls 
of  which  such  designs  were  painted. 

H 


98       ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

A  great  difference  between  the  work  of  the 
Chippendale  school  and  that  of  the  Adams  lay  in 
the  fad;  that  while  the  former  was  essentially  a 
"carved  style,"  the  latter  was  a  "painted  style 
rendered  in  relief."  This  contrast  has  been  clearly 
defined  by  Mr.  Hugh  Stannus:  "The  beauty  of 
carved  ornament  was  that  it  covered  over  the  sur- 
face rather  than  showed  the  interspaces;  in  the 
well-known  Trojan  scroll,  for  instance,  the  spaces 
between  ornament  were  much  less  than  the  orna- 
ment itself.  That  was  the  characteristic  of  carved 
ornament — much  ornament  and  little  ground.  But 
in  painted  ornament,  there  should  be  light,  delicate 
work,  with  little  bits  of  colour  laid  on  with  a  brush ; 
and  such  was  Adam's  decoration." l 

Thu^,the  bold, sinuous  lines  of  Chippendale 
gradually  gave  place  to  a  stiffer,  if  more  elegant  and 
correcl^,  class  of design.  Furniture  returned  once 
more  to  strictly  architectural  lines  under  the  influ- 
ence of  a  movement  more  classically  correct  than 
that  of  the  Queen  Anne  period.  Conventional  fes- 
toons composed  of  drooping  bell-flowers  or  husks, 
or  the  graceful  honeysuckle-spray  replaced  Chippen- 
dale's rock  and  shellwork  and  curled  endive  leaves. 
A  radiating  ornament  was  greatly  used  by  Adam 
both  in  exterior  and  interior  decorations.  It  figured 
in  arched  spaces,  over  doors,  spandrels,  and  ceilings, 
and  on  furniture  took  the  form  of  a  fan,  or  rising 
1  "Journal  of  Society  of  Arts,"  2nd  February,  1894. 


THE  ADAM  SCHOOL  99 

sun.  The  idea  was  no  doubt  a  survival  of  the 
earlier  escalop  shell — but  classically  treated.  Thin 
swags  of  drapery,  wiry  metal  stars,  medallions,  and 
the  fans  also,  were  said  by  Mr.  Hungerford  Pollen 
to  have  been  suggested  by  the  fine  metal-work  of 
Pompeii.  Other  ornaments  which  Adam  brought 
into  constant  requisition  were  rosettes,  wreaths,  and 
bulls'  or  rams'  heads  to  catch  up  the  festoons; 
acanthus  leaves,  cupids,  caryatides,  griffins,  sphinxes, 
lozenge-shaped  panels,  knots  of  ribbon,  and  Greek, 
Roman  or  Etruscan  vases. 

Plaques,  on  which  classical  subjects  were  de- 
picted by  well-known  decorative  artists  of  the  day, 
were  frequently  used  for  the  ornamentation  of 
Adam's  furniture.  Figure  subjects  were  also  inlaid 
and  so  delicately  executed  that  at  a  short  distance 
they  appear  to  be  paintings. _Satin-wood  was  intro- 
duced into iJEnglaadlroni  the  East  Indies  about  this 
period  and  added  a  new  note  of  colour  to  houses 
where  mahogany  or  gilded  furniture  had  so  long 
reigned  supreme.  At  first  the  new  wood  was  mainly 
used  for  inlaying  purposes. 

Adam  is  supposed  to  have  employed  Capitsoldi 
as  well  as  other  Italian  and  French  metal-workers 
for  the  making  of  gilt  bronze  mountings.  Occasion- 
ally the  work  was  fine  and  delicate,  but  as  a  general 
rule  metal  ornaments  on  English  furniture  were 
not  equal  either  in  colour,  design,  or  execution  to 
those  of  Gouthiere  and  Caffieri  in  France.  Even 


ioo     ENGLISH   FURNITURE   DESIGNERS 

Sheraton,  who  thought  so  highly  of  our  native 
cabinet-making,  acknowledged  this  fact  when  in 
his  "Dictionary"  he  expressed  the  wish  that  "we 
might  have  as  elegant  brasswork  for  cabinets  cast 
in  London  as  they  have  in  Paris.  It  is  in  this  article 
they  excel  us." 

CHAIRS 

The  chairs  were  carried  out  sometimes  in  maho- 
gany, but  more  often  in  painted  or  gilded  wood.  A 
favourite  design  was  an  oval  upholstered  back  and 
seat,  with  a  very  ornamental  framework — the  cover- 
ing being  specially  designed  to  accord  with  the 
room.  Adam  was  probably  the  first  to  make  use  of 
a  splat  in  the  form  of  a  lyre,  a  style  much  copied 
later  by  Sheraton.  Square  backs  with  small  panels 
in  the  top  rail,  classical  foliage  and  scrolls  carved 
in  low  relief,  sculptured  griffins  introduced  between 
the  splat  and  the  back  of  the  seat — all  are  char- 
acteristics of  Adam  chairs.  The  roll-back  arms  of 
both  chairs  and  sofas  were  often  supported  by 
classical  figures  ending  in  claw  feet.  The  old  cabriole 
leg  with  its  ball-and-claw,  club,  scroll,  or  hoof  foot 
was  now  entirely  superseded.  The  legs  were  round 
or  square  and  tapering  (turned  or  fluted).  The  flut- 
ings  were  in  many  cases  filled  in  with  husk  orna- 
ments, and  as  this  was  a  notable  feature  in  Louis- 
Seize  furniture,  it  is  probable  that  Adam  copied 
the  idea  from  the  French.  The  "dipped  "  or  scooped- 


FiK.  xxvn.  ADAM  CHAIR. 

To  face  page  101. 


THE  ADAM  SCHOOLi  101 

out   seat  was   also   an   innovation  of  the    middle 
eighteenth  century. 

The  chair  in  illustration  XXVII  is  of  gilded 
wood.  It  is  a  very  typical  example  of  Adam's  work, 
in  the  possession  of  Mr.  Sidney  Letts.  Between  the 
back  and  the  seat  are  two  large  scrolls  decorated 
with  leaf  carving.  The  arms  form  similar  scrolls  and 
terminate  in  animals'  heads.  The  legs  are  round 
and  tapering,  with  beading  and  acanthus  leaf  orna- 
mentation. 

The  sofas  had  gracefully  curved  backs,  often 
surmounted  by  a  medallion  of  a  honeysuckle  and 
scroll  design.  They  usually  stood  on  six  legs,  of 
which  four  supported  the  straight  front  of  the  seat. 
In  other  examples,  classical  figures  were  used  instead 
of  legs. 

SIDEBOARDS 

Robert  Adam's  sketches  for  sideboards  with 
pedestal  cupboards  surmounted  by  urns  are  the 
earliest  examples  that  have  come  down  to  us  of  this 
type  of  furniture.  It  is  therefore  very  likely  that  he 
was  the  first  to  conceive  the  idea  of  thus  elaborating 
the  simple  serving-table  of  the  earlier  part  of  the 
eighteenth  century.  A  beautiful  Adam  sideboard  is 
shown  in  illustration  XXX.  The  pedestals  were 
sometimes  fixed  to  the  centre  framework,  and  some- 
times detached.  The  sideboards  were  often  fitted 
with  a  brass  rail  at  the  back  in  order  to  support  the 


102      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

silver  plate.  Some  of  the  finest  examples  of  Adam's 
work  are  to  be  found  in  his  designs  for  decorative 
silver.  The  chief  wood  of  which  the  sideboards  were 
made  was  mahogany;  the  ornaments  were  wood- 
inlay,  carving,  stucco,  and  brass.  Adam's  dining- 
rooms  frequently  had  a  carved  recess  at  one  end 
with  a  concave  vault  above,  and  he  then  designed  a 
sideboard  with  a  curved  back  exactly  to  fit  this  recess. 

ORNAMENTAL  SIDE-TABLES 

Pier-  and  console-tables  were  of  mahogany  or 
gilded  wood,  and  the  top  of  marble.  The  railing 
was  ornamented  by  hanging  festoons  or  similar 
decorations,  either  inlaid  or  executed  in  relief  (brass, 
stucco,  or  gilt-wood).  The  tables  sometimes  stood 
on  four  or  six  square  tapering  legs  (console-tables 
having  wall  brackets),  but  in  many  instances  more 
elaborate  supports  were  used — rams'  heads  or  carya- 
tides, ending  in  animals'  feet.  Illustration  XXVIII, 
shows  an  Adam  side-table  upheld  by  rams'  heads, 
the  property  of  Mr.  James  Orrock.  It  will  be  ob- 
served that  similar  supports  were  employed  for 
sofas,  chairs,  and  sideboards,  and  that  the  same  idea 
was  again  repeated  in  the  bookcases  or  commodes. 

LARGER  PIECES 

In  such  larger  pieces  the  classical  figures  were 
introduced  to  subdivide  the  panels  and  uphold  the 


X    o 
X  E- 


THE  ADAM  SCHOOL  103 

cornices.  In  some  cases,  fluted  pilasters  were  used  in 
place  of  the  figures.  The  cornices  were  surmounted 
either  by  urns  or  sculptured  figures. 

CABINETS 

Most  of  the  cabinets  and  commodes  were  semi- 
circular in  shape,  and  finely  inlaid.  Sometimes  they 
were  further  ornamented  by  painted  plaques  repre- 
senting pastoral  scenes,  classical  figures,  or  musical 
instruments. 

MIRRORS 

Adam's  airy  fancy  literally  revelled  in  designs 
for  mirror^frames  which  repeated  the  scheme  of 
ornament  used  in  the  chimney-piece  or  side-table 
above  which  they  were  hung.  They  were  either  of 
gilded  "  compo  "  or  gilded  wood,  often  oval  in  shape, 
and  surrounded  by  a  bordering  of  husks  and  of 
hanging  festoons,  upheld  by  cupids. 

Examples  of  such  mirrors  are  seen  in  illustra- 
tions XXXIII,  XXXV,  and  XLV. 

The  globe,  illustration  XXIX,  is  one  of  a  pair 
in  the  possession  of  Mr.  Burghard.  The  mahogany 
stand  is  carved  with  various  running  patterns — 
ribbon  and  rose,  leaves,  husks,  and  rosettes.  The 
feet  are  lions'  claws.  The  beautifully  carved  heads 
represent  the  four  continents,  Europe,  Asia,  Africa, 
and  America.  The  carving  of  the  heads  is  foreign  in 
character,  and  it  is  probable  that  these  were  made 


io4     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

by  Italian  workmen  in  Adam's  employ.  Each  of 
the  globes  is  inscribed  with  the  name  of  the  maker 
"  Adams."  At  the  close  of  the  eighteenth  century 
several  improvements  were  made  in  the  construction 
of  artificial  globes,  which  were  first  manufactured 
in  England  in  I592.1  George  Adams'  invention  was 
described  in  the  "Universal  Dictionary  of  Arts  and 
Sciences,"  1772: 

"  The  ingenious  Mr.  Adams,  mathematical  in- 
strument maker  to  His  Majesty,  has  constructed  a 
new  pair  of  Globes  with  very  considerable  improve- 
ments." A  long  and  exact  description  followed,  and 
there  was  also  an  illustration  showing  the  terrestrial 
and  celestial  globes  on  heavily  "turned"  stands. 
George  Adams  of  No.  60,  Fleet  Street,  had  a  world- 
wide reputation,  not  only  as  a  maker  of  globes,  but 
also  as  the  author  of  scientific  works.  He  died  in 

I773- 

The  globes  and  stands,  one  of  which  is  here  de- 
picted, are  supposed  to  have  been  made  expressly 
for  George  III,  and  to  have  been  stolen  from  the 
palace  at  the  beginning  of  the  last  century. 

As  we  have  already  said,  the  eighteenth-century 
furniture  makers  were  greatly  indebted  to  the  archi- 
tects who  built  the  apartments  intended  to  hold 
the  chairs,  tables,  and  sideboards  designed  for  the 
owner's  comfort.  In  the  next  chapter  it  is  proposed 

1  The  first  English  globe,  made  by  Molyneux  in  1 592,  is  in  the 
Library  of  the  Inner  Temple. 


Fig.  XXIX. 

To  face  page  104 


ADAM  GLOBE. 


THE  ADAM  SCHOOL  105 

to  illustrate  this  close  alliance  between  the  arts  by 
giving  a  description  of  Harewood  House,  near  Leeds. 
This  mansion  is,  with  the  exception  of  Claydon 
House,  co.  Bucks,  the  seat  of  the  Verneys,1  probably 
the  only  example  now  remaining  in  which  the  art 
of  Robert  Adam,  the  designer  of  the  rooms,  was 
brought  into  intimate  connection  with  the  work  of 
the  second  Thomas  Chippendale. 

1  At  Claydon  there  are  no  documents  to  prove  the  identity  of 
Chippendale's  work. 


CHAPTER  VII 

HAREWOOD  HOUSE,  YORKSHIRE.     STOURHEAD,  BATH, 
AND  ROWTON  CASTLE,  SALOP 

A  WRITER  has  recently  remarked  that  probably 
-/~~V  few  people  realize  the  extent  to  which  objects 
of  art  have  been  accumulating  in  this  "the  only 
country  which  for  the  last  two  centuries  and  a  half 
has  never  seen  a  town  sacked,  a  country  mansion 
fired,  or  more  than  a  temporary  interruption  of  the 
quiet  accumulation  of  wealth  which  our  laws,  unlike 
the  Code  Napoldon,  do  not  force  every  father  to 
divide  equally  among  his  children."  Numerous  are 
the  Elizabethan  mansions  which  remain  practically 
intact;  the  panelling  of  the  walls,  the  bed  in  which 
Queen  Elizabeth  slept  having  been  handed  down 
with  pride  from  generation  to  generation.  The  works 
of  artists  and  craftsmen  of  the  Georgian  schools  were 
bought  almost  exclusively  by  English  nobles  and 
wealthy  merchants,  who  alone  at  that  time  appreci- 
ated the  true  merit  of  those  native  productions  which 
are  now  prized  throughout  the  length  and  breadth  of 
Europe.  Pictures,  china,  and  plate,  brought  to- 
gether in  houses  built  by  Wren,  Inigo  Jones,  and  the 
brothers  Adam,  have  in  innumerable  instances  been 

1 06 


HAREWOOD   HOUSE,  YORKSHIRE        107 

preserved  as  they  were  a  hundred  and  fifty  or  two 
hundred  years  ago.  Unfortunately,  however,  during 
the  Early  Victorian  and  Middle  Victorian  eras 
a  curious  distaste  seems  to  have  arisen  for  the 
designs  of  the  furniture  of  the  previous  century. 
People  filled  their  houses  with  the  productions  of 
the  cabinet-makers  of  the  day  and  stowed  away 
their  older  furniture  in  cellars  or  boxrooms,  whence 
it  sometimes  drifted  to  the  neighbouring  cottages. 
With  the  gradual  return  of  good  taste  and  a  re- 
newed feeling  for  art,  the  beauty  of  Queen  Anne 
and  Chippendale  work  was  once  more  recognized. 
Choice  examples — scattered  in  all  directions,  and 
having  suffered  much  ill-usage  in  the  interval — were 
eagerly  sought  after  by  collectors.  Once  again  the 
old  masterpieces  in  wood  occupied  an  honoured 
place  in  great  houses — but  not  necessarily  in  the 
houses  for  which  they  had  first  been  made.  Possibly 
owing  to  the  high  social  position  held  by  the  archi- 
tect-designer, Robert  Adam,  "  Adam  "  sideboards 
and  suites  in  gilded  or  painted  wood  had  a  better 
fate,  and  were  often  suffered  to  remain  undisturbed. 
But  taking  into  consideration  the  wonderful  dur- 
ability of  the  work,  and  the  fact  that  mansions 
furnished  by  makers  of  the  Chippendale  school 
must  have  been  numerous,  comparatively  few  houses 
of  that  date  will  be  found  to  have  preserved  their 
original  furniture. 

If  the  word  Chippendale  be  taken  literally  as 


io8     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

denoting  work  executed  by  him  or  under  his  imme- 
diate direction,  the  matter  is  more  difficult  still.  It 
is  not  sufficient  to  find  examples  of  his  style  and 
period,  for  such  furniture  may  have  been  the  pro- 
duction of  some  other  maker.  Documentary  evidence 
of  Chippendale's  workmanship — either  in  the  form 
of  an  entry  in  a  steward's  ledger  or  an  actual  bill — 
can  alone  prove  the  identity  of  the  master  cabinet- 
maker. Such  proof  is  extremely  rare.  In  many 
cases  the  old  household  accounts  no  longer  exist; 
and  a  cabinet-maker's  bill,  dating  back  a  century 
and  a  half,  is  even  less  likely  to  have  been  kept. 
But  at  Harewood  House  these  precious  documents 
are  preserved,  and  through  the  courtesy  of  the  Earl 
of  Harewood  we  are  thus  enabled  to  illustrate  some 
of  Chippendale's  actual  productions. 

Harewood  House  stands  on  the  summit  of  a 
hill  about  halfway  between  Leeds  and  H arrogate, 
and  overlooks  the  woods  and  groves  of  romantic 
Wharfedale.  The  river  Wharfe,  after  passing  Bolton 
Abbey,  flows  through  the  vast  grounds  and  the 
pleasure  gardens  which  were  laid  out  for  the  first 
Earl  of  Harewood  by  the  famous  eighteenth-century 
landscape  gardener,  "Capability"  Brown.  Some 
of  the  finest  muscat  grapes  to  be  found  in  Eng- 
land still  ripen  in  the  vinery  planted  in  1783;  the 
stables  were  designed  by  Sir  William  Chambers ; 
the  model  village  on  the  estate  has  scarcely  been 
added  to  since  it  was  first  built  about  the  same 


HAREWOOD  HOUSE,  YORKSHIRE       109 

period.  In  fact,  with  the  exception  of  the  ruins  of 
old  Harewood  Castle — erected  in  the  thirteenth  and 
fourteenth  centuries — everything  within  Lord  Hare- 
wood's  domain,  including  Harewood  House  itself, 
is  an  example  of  eighteenth-century  workmanship. 
The  foundation  stone  of  the  house  was  laid  on 
23rd  March,  1759,  by  Edward  Lascelles,  afterwards 
first  Earl  of  Harewood.  The  architect  was  John 
Carr  of  York  (1721-1807);  the  elegant  structure, 
consisting  of  a  centre  and  two  side  wings,  adapted 
from  the  Corinthian  style,  has  been  classed  byFer- 
gusson  as  a  nobleman's  residence  of  "  a  thoroughly 
English  type."  The  interior  of  the  house  was  en- 
trusted to  Robert  Adam,  as  decorative  architect; 
to  Thomas  Chippendale  as  cabinet-maker  and  carver; 
and  to  Rose,  Zucchi,  Rebecci,  and  Collins  as  decora- 
tive artists. 

In  1843  Sir  Charles  Barry  made  some  improve- 
ments in  the  exterior  of  the  building,  and  ten  years 
later  a  certain  amount  of  re-decoration  and  up- 
holstery was  carried  out  in  the  interior.  But  in  its 
main  features  the  mansion  remains  still  in  the  same 
condition  as  when  first  inhabited  in  1771.  The  door 
shuts  behind  us,  and  we  are  in  another  world.  Even 
though  a  modern  note  is  struck  here  and  there,  the 
imagination  refuses  to  listen.  If  the  electric  light  in 
the  old  lanthorns,  or  the  various  additions, made  by 
successive  owners  of  the  property,  would  seem  to  re- 
call the  lapse  of  time,  we  have  but  to  turn  to  the 


gilded  mirrors  and  side-tables,  to  the  walls  and  ceil- 
ings— those  triumphs  of  eighteenth-century  art — 
and  before  us  we  see  only  a  nobleman's  country  seat 
in  the  days  of  Adam  and  Chippendale. 

The  association  of  these  two  masters  in  execut- 
ing the  furniture  and  decorations  of  Harewood  is  a 
fact  of  unique  interest.  Chippendale,  the  central 
figure  of  a  great  artistic  movement,  was  called  upon 
to  make  or  to  superintend  the  making  of  furniture, 
most  of  which  was  probably  designed  by  the  initiator 
of  a  rival  school. 

Coloured  sketches  of  ceilings,  mantelpieces, 
mirrors,  and  doors  for  many  of  the  rooms,  are 
among  Robert  Adam's  original  drawings  at  the 
Soane  Museum:  "A  Chimney-piece  for  the  Hall, 
1762  ";  two  alternate  designs  for  the  "  Music  Room 
Chimney-piece,  1767";  two  for  "the  drawing 
room  " ;  two  for  "  the  Second  Drawing  room  " ;  one 
for  "the  State  bed-chamber";  one  for  "another 
bed  chamber";  one  for  the  "  Principal  Gentlemen's 
Dressing-room  ";  four  for  the  chimney-piece  of  the 
gallery,  dated  1774,  1776,  and  1777,  and  five  others 
for  rooms  which  are  not  named.  There  are  three 
drawings  of  decorative  mirrors,  one  oval  and  two 
square-shaped.  The  sketches  for  the  ceilings  are 
dated  1767,  1768,  and  1769,  and  comprise  three  for 
the  drawing-room,  one  for  the  State  bedroom,  two 
for  the  gentlemen's  dressing-room,  two  for  thegallery 
(one  completed  and  a  duplicate  unfinished),  and 


HAREWOOD  HOUSE,  YORKSHIRE       in 

two  alternative  designs  for  "The  Dressing  Room," 
presenting  views  of  the  whole  side  of  the  room 
with  two  carved  doors.  Dressing-rooms  in  those 
days  were  evidently  apartments  of  much  importance ; 
the  painted  ornamentation  shown  in  the  two  sketches 
above  named  being  as  elaborate  as  that  of  the  State 
Reception  Rooms. 

The  general  scheme  of  decoration  is  certainly 
carried  out  in  conformity  with  Adam's  notion  of 
unity  in  ornamental  detail,  yet  an  occasional  console- 
table,  frame,  or  girandole  of  pure  Chippendale  type 
shows  that  the  author  of  the  "  Director"  was  per- 
mitted to  introduce  his  favourite  "  rococo  "  amidst 
the  Adam  classicism.  Too  little  is  known  of  Chip- 
pendale's actual  work  to  say  with  any  certainty  that 
he  never  designed  in  the  Adam  style.  About  the 
years  1765-71,  during  which  Harewood  House  was 
being  furnished,  the  rococo  school  was  already  fast 
going  out  of  fashion,  and  there  is  no  proof  that  Chip- 
pendale, who  had  so  far  followed  the  many  vagaries 
of  public  taste,  may  not  also  have  adopted  the 
classical  methods  which  prevailed  at  the  close  of  his 
career.  No  fourth  edition  of  the  "Director"  was 
issued  to  tell  us  of  Chippendale's  latest  productions, 
but  it  would  seem  that  the  prosperity  of  his  business 
could  hardly  have  continued  had  he  failed  to  keep 
pace  with  the  times.  These  are,  however,  mere  con- 
jectures, for  though  Adam's  drawings  at  the  Soane 
Museum  contain  no  specimen  of  the  furniture  at 


ii2     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Harewood,  it  is  most  likely  that  all  the  pieces  of 
distinctly  Adam  type  were  of  his  own  design,  while, 
with  a  few  exceptions,  Chippendale  on  this  occasion 
worked  chiefly  in  the  capacity  of  master  cabinet- 
maker. 

The  group  shown  in  illustration  XXX  repre- 
sents a  side  of  the  dining-room.  The  walls  are 
divided  into  panels  by  means  of  stucco  mouldings, 
and  hung  with  pictures  by  English  eighteenth-cen- 
tury masters.  There  are  two  sideboards  in  the  room, 
and  the  one  here  depicted  is  a  magnificent  example 
of  an  Adam  design.  The  wood  is  mahogany,  en- 
riched with  delicately  chased  brass-work.  The  ped- 
estal cupboards  for  wine  and  crockery  on  either  side 
stand  a  little  apart  from  the  central  portion,  and  are 
surmounted  by  elegantly  shaped  urns  which  served 
in  the  old  days  either  as  knife-boxes,  or  for  the  re- 
ception of  hot  and  cold  water.  The  oval  wine-cooler 
in  the  middle  adds  greatly  to  the  decorative  effect 
of  the  whole.  The  details  of  the  ornamentation  con- 
sist chiefly  of  chains  of  bell-flowers  caught  up  by 
rosettes,  quaint  masks,  bows,  and  clusters  of  leaves. 
The  rail  is  bordered  by  a  leaf  and  scroll  pattern,  and 
a  rose  and  scroll  border  encircles  the  wine-cooler  and 
urns.  In  grace,  colour,  and  beauty  of  workmanship, 
the  brass-work  rivals  the  best  French  examples. 
The  chairs  form  part  of  a  large  suite.  The  vertical 
frame,  the  tapering  legs,  the  "  dipped  "  seat,  and  the 
form  of  the  splat  are  clearly  Adam  in  style.  The 


p 

o 


o 
o 

a: 

O 

z 
z 

5 


HAREWOOD  HOUSE,  YORKSHIRE       113 

carving,  however,  is  very  fine,  and  was  no  doubt 
executed  by  Chippendale. 

The  dining-room  leads  into  the  music-room, 
where  the  ceiling — painted  by  Zucchi — is  subdivided 
by  stucco  mouldings  into  large  circular  divisions. 
The  whole  pattern  of  this  relief  work  is  exactly  re- 
produced in  the  carpet,  which  is  still  in  an  excellent 
state  of  preservation.  From  here  we  pass  into  the 
Gallery — the  great  State-room  of  the  house,  size 
80  ft.  by  24  ft. — where,  in  1835,  a  dinner  was  served 
to  one  hundred  and  thirty  guests,  on  the  occa- 
sion of  the  visit  of  the  late  Queen,  then  Princess 
Victoria,  who,  accompanied  by  the  Duchess  of  Kent, 
spent  the  night  at  Harewood.  One  can  picture  the 
scene — the  long  tables  "groaning  beneath  the  weight 
of  the  gold  and  silver  services  of  plate  with  which 
they  were  loaded,"1  while  no  less  brightly  in  the 
background  shone  the  gilt  frames  of  the  pictures 
and  mirrors,  all  masterpieces  of  carving. 

The  windows  are  decorated  by  a  cornice  and 
drapery  in  carved  and  painted  wood;  the  wonderful 
effect  of  which  is  shown  in  the  illustration  that 
forms  the  frontispiece.  In  a  very  scarce  Yorkshire 
book  entitled  "  The  Tourist's  Companion,"  by  John 
Jewell  of  Harewood  (1817),  there  is  a  minute  de- 
scription of  Harewood  House  and  all  its  apartments. 
In  the  author's  account  of  the  Gallery  is  the  follow- 
ing: "  Over  the  seven  windows  are  some  rich  mock- 

1  "  History  and  Antiquity  of  Harewood  "  by  John  Jones  (1859). 

I 


ii4     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

curtains  hanging  in  festoons  and  apparently  ready 
to  let  down  at  pleasure,  formed  of  wood  carved  and 
painted  under  the  directions  of  Mr.  Chippendale  in 
so  masterly  a  manner  as  to  deceive  every  beholder." 
The  cornice,  the  hanging  floral  wreaths,  the  tassels 
and  fringes  are  in  gilded  wood,  and  the  imitation 
drapery,  which  has  all  the  appearance  of  silk  or 
wool,  is  of  wood  painted  a  deep,  dark  blue.  Between 
the  five  windows  along  the  side  of  the  room  are 
mirrors  with  gilt-wood  frames  described  by  Jewell 
as  "four  most  superb  French  looking-glasses  nine 
feet  by  seven  feet  six."  They  are  surmounted  by 
coloured  medallions,  cupids,  and  floral  wreaths. 
Below  each  mirror  is  a  gilt-wood  side-table,  one 
of  which  is  seen  in  illustration  XXXI.  "  Four 
elegant  sideboards  with  two  (sic)  slabs  of  marble, 
each  by  Fisher,  and  the  frames  by  Mr.  Chippendale 
of  London."  Jewell  wrote  only  forty-six  years  after 
the  completion  of  the  house,  and  his  detailed  ac- 
count, containing  as  it  does  the  names  even  of  local 
artists  and  artizans  who  were  engaged  upon  different 
portions  of  the  building  and  decoration,  proves  be- 
yond a  doubt  that  the  author  had  at  his  command 
the  fullest  and  most  accurate  information.  Thus  the 
side-tables  with  their  ram's  head  and  wreath  decora- 
tion— a  purely  Adam  conception — are  shown  to 
have  been  carved  by  Chippendale  himself.  And 
although  the  book  merely  mentions — without  nam- 
ing the  maker — "two  library  tables"  in  the  same 


w 

on 
D 
O 

I 

Q 
O 
O 


OS 


w 
Q 


t> 
O 

p-!    .2 

$£ 
X  e 

bb 


HAREWOOD  HOUSE,  YORKSHIRE       115 

room,  richly  inlaid  and  ornamented  with  rams' 
heads  to  correspond  with  the  console-tables,  these 
— according  to  the  bills — were  also  made  by  Chip- 
pendale, or  under  his  direction.  In  front  of  the 
windows  are  six  gilt  Adam  tripods  supported  by 
sphinxes. 

The  wall  facing  the  windows  is  covered  with 
paintings  by  our  great  eighteenth-century  masters, 
and  several  of  the  frames  are  so  manifestly  rococo  in 
character  that  the  traditional  account  which  calls 
these  frames  "Chippendale"  is  probably  correct. 
"  The  ceiling  is  of  the  Palmyran  taste  and  the  stucco- 
work  by  Rose  is  esteemed  the  first  of  its  kind  in 
England.  The  paintings  are  admirably  executed  by 
Rebecca  (sic)  and  represent  the  seasons  of  the  year 
intermixed  with  figures  from  heathen  mythology." 
About  ten  years  ago  part  of  the  Gallery  caught  fire, 
the  lead  melted  which  secured  the  painted  plaques 
to  the  ceiling  and,  in  consequence,  all  the  ornamental 
panels  fell  to  the  ground.  Fortunately  only  one 
was  destroyed,  and  when  the  stucco-work  was  re- 
stored by  the  Leeds  School  of  Art,  the  panels  were 
replaced  in  their  original  position.  Adam's  two 
coloured  sketches  for  this  ceiling  at  the  Soane 
Museum  bear  the  date  ij6g.1 

No  description  of  this  interesting  apartment 
would  be  complete  without  mentioning  the  splendid 

1  This  date  proves  that  the  ceiling  was  not  the  work  of  Angelica 
Kauffmann  as  is  generally  supposed.    See  Chap.  V. 


n6     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

collection  of  porcelain.  The  Sevres  and  Oriental 
ware  has  been  valued  at  ;£  100,000. 

The  room  which  is  now  Lady  Harewood's  sit- 
ting-room was  once  the  State  bedroom.  Here  the 
Czar  Nicholas  I  of  Russia  slept  when,  as  Czarowitz, 
he  stayed  the  night  at  Harewood  in  1816;  it  was 
again  occupied  by  Princess  Victoria  nineteen  years 
later.  The  furniture  in  former  times  was  uphol- 
stered in  green  and  gold ;  the  bed  was  "  hung  with 
green  damask  bordered  with  gold "  and  had  a 
canopy  supported  by  Ionic  columns.  But  nothing 
of  all  this  remains,  although  the  ceiling,  by  Rose, 
some  of  the  furniture  and  the  mirrors,  are  still  as 
they  were  in  the  old  days.  Illustration  XXXII 
shows  an  inlaid  cabinet  writing-table.  The  radiating 
ornaments,  husks,  scrolls,  and  acanthus  leaves  are 
executed  in  various  coloured  woods,  and  both  wood 
and  ivory  are  used  for  the  plaques  on  the  cup- 
board doors.  Within  the  cupboards  are  numerous 
small  drawers;  there  is  a  large  drawer  above  the 
knee-hole  and  two  others  on  either  side.  In  its 
outline,  curves,  and  graceful  decorations  this  piece 
constitutes  one  of  Adam's  finest  designs  for  fur- 
niture. It  seems  difficult  to  imagine  that  Chippen- 
dale can  have  had  any  share  in  such  a  production, 
although  the  old  bills  prove  that  he  was  employed 
to  superintend  its  execution. 

Another  graceful  example  of  an  Adam  mirror 
in  gilded  wood  hangs  on  the  side  wall  and  is  shown 


D 

O 

Q 
O 
O 


02 

< 

h 

O 

z 

H 

2 
^ 

Q 


So 

x  &- 


Fig.  xxxin.  ADAM  MIRROR,  HAREWOOD  HOUSE. 

To  face  page  1 16. 


Fig.  xxxiv.  DOOR,  HAREWOOD  HOUSE. 

To  face  page  1 16. 


HAREWOOD  HOUSE,  YORKSHIRE       117 

in  illustration  XXXIII.  The  ornamental  portion, 
composed  of  a  painting  encircled  by  hanging  fes- 
toons and  with  an  oblong  vase  and  winged  horses 
below,  springs  from  the  top  of  the  oval  glass  and 
reaches  to  the  ceiling.  There  are  garlands  and 
plaques  on  the  upper  part  of  the  mirror-frame  it- 
self, together  with  caryatide  figures  on  either  side. 
Wreathed  foliage,  husks,  spreading  leaves,  rams' 
heads  and  bows  of  ribbon  complete  the  design. 

A  plainer  Adam  mirror-frame,  composed  of 
chains  of  husks,  a  vase,  and  a  bow  of  ribbon,  is 
fixed  to  the  wall  above  the  chimney-piece.  But 
strangely  enough  the  accompanying  girandoles  are 
typically  Chippendale,  with  pagoda-tops  and  pro- 
nounced rococo  ornamentation.  The  door  of  this 
room,  illustration  XXXIV,  is  one  of  seventy-six 
similar  doors  in  various  parts  of  the  house.  They 
are  of  solid  mahogany  and  four  or  five  inches  in 
thickness;  many  of  the  doors  are  double— one 
opening  behind  the  other  with  a  small  recess  be- 
tween— and  thus  form  a  very  stronghold  against 
draughts.  The  carving  of  the  panels  varies;  the 
door  seen  in  the  illustration  has  a  key  pattern,  corner 
rosettes,  and  small  beadings.  The  treatment  of  the 
handle-plate,  filigree  brass-work  in  a  scroll  design 
uniting  the  keyhole  and  handle,  is  eminently  char- 
acteristic of  an  Adam  door. 

Illustration  XXXV,  which  depicts  a  side-table 
and  mirror,  is  another  curious  example  of  the  associa- 


n8     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

tion  of  Adam  and  Chippendale.  A  glance  at  the  gilt- 
wood  table  is  sufficient  to  show  that  it  is  a  very  fine 
specimen  of  a  Chippendale  design.  On  the  deep 
frame  leaves  and  scrolls  in  Louis-Quinze  style  are 
mingled  with  grapes  and  foliage  in  high  relief;  elabo- 
rate winged  figures  resting  on  square  blocks  form 
the  feet,  and  the  carving  in  the  centre  shows  the 
animal's  head,  which  is  thus  placed  on  nearly  all 
Chippendale  sideboards.  The  simplicity,  classical 
severity  and  general  grace  of  the  mirror  and  sconces 
above,  form  a  remarkable  contrast.  The  chains  of 
husks,  the  cupids  supporting  a  vase,  the  delicate 
scrolls  and  honeysuckle,  repeated  so  often  in  Adam's 
work — though  always  with  charming  variation — 
leave  no  doubt  of  the  designer's  identity.  But  prob- 
ably nowhere  else  is  an  Adam  mirror  to  be  found  in 
connection  with  a  rococo  pier-table. 

The  hall  lanthorn  of  gilded  wood,  illustra- 
tion XXXVI,  is  evidently  another  Adam  design. 
There  are  a  number  of  similar  but  smaller  lanthorns 
at  Harewood.  Chippendale  himself  is  said  to  have 
executed  this  beautiful  piece,  and  the  delicate  cupid 
heads  and  wings  were  certainly  produced  by  the 
hand  of  a  master  carver. 


The  old  ledgers  of  the  Hoare  family  at  Stour- 
head,  Bath,  contain  several  entries  which  prove  that 
a  great  deal  of  the  furniture  for  this  mansion  was 
made  by  the  firm  of  Chippendale.  "  Paid  Chippen- 


Fig,  xxxvi.  HALL  LANTHORN,  HAREWOOD  HOUSE. 

To  face  page  1 1 8. 


STOURHEAD,  BATH  119 

dale  ;£i,ooo,"  "Paid  Chippendale  for  making 
library-furniture,"  are  two  extracts  from  these 
ledgers,  kindly  supplied  by  Sir  Henry  Hoare,  Bart. 
Owing  to  a  great  fire  which  took  place  at  Stourhead 
two  years  ago,  the  original  documents  have  been 
mislaid,  and  further  details,  as  well  as  the  date  of 
the  extracts,  cannot  now  be  obtained.  It  is  known, 
however,  that  one  of  the  Chippendales  worked  at 
Stourhead  for  a  considerable  time,  and  not  only  the 
library  furniture  but  the  bedroom  and  dining-room 
suites  also,  were  made  by  Chippendale  or  under  his 
direction. 

The  chair  A,  illustration  XXXVII,  is  one  of  a 
set  in  the  library.  It  is  distinctly  "  English  Em- 
pire" in  style  as  are  also  the  writing-desks  in  the 
same  room.  In  the  desks  the  angles  are  orna- 
mented to  correspond  with  the  sphinx-headed  legs 
of  the  chairs.  About  the  year  1800  Sir  Richard 
Colt  Hoare  added  the  library,  and  this  date  (to- 
gether with  the  style  of  the  furniture)  shows  that 
the  third  Chippendale  was  employed  to  furnish  it. 
It  is  almost  certain  that  the  great  Chippendale  also 
worked  there  some  twenty  or  thirty  years  previously, 
but  unfortunately  the  documents  in  proof  of  this 
have  not  yet  been  brought  to  light. 

Chair  B  is  one  of  a  large  suite  acquired  by  the 
owners  of  Stourhead  during  the  early  part  of  the 
nineteenth  century.  It  is  said  that  these  chairs  were 
actually  designed  by  Chippendale  (II)  for  Queen 


120     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Marie  Antoinette.  But  with  the  exception  of  six 
which  were  bought  by  the  French  Government  for 
the  Musde  Cluny,  the  whole  set  have  apparently 
found  their  way  back  to  this  country.  Some  from 
Roehampton  House  were  exhibited  recently  at  the 
Victoria  and  Albert  Museum.  A  few  are  in  the 
possession  of  Mr.  Sidney  Letts,  and  the  remaining 
twenty-four  single  chairs  and  two  armchairs  are  still 
at  Stourhead.  The  leaf  and  scroll  carving  is  very 
delicate. 


The  very  characteristic  mirror,  illustration 
XXX  VI I  A,  was  made  by  Chippendale  (II)  for 
Rowton  Castle,  Salop.  The  original  bills  for  this, 
as  well  as  for  much  of  the  Chippendale  furniture  at 
Rowton,  have  been  preserved  there  to  the  present 
day.  This  mirror,  with  its  ornaments,  is  a  delightful 
example  of  rococo  Chippendale.  A  similar  mirror, 
unfinished  and  ungilded,  was  lately  found  in  a  box- 
room  at  Rowton,  where  it  had  doubtless  been  stowed 
away  unnoticed  since  the  days  of  Chippendale. 


CO 

2: 


z: 
u 


r 


Fig.  xxxviu  CHIPPENDALE  MIRROR   FRAME— ROWTON. 

To  face  page  120. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

THE  HEPPLEWHITE  SCHOOL 

THE  furniture  of  the  Hepplewhite  School  gained 
its  name  from  the  folio  collection  of  designs 
entitled:  "The  Cabinet-Maker  and  Upholsterer's 
Guide"  (three  editions,  1788,  1789,  and  1794),  pub- 
lished under  the  name  of  "A.  Hepplewhite  and  Co., 
Cabinet  Makers,"  and  from  the  ten  designs  bearing 
the  signature  "  Hepplewhite"  or  "Heppelwhite"  in 
"The  Cabinet  makers  London  Book  of  prices  and 
designs  of  Cabinet  work"  (two  editions,  1788  and 
1793).  In  the  last-named  publication,  issued  by  the 
"  London  Society  of  Cabinet  Makers  "  the  majority 
of  the  plates  were  by  Thomas  Shearer  and  a  few  by 
W.  Casement. 

By  dint  of  patient  research  at  Somerset  House 
we  have  found  that  administration  of  the  goods, 
chattels,  and  credits  of  George  Heppelwhite  (sic], 
late  of  the  parish  of  St.  Giles,  Cripplegate,  London, 
was  granted  on  27th  June,  1786,  to  his  widow,  Alice.1 

1  Administration  Aft  Book,  Prerogative  Court  of  Canterbury, 
1786. 

121 


122     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Accounts  were  passed  in  December,  and  again  in 
June,  1787,  showing  that  the  effects  were  of  con- 
siderable value. 

George  Hepplewhite  undoubtedly  established 
the  upholstery  business  in  Cripplegate,  which  was 
carried  on  after  his  death  by  his  widow  Alice  and  a 
"  combine  "  under  the  style  of  "  A.  Hepplewhite  & 
Co."  Hepplewhite  was  not  buried  in  St.  Giles's 
church.1  He  may  have  been  a  countryman  of  She- 
raton's, for  the  name  still  survives  in  the  county  of 
Durham. 

In  the  "  Guide,"  which  was  issued  nearly  two 
years  after  George  Hepplewhite's  death,  the  writer 
of  the  preface  took  occasion  to  disparage  the  designs 
of  other  craftsmen,  more  especially  those  of  Chip- 
pendale and  Sheraton.  With  calm  superiority  he 
remarked:  "English  taste  and  workmanship  have, 
of  late  years,  been  much  sought  for  by  surrounding 
nations,  and  the  mutibility  (sic)  of  all  things,  but 
more  especially  of  fashions,  has  rendered  the  labours 
of  our  predecessors  in  this  line  of  little  use;  nay,  at 
this  day  they  can  only  tend  to  mislead  those  Foreign- 
ers who  seek  a  knowledge  of  English  taste  in  the 
various  articles  of  household  furniture." 

Sheraton  replied  scornfully  in  the  preface  to 
his  "Drawing-Book"  (1791).  "This  work"  (the 
"  Guide  "),  he  wrote,  "  has  already  caught  the  decline, 
and  perhaps,  in  a  little  time,  will  suddenly  die  in 

1  Information  from  the  vicar. 


THE  HEPPLEWHITE  SCHOOL  123 

the  disorder.  The  Book  of  Prices,"  he  continued, 
"  which  appeared  the  same  year  certainly  lays  claim 
to  merit  and  does  honour  to  the  publishers.  Whether 
they  had  the  advantage  of  seeing  Heppelwhite's 
book  before  theirs  was  published  I  know  not,  but 
it  may  be  observed  with  justice  that  their  designs 
are  more  fashionable  and  useful  than  his  in  propor- 
tion to  their  number." 

The  "Cabinet  Makers  London  Book  of  Prices" 
was  subsequently  republished  as  the  "  London 
Cabinet  Makers  Book  of  Prices,"  in  1811  (third 
edition,  1837).  The  plates  in  the  new  edition  were 
mainly  examples  of  early  nineteenth-century  dining- 
tables,  but  two  designs  as  well  as  the  frontispiece 
were  reproduced  from  the  older  book.  In  the  later 
work  the  prices  were  naturally  brought  up  to  date. 

Collectors  are  of  opinion  that  there  is  now  in 
existence  a  larger  quantity  of  Hepplewhite  furniture 
than  there  is  of  any  of  the  other  eighteenth-century 
schools.  The  most  expert  craftsmen  must  have 
been  employed  in  its  manufacture,  for  it  was  often 
wonderfully  contrived  to  combine  extreme  lightness 
with  durability.  The  chief  fault  was  a  want  of  pro- 
portion, especially  in  the  chairs,  a  fault  which  even 
graceful  lines  and  perfect  workmanship  could  not 
disguise. 

V  ^ejic^.te_carving  was  a  great  feature  of  the  Hep- 
plewhite style,  and  this  was  in  some  instances  com- 
bined with  inlay  in  coloured  woods,  very  sparingly 


i24     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

used.    But  as  a  general  rule  a  carved  piece  was  not 
inlaid,  and  vice  versa. 

Hajid-4iaiated_furniture  was  also  a  speciality, 
particularly  a  form  of  decoration  styled  in  the 
"Guide"  "japanning."  It  was  not  the  ordinary 
wood-lacquer  in  imitation  of  Oriental-ware,  but  a 
fashion  which  sprang  up  towards  the  close  of  that 
century  for  painting  a  design  in  varnish-paint  on  a 
black  or  white  ground.  In  "  Knight's  Penny  Cyclo- 
paedia" (1833),  this,  or  a  similar  process,  was  thus 
referred  to :  "  A  good  deal  of  common  wood-painting 
is  called  japanning  which  differs  from  the  more 
ordinary  painter's  work,  by  using  turps  instead  of 
oil  to  mix  the  colours  with,  bedsteads,  washhand- 
stands,  bedroom  chairs,  and  similar  articles  of  furni- 
ture are  done  in  this  way." 

Very  few  pieces  of  Hepplewhite  japanning  have 
come  down  to  us  in  their  original  condition,  for  the 
varnish-paint  soon  wore  off  and  left  only  a  dis- 
coloured surface.  There  are  many  fine  examples, 
however,  which  were  painted  in  the  usual  way  on  a 
plain  coloured  ground  to  tone  with  the  room.  It  is 
probable  that  some  of  the  decorative  artists  who 
painted  furniture  for  Robert  Adam  were  also  em- 
ployed by  cabinet-makers  of  the  Hepplewhite  school 
as  there  is  a  great  similarity  between  the  two  schools 
in  this  form  of  ornamentation.  Hepplewhite  fur- 
niture was  often  placed  in  an  Adam  house  and 
in  such  cases  was  evidently  specially  designed  to 


THE  HEPPLEWHITE  SCHOOL  125 

harmonize  with  its  surroundings.  Nevertheless  even 
the  decorative  ornaments  by  no  means  exclusively 
followed  the  lines  laid  down  by  Adam;  many  ideas 
were  taken  from  Louis-Seize  types,  and  numerous 
examples  showed,  especially  in  outline,  marked 
originality  of  treatment. 

Curiously  enough,  Hepplewhite  cabinet-makers 
made  use  of  what  might  be  called  "stock-decora- 
tions," certain  special  motives,  few  in  number,  which 
were  carved,  inlaid,  or  painted  on  all  their  produc- 
tions. Thus  ears  of  corn,  accompanied  by  swags  of 
drapery,  and 'pointed  fern  leaves  are  to  be  seen  on 
most  specimens  of  their  work.  The  "Prince  of 
Wales's  feathers  "  was  also  a  favourite  device,  and 
one  to  which  the  firm  of  Hepplewhite  and  Co.  as- 
serted their  right  by  stating  that  several  of  their 
designs  had  been  executed  for  the  Prince  himself. 

The  chief  wood  employed  was  mahogany,  satin- 
wood  in  actual  examples  of  this  school  being  used 
more  for  inlay  than  for  structural  purposes.  In  the 
"  Guide,"  satin-wood  was  only  mentioned  as  a  suit- 
able base  for  knife-boxes;  in  the  "  Book  of  Prices," 
however,  it  was  spoken  of  in  connection  with  all 
kinds  of  furniture.  The  following  is  a  list  of  other 
woods  for  inlaying  which  were  given  in  the  "  Book 
of  Prices  " :  manilla,  safisco,  havannah,  king,  tulip, 
rose,  purple,  snake,  alexandria,  panella,  yew,  and 
maple.  Some  of  these,  evidently  trade  names  of 
the  time,  cannot  now  be  identified. 


126      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 


CHAIRS 

The  size  of  Hepplewhite  chairs  marked  the  great 
change  in  the  fashions  at  the  close  of  the  eigh- 
teenth century.  Ladies'  hoops  were  gradually  dis- 
appearing; a  woman  no  longer  occupied  "  the  space 
of  six  men,"  and  the  old  wide  seats  were  accord- 
ingly superseded  by  smaller  and  neater  shapes. 
Some  chairs,  both  of  the  Adam  and  Hepplewhite 
classes,  belonged  to  a  transitional  stage — having 
a  broad  seat  combined  with  a  light  back  and  slight 
taper  legs — and  such  examples  almost  invariably 
appeared  ill-balanced. 

The  following  quotations  will  show  the  differ- 
ence between  the  average  chair-measurements  given 
in  Chippendale's  "  Director  "  and  those  in  Hepple- 

white's  "  Guide." 

DIRECTOR.  GUIDE. 

Height  of  legs I  ft.    4  in.  I  ft.  5  in. 

Height  of  back I  „    10  „  I  „   8  „ 

Width  in  front  of  seat   .     .     .     I  „    10  „  I  „   8  „ 

Depth  of  seat I  „      5  „  I  „    5  „ 

^  The  most  characteristic  Hepplewhite  chairs  had 
"shield"  and /'heart "-shaped  backs;  wheel,  oval, 
square,  and  tlaf^acks,  however,  were  also  pro- 
duced in  considerable  quantities.  Thin  moulded 
ribs  drawn  into  a  medallion  at  the  lower  end  of  the 
splat;  urns  combined  with  scrolls  and  convention- 
alized foliage;  Prince  of  Wales's  feathers,  wheat- 


A  B  C 

Fig.  xxxvni          SHEARER  CABINET,  HEPPLEWHITE  CHAIRS. 

To  face  page  127. 


THE  HEPPLEWHITE  SCHOOL  127 

ears,  and  swags  were  forms  brought  into  constant  re- 
quisition. Other  details  were  pearl-beadings  which 
took  the  place  of  Chippendale's  shell  or  leaf  work 
as  a  border  ornament;  carved  husks,  and  oval, 
round,  or  semicircular  rosettes. 

Most  chairs  were  either  carved,  painted,  or  "ja- 
panned " — in  the  manner  above  described,  but  oc- 
casionally the  decorations  were  inlaid.  The  legs, 
whether  square  or  round,  tapered,  and  were  ended 
in  a  tapering  toe.  Delicate  turning  was  often  em- 
ployed, and  sometimes  fluting;  reeded  or  grooved 
arms  were  also  a  noticeable  feature  of  these  chairs. 
The  splat,  as  a  rule,  was  supported  by  the  side  up- 
rights, and  did  not  run  down  into  the  back  of  the 
seat. 

The  three  chairs  in  group  XXXVIII  are  all 
executed  in  mahogany.  In  the  shield-back  armchair 
B  the  bars  meet  in  a  medallion  at  the  lower  extrem- 
ity, and  swags  of  moulded  drapery  are  slung  across 
from  side  to  side.  The  front  legs  and  the  arms  are 
surrounded  by  a  slight  double  moulding;  at  the 
juncture  of  arms  and  legs  is  a  carved  design  of 
pointed  leaves  and  rosettes.  This  chair  is  very  well 
proportioned;  unlike  most  examples  of  this  class, 
the  lower  portion  corresponds  well  with  the  upper, 
both  as  regards  size  and  shape.  In  the  oval-backed 
chair  c,  although  the  general  effect  is  good,  a  closer 
examination  shows  that  the  various  parts  are  not  so 
well  balanced  as  in  chair  B.  The  splat  runs  down 


128     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

into  the  frame  of  the  seat — rather  unusual  for  Hep- 
plewhite — and  this  fact,  combined  with  the  bracing 
of  the  legs,  seems  to  denote  that  the  chair  was  made 
at  a  period  which  came  more  within  the  Chippen- 
dale influence.  Wheat-ears  are  carved  at  the  top  of 
the  splat;  the  front  legs  are  square  and  fluted,  and 
only  very  slightly  tapering. 

Chair  A  has  a  heart-shaped  back,  surmounted 
by  Prince  of  Wales's  feathers  and  a  bow  of  ribbon. 
The  splat  is  further  ornamented  by  the  character- 
istic swags.  The  legs  are  tapering  and  quite  plain. 

In  illustration  XXXIX  the  graceful  splat  is 
composed  of  finely-carved  Prince  of  Wales's  feathers, 
a  bow  of  ribbon,  and  a  shell.  Rosettes,  the  fluting 
of  the  legs,  and  fine  mouldings  complete  the  orna- 
mentation. This  example  shows  the  wide  seat  of 
the  transitional  chairs  and  the  cross  stretchers  of 
the  Chippendale  period. 

The  Hepplewhite  Warden's  chair  and  shorter 
chair,  illustration  XL,  in  the  possession  of  Mr.  J.  E. 
Schunck,  came  originally  from  Ireland,  and  the 
royal  emblems,  taken  in  combination  with  the  Bibli- 
cal subjects  depidled  on  the  painted  plaques,  point  to 
the  fact  that  these  chairs  were  evidently  designed 
for  some  politico-religious  society.  It  is  possible 
that  they  were  made  for  the  first  lodge  of  the 
Orangemen  opened  in  1795. 

The  chairs  are  of  immense  size — one  has  to 
climb  up  to  the  Warden's  chair  by  means  of  a  stool. 


Fig.  xxxix.         HEPPLEWHITE  CHAIR. 

To  face  page  128. 


Fi«-  XL-  HEPPLEWHITE  WARDEN'S  CHAIR. 

To  face  page  128. 


THE  HEPPLEWHITE  SCHOOL  129 

The  height  of  this  larger  armchair  is  6  ft.  8^  in. 
(back  4  ft.) ;  the  width  of  the  seat  in  front,  2  ft.  7  in., 
and  the  depth,  i  ft.  loj  in.  The  shorter  chair  is  5  ft. 
high  (back,  2  ft.  9^  in.) ;  width  of  seat  in  front,  2  ft. 
2  in.;  depth,  I  ft.  8  in.  The  wood  is  very  dark 
Spanish  mahogany,  magnificently  carved,  and  both 
the  execution  and  design  are  extremely  fine.  The 
outer  framework  is  delicately  moulded;  the  splat 
joins  the  seat  at  the  back;  the  legs  are  square,  fluted, 
very  slightly  tapering,  and  braced  together  by  double 
side  and  back  rails,  and  a  single  front  rail;  the 
moulded  arms  curve  gracefully.  The  top  rail  of  the 
taller  chair  is  surmounted  by  a  pine,  ears  of  corn, 
and  acanthus  leaves.  The  splat  has  at  the  top  a 
bow  of  ribbon,  rosettes,  and  leaves,  and  for  its 
central  design  huge  Prince  of  Wales's  feathers 
waving  above  a  jewelled  coronet.  At  the  base  is  a 
cluster  of  pointed  fern  leaves  flanked  by  conven- 
tionalized foliage  in  graceful  lines.  In  the  inlaid 
plaques,  although  the  colouring  is  somewhat  dulled, 
the  pictures  are  still  quite  distinct.  The  design  of 
the  smaller  chair  is  slightly  different,  the  principal 
omission  being  the  coronet  and  the  ornaments  on 
the  top  rail. 

As  regards  coverings,  it  is  stated  in  Hepple- 
white's  "  Guide  "  that  mahogany  chairs  should  have 
either  seats  of  horsehair,  plain,  striped,  or  chequered, 
or  else  cane-seats  covered  by  cushions  of  linen,  or 
leather.  Japanned  chairs  were  to  have  "  linen  or 

K 


130     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

cotton  cases,"  and  easy  chairs  covers  of  horsehair 
or  leather.  Easy  chairs  usually  had  curved  legs  in 
Louis-Quinze  style,  and  graceful  side-wings  similar 
in  general  outline  to  Queen  Anne  grandfather  chairs. 
A  settee  with  a  carved  back,  consisting  of  several 
shield-  or  heart-shaped  splats,  generally  formed  part 
of  a  Hepplewhite  suite.  An  upholstered  window- 
seat,  a  long  bench  with  a  curved  front  and  upright 
ends  rolling  outwards,  was  also  especially  character- 
istic of  a  Hepplewhite  room.  These  seats  were  some- 
times made  of  painted  satin-wood,  though  in  the 
"  Guide  "  they  were  spoken  of  as  seats  of  "  mahogany 
or  japanned  wood,"  with  coverings  of  "taberray  or 
morine." 


FIRESCREENS 

Hepplewhite's  firescreens  were  either  "  pole," 
or  "  horse  "-shaped.  In  the  pole  screens  a  small, 
round,  oval,  or  square  frame  of  mahogany,  or  other 
painted  wood,  was  suspended  on  a  pillar,  and  sup- 
ported either  by  a  firm  stand  or  spreading  claw-feet. 

The  screen  depicted  in  illustration  LI  1 1  is  of 
this  class.  The  base  is  painted  mahogany,  and  the 
screen  itself,  a  piece  of  eighteenth-century  wool 
embroidery  and  painting  on  a  silk  ground,  repre- 
sents a  well-known  picture  of  Angelica  Kauffmann, 
"  Una  and  the  Lion." 

Horse  firescreens  were  of  larger  size;  the  screen- 


THE  HEPPLEWHITE  SCHOOL  131 

panel  itself  was  generally  oval  in  shape,  and  was 
made  to  slide  up  and  down  in  grooves  cut  on  the 
inner  side  of  a  square  frame. 

TABLES 

Pembroke  tables,  small  ornamental  tables  with 
inlaid  tops  and  brackets  to  support  the  two  side- 
flaps,  were  very  popular  at  the  close  of  the  century, 
and  the  "Guide"  contained  several  examples. 

Pier-tables  were  either  circular  or  serpentine  in 
shape,  and  stood  on  tapering  legs. 

The  dining-tables — fully  described  in  the  "  Book 
of  Prices  " — were  made  in  a  number  of  different 
shapes.  Perhaps  the  most  curious  was  the  horse- 
shoe table,  having  an  average  length  of  7  ft. 
when  closed,  but  extending  to  10  ft.  by  means  of 
flaps  which  folded  back  over  the  top  of  the  table. 
The  width  was  2  ft.  6  in.  There  were,  also,  semi- 
circular tables  with  folding  flaps  of  the  same  size 
as  the  table  itself,  the  whole  supported  by  three 
"fly"  legs;  and  smaller  flap-tables,  to  be  joined 
together,  each  on  four  tapering  legs.  Lastly,  there 
were  "pillar  and  claw"  dining-tables — also  to  be 
joined  together. 

FRAMES 

Frames  were  simple,  both  in  outline  and  orna- 
mentation, and  displayed  neither  the  exuberance  of 


132      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Chippendale  examples  nor  the  extreme  fancifulness 
of  those  of  the  Adam  school.  Pier-glass  frames, 
oblong  or  oval,  were  still  made  of  the  same  width 
as  the  pier-table.  They  had  simple  mouldings  and 
were  ornamented  on  the  upper  part  with  delicate 
leaf  scrolls,  an  urn,  or  an  eagle;  chains  of  husks  or 
drapery  hung  over  the  sides,  and  on  the  lower  border 
there  was  a  very  slight  carving  of  husks,  foliage,  or 
a  bow  of  ribbon.  A  pair  of  candlesticks  was  often 
attached  to  the  sides,  or  coupled  together  on  the 
lower  edge.  The  frames  were  carried  out  either  in 
gilded  wood — the  flower  and  leaf  ornaments  being 
often  made  of  plaster  wired  at  the  back — in  maho- 
gany inlaid,  or  in  other  woods,  "japanned"  and 
painted.  Gilded  girandoles  were  more  fantastic  in 
style.  The  back-  or  wall-piece  to  which  they  were 
fixed  consisted  of  white  or  coloured  cut  glass,  gilded 
urns,  or  a  mirror  combined  with  scrolls  and  foliage. 
Oval  convex  and  concave  mirrors  were  also  much  in 
demand  about  this  period. 


SIDEBOARDS 

The  sideboards  were  either  serpentine  or  straight 
fronted,  and  stood  on  four  or  six  long,  tapering 
(sometimes  fluted)  legs.  If  the  sides  curved,  the 
angle  of  the  leg  was  made  to  correspond  exadtly 
with  the  curve  of  the  framework  above;  thus  the 
legs  were  often  placed  cornerwise  with  one  of  the 


133 

angles  turned  towards  the  front.  The  fittings  con- 
sisted of  a  centre  drawer,  flanked  by  two  deep  drawers 
or  cellarettes.  These  side  drawers  were  often  so 
divided  on  the  outside  as  to  present  the  appearance 
of  two  drawers,  one  above  the  other.  In  Hepple- 
white's  "  Guide  "  we  are  told  that  the  drawer  on  the 
left  hand  was  to  be  lined  with  lead,  and,  as  it  was 
intended  to  hold  water  to  wash  the  glasses,  must 
have  a  valve  cock  or  plug  to  let  this  water  off. 
Straight-fronted  sideboards,  without  drawers,  were 
often  supplemented  by  Adam  pedestals  and  vases 
and  brass-hooped  cellarettes.  The  top  was  maho- 
gany, sometimes  bordered  by  a  narrow  inlaid  band. 
There  was  no  brass  rail  at  the  back  and  but  little 
ornamentation,  except  for  vertical  flutings,  circular 
rosettes,  fans,  a  vase,  scrolls  or  husks  in  the  centre 
of  the  rail.  In  many  instances  the  sideboards  were 
decorated  by  fine  carving  only ;  other  examples  were 
inlaid,  but  the  inlay  was  always  very  slight.  A  type 
of  Hepplewhite  sideboard  specially  mentioned  in 
the  "Guide"  had  an  oval-shaped  back  to  fit  into 
a  recess;  such  pieces  were,  no  doubt,  intended  for 
dining-rooms  designed  by  Adam  or  his  followers. 
Shearer's  sketches  included  a  pedestal  sideboard, 
elaborately  decorated  with  hand-paintings  and  with 
an  ornamental  wall-piece  of  wood — in  place  of  a 
brass  rail — at  the  back.  This  is  the  only  example 
of  Shearer's  work  in  which  he  departed  from  his 
r61e  of  extreme  simplicity. 


i34     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Illustration  XLI  depicts  a  mahogany  Hepple- 
white  sideboard  belonging  to  Mr.  Alfred  Davis. 
The  serpentine  front  measures  5  ft.  9  in.  by  2  ft.  8  in. 
straight  across,  and  is  fitted  with  a  long  middle 
drawer  and  two  smaller  drawers  on  either  side.  The 
front  legs  are  placed  with  the  angle  turned  towards 
the  front,  corresponding  with  a  similar  angle  in  the 
curve  of  the  frame  above;  all  four  legs  are  fluted. 
The  top  is  inlaid  with  a  band  of  king-wood  and  a 
line  of  satin-wood.  The  three  panels  in  the  front 
are  of  satin-wood,  and  the  festoon  of  husks  is  of 
stained  holly. 

The  wine-cooler  below,  also  a  Hepplewhite 
design,  is  mahogany  inlaid  with  satin-wood.  The 
knife  box  of  the  same  materials  has  a  silver  key 
escutcheon  and  a  small  silver  ring  handle  above. 

If  Hepplewhite  himself  be  taken  as  the  central 
figure  of  the  school  which  bears  his  name,  Thomas 
Shearer  must  be  regarded  as  one  of  its  chief  expon- 
ents. Shearer's  designs  in  the  "  Book  of  Prices," 
were,  with  two  or  three  exceptions,  issued  in  a 
separate  publication  entitled  "Designs  for  House- 
hold Furniture,"  in  1788.  The  sketches  for  bureaus, 
bookcases,  sideboards,  and  bedroom  furniture  were 
very  elegant,  having  beautiful  mouldings  and  sim- 
ple ornamentation.  There  were  no  chairs  included 
among  his  drawings,  and,  as  Sheraton  informs  us 
that  chair-making  was  generally  a  trade  apart  from 
that  of  cabinet-making,  we  may  conclude  that  Shearer 


Fig.  XLI.      HEPPLEWHITE  SIDEBOARD,  GRINLING  GIBBONS  MIRROR. 

To  face  page  134. 


THE  HEPPLEWHITE  SCHOOL  135 

was  a  cabinet-maker  only.  The  legs  of  all  his  pieces 
were  plain,  square,  and  tapering,  and  in  this  respect 
he  differed  from  Hepplewhite,  who  made  great  use 
of  turning  and  fluting.  Shearer's  principal  orna- 
mentation consisted  of  lines  and  bands  of  rare  woods. 
One  decorative  detail  not  seen  in  the  work  of  other 
designers  was  the  introduction  of  a  whole  sheaf  of 
corn  carved  in  relief. 

Both  Hepplewhite  and  Shearer  devised  many 
specimens  of  folding  furniture.  Shearer's  arrange- 
ments for  the  partitions,  sliding  shelves,  and  drawers 
not  only  of  writing-tables,  but  of  dressing-  and 
shaving-tables,  were  perhaps  the  most  ingenious  of 
any  produced  during  that  century. 

Hepplewhite  bookcases  and  cupboards  had 
straight  moulded  cornices,  occasionally  surmounted 
by  an  urn  or  scroll-work.  The  cornices  in  Shearer's 
drawings  were  slightly  arched  or  curved,  but  neither 
of  these  makers  favoured  either  the  "  swan-neck  " 
or  "  broken  "  pediment. 

The  china-cupboard,  illustration  XXXVIII,  in 
the  possession  of  Mr.  Alfred  Davis,  is  a  choice 
example  of  a  Shearer  design.  The  mahogany  is 
ornamented  by  mouldings  and  beautiful  carving  on 
the  pediment.  The  sheaf  of  wheat-ears  which  ap- 
pears in  the  centre  is  most  realistic.  A  similar 
decoration  occurs  on  a  wardrobe  in  Shearer's  "  De- 
signs for  Household  Furniture,"  which  is  again 
reproduced  in  the  "  Book  of  Prices."  The  cupboard 


136     ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

(XXXVIII)  is  3  ft.  6  in.  by  3  ft.  wide.  Three 
small  vase-shaped  pinnacles  are  missing  from  the 
pediment. 

Writing-tables  and  dressing-tables  often  had 
sliding  "  tambour  "  doors.  Such  doors  were,  accord- 
ing to  Sheraton,  made  of  narrow  strips  of  mahogany 
glued  to  and  laid  upon  canvas,  "which  binds  them 
together  and  suffers  them  at  the  same  time  to  yield 
to  the  motion  their  ends  make  in  the  curved  groove 
on  which  they  run,  so  that  the  top  may  be  brought 
round  to  the  front  and  pushed  at  pleasure  to  the 
back  again  when  it  is  required  to  be  open." 

From  the  frail  nature  of  these  reeded  slides,  it  is 
a  matter  of  astonishment  that  so  many  should  have 
come  down  to  us. 

The  best  specimens  of  turning  were  to  be  seen 
in  the  bed  posts,  frequently  converted  nowadays 
into  lamp-  or  flower-stands.  Banded  reeding,  with 
fern-leaf  ornamentation,  was  a  special  feature  of 
these  posts. 


CHAPTER  IX 

THOMAS  SHERATON 

THOMAS  SHERATON,  the  last  of  the  greaU 
eighteenth-century  furniture  designers,  had  a( 
very  chequered  career.  He  wrote  a  number  of  tech- 
nical treatises,  and  though  he  illustrated  them  with 
his  masterly  diagrams  and  designs,  not  one  of  the 
books  proved  commercially  successful,  and  his  days 
were  passed  in  poverty.  Born  at  Stockton-on-Tees 
about  1751,  the  son  of  a  father  of  the  same  names, 
Sheraton  evidently  came  of  very  humble  stock,  for 
he  had  no  regular  education.  He  learnt  the  trade 
of  cabinet-making  and  in  all  his  spare  time  taught 
himself  perspective,  drawing,  and  geometry.  In  early 
life  he  was  a  member  of  the  Church  of  England, 
but  ultimately  became  a  zealous  Baptist.  He  occa- 
sionally preached  in  Baptist  chapels,  and  wrote 
some  religious  essays.  His  first  publication  was  a 
pamphlet  of  this  nature,  entitled,  "A  Scriptural 
Illustration  of  the  Doctrine  of  Regeneration  .  .  .  To 
which  is  added,  A  Letter  on  the  Subject  of  Bap- 
tism" (Stockton,  1782).  In  this  tract  he  describes 
himself  as  a  "  mechanic,  one  who  never  received  the 

137 


138     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

advantage  of  a  collegial  or  academical  education," 
and  refers  to  a  short  stay  he  made  at  Norwich. 

About  1790,  Sheraton  came  to  London  to  seek 
fame  and  fortune,  just  as  Chippendale  had  done 
more  than  half  a  century  before  him.  In  1793  he 
was  living  at  No.  41,  Davies  Street,  Grosvenor 
Square;  two  years  later  he  is  found  occupying  No. 
1 06,  Wardour  Street,  Soho;  finally,  he  settled  at 
No.  8,  Broad  Street,  Golden  Square,  where  he  had 
a  house  and  shop. 

His  first  (and  best)  book  of  decorative  designs 
was  issued  in  quarto  parts,  1791-4,  under  the  title: 
"The  Cabinet-Maker  and  Upholsterer's  Drawing- 
Book, "with  an  "Appendix "and  "Accompaniment." 
The  first  edition  contained  1 1 1  copperplate  engrav- 
ings. A  second  edition  appeared  in  1793  with  119 
plates,  and  a  "  third  and  revised  edition,"  complete 
in  one  volume,  "with  122  copperplates,"  in  1802. 
The  four  sections  of  the  "Drawing-Book"  were 
divided  as  follows:  ist,  geometrical  lines;  2nd, 
perspective;  3rd,  furniture  designs;  4th,  mouldings 
and  the  ornamental  parts  of  furniture.  The  chapters 
devoted  to  perspective  contain  a  long  dissertation 
on  the  subject  of  light  and  shade.  "  A  short  View 
of  the  Nature  and  Principles  of  Shadows  caused  by 
the  Sun  coming  in  different  Directions  to  the  Pic- 
ture" (p.  326)  is  a  typical  heading.  The  descrip- 
tions of  the  furniture  illustrated  in  the  third  section 
combine  minute  directions  for  the  working  cabinet- 


THOMAS  SHERATON  139 

maker,  with  an  explanation  of  the  exact  use  of  each 
object.  This  last  information  is  of  special  interest, 
as  so  many  articles  described  as  fashionable  at  the 
time  are  quite  unknown  in  our  modern  houses. 

To  this  work  Sheraton  prefixed  a  lengthy  list  of 
subscribers,  which  included  the  names  of  almost  all 
the  principal  craftsmen  in  London  and  the  provinces. 
A  German  translation  was  published  at  Leipzig  in 
1794  as  "  Modell-  und  Zeichnungsbuch  fiir  Ebenis- 
ten,  Tischler,  &c.,"  2  vols.,  with  95  plates. 

There  seems  little  doubt  that  when  Sheraton 
first  came  to  London  he  carried  on  his  former  trade 
as  a  journeyman  cabinet-maker.  It  is  very  likely 
that  he  had  not  enough  capital  to  establish  a  good 
business  and  to  employ  the  necessary  skilled  work- 
men to  help  him.  Whatever  may  have  been  the 
reason,  he  soon  gave  up  the  practical  side  of  his 
craft  altogether  and  devoted  himself  to  the  writing 
of  technical  treatises.  In  his  introduction  to  Part 
III  of  the  "  Drawing- Book"  he  stated  his  con- 
viction that  it  was  a  man's  duty  to  give  the  whole 
world  the  benefit  of  his  knowledge,  and  not  to  be 
affected,  as  so  many  people  were,  by  the  thought 
that  others  would  become  as  wise  as  himself.  A 
veritable  altruist  Sheraton  appears  to  us  now-a- 
days.  A  poor,  working  furniture-maker,  who  had 
learnt,  probably  by  long  nights  of  study,  the  theory 
of  design  in  order  to  perfect  the  creations  of  his 
imaginative  brain,  he  never  rested  until  he  had  im- 


140     ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

parted  to  his  brother  craftsmen  a  knowledge  of  those 
principles  which  alone  could  make  their  work  as 
perfect  as  his  own. 

Thus  Sheraton  devoted  himself  entirely  to 
authorship,  and  for  some  years  his  designs  were 
much  in  demand.  He  is  supposed  to  have  originated 
both  the  furniture  and  decorations  of  a  Chinese 
drawing-room  at  Carlton  House  for  the  Prince  of 
Wales,  afterwards  George  IV.  Two  views  of  the 
room  are  given  without  a  comment  in  Sheraton's 
"  Accompaniment "  to  the  "  Drawing-Book,"  and 
are  dated  1793.  This  royal  residence  was  in  1783 
entrusted  to  the  architect,  Henry  Holland,  to  be 
remodelled,  decorated,  and  furnished,  a  large  sum 
of  money  being  voted  by  Parliament  for  the  pur- 
pose. Among  the  official  accounts  and  papers  for 
1791  an  exact  record  is  given  of  the  details  of  ex- 
penditure together  with  the  names  of  the  crafts- 
men employed,  all  of  whom  signed  a  petition  for 
increase  of  pay.  In  this  list  Sheraton's  name  does 
not  appear,  and — unless  the  omission  was  purely 
accidental — it  is  evident  that  Sheraton  had  no 
actual  share  in  the  work. 

In  respect  to  his  commissions  from  the  general 
public  it  seems  highly  probable,  since  the  great 
beauty  of  his  furniture  lay  in  the  perfection  of  its 
workmanship,  that  he  himself  employed  the  cabinet- 
makers, upholsterers,  etc.,  who  were  to  carry  out  his 
ideas.  "  In  conversing  with  cabinet-makers,"  he 


THOMAS  SHERATON  141 

said,  "  I  find  no  one  individual  equally  experienced 
in  every  job  of  work."  And  in  describing  his 
method  of  gaining  exact  information  he  added:  "I 
have  made  it  my  business  to  apply  to  the  best  work- 
men in  different  shops  to  obtain  their  assistance  in 
the  explanation  of  such  pieces  as  they  are  most  ac- 
quainted with."  But,  alas,  even  if  at  first  Shera- 
ton's orders  were  profitable,  his  prosperity  was  of 
short  duration. 

In  1794  an  exhortation  from  his  pen,  entitled 
"  Spiritual  Subjection  to  Civil  Government,"  was 
appended  to  "  Thoughts  on  the  Peaceable  and 
Spiritual  Nature  of  Christ's  Kingdom,"  a  pamphlet 
written  by  his  friend  Adam  Callander,  the  landscape 
painter.  It  was  reprinted  separately  the  following 
year  with  additions. 

An  article  of  Sheraton's,  "  Recentes  Decores," 
appeared  in  "The  Designer's  Magazine"  (No.  i), 
in  1 7Q6.1  This  publication  evidently  had  a  short 
existence.  No  copy  has  been  traced. 

During  1802  and  1803  Sheraton  published  in 
fifteen  parts,  "  The  Cabinet  Dictionary,  containing 
An  Explanation  of  all  the  Terms  used  in  the  Cabinet, 
Chair,  &  Upholstery  branches,  containing  a  dis- 
play of  useful  pieces  of  furniture,"  illustrated  with 
eighty-eight  copperplate  engravings.  The  illustra- 

1  Cf.  Jeremias  Davis  Reuss'  "Alphabetical  List  of  all  the 
Authors  actually  living  in  Great  Britain  from  the  year  1770-1803" 
(Berlin,  1804). 


142      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

tions  were  very  ingeniously  introduced.  When  such 
words  as  bed,  couch,  sideboard,  table,  came  up  for 
definition  in  their  alphabetical  order  in  the  text, 
designs  for  the  articles  in  question  appeared  on  the 
opposite  page.  In  the  introduction  he  pointed  out 
that  "all  the  designs  are  capable  of  being  finished 
exactly  as  they  appear  in  the  engravings,  for  I  have 
not  figured  away  with  my  pencil  on  a  baseless  fabric 
as  some  have  done  without  consulting  whether  the 
particulars  out  of  the  common  way  were  or  were  not 
workable  by  a  good  mechanic." 

The  "  Dictionary  "  contained  a  supplement  with 
articles  on  drawing  and  painting.  There  was  also  a 
list  appended  of  "most  of  the  Master  Cabinet- 
makers, Upholsterers,  and  Chair  Makers,"  252  in 
number,  who  were  then  living  in  and  about 
London. 

By  this  time  Sheraton  felt  the  sting  of  poverty. 
"  Though  I  am  thus  employed  in  racking  my  in- 
vention to  design  fine  and  pleasing  cabinet-work," 
he  wrote,  "  I  can  be  well  content  to  sit  on  a  wooden- 
bottom  chair  myself,  provided  I  can  but  have  com- 
mon food  and  raiment  wherewith  to  pass  through 
life  in  peace."  In  an  address  to  his  patrons — or 
subscribers — he  informed  them  that  the  expenses 
involved  had  been  so  great,  that  he  had  been  unable 
to  make  any  profit  out  of  his  publications.  Never- 
theless he  worked  on  resolutely  to  the  last.  In  the 
"  Dictionary  "  he  announced  that  he  was  preparing 


THOMAS  SHERATON  143 

an  encyclopaedia  which  was  to  be  completed  in  125 
folio  numbers. 

Next  year  (1804)  he  began  the  publication  of  this 
ambitious  undertaking;  he  died  after  the  issue  of  the 
thirtieth  number,  having  reached  the  letters  CAP. 

"  The  Cabinet-maker,  Upholsterer,  and  General 
Artists'  Encyclopaedia" — so  the  book  was  called — is 
not  merely  technical  as  the  title  would  imply,  but 
a  source  of  general  information.  The  articles  em- 
brace biography,  history,  geography,  even  science. 
Designs  for  furniture  and  for  effects  of  drapery 
were  introduced  in  the  same  manner  as  in  the 
"  Dictionary,"  and  such  subjects  as  astronomy  and 
botany  were  illustrated  by  suitable  plates.  More 
complete  descriptions  of  the  furniture  designs  were 
given  separately. 

In  the  compilation  of  this  book,  Adam  Black, 
the  future  publisher  of  the  "  Encyclopaedia  Britan- 
nica"  and  Macaulay's  colleague  in  Parliament,  gave 
Sheraton  some  slight  assistance. 

In  the  autumn  of  1804,  Black,  who  had  served 
his  apprenticeship  in  Edinburgh  as  a  bookseller, 
came  to  London  in  search  of  work.  He  called  at 
8,  Broad  Street,  found  that  Sheraton  wanted  assist- 
ance, and  agreed  to  write  articles  or  do  anything 
else  that  might  be  required  of  him.  The  following 
is  Black's  description  of  the  Sheraton  household: 
"  He  (Sheraton)  lived  in  an  obscure  street,  his  house, 
half  shop,  half  dwelling-house,  and  looked  himself 


144      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

like  a  worn-out  Methodist  minister,  with  threadbare 
black  coat.  I  took  tea  with  them  one  afternoon. 
There  were  a  cup  and  saucer  for  the  host,  and 
another  for  his  wife,  and  a  little  porringer  for  their 
daughter.  The  wife's  cup  and  saucer  were  given  to 
me,  and  she  had  to  put  up  with  another  little  por- 
ringer. My  host  seemed  a  good  man,  with  some 
talent.  He  had  been  a  cabinet-maker,  was  now 
author  and  publisher,  teacher  of  drawing,  and,  I 
believe,  occasional  preacher." 

Black  remained  with  Sheraton  for  about  a  week, 
writing  articles  and  trying  to  put  the  shop  in  order. 
Not  only  were  all  the  surroundings  exceedingly 
humble,  but  also  dirty  and  ill-kept.  The  assistant  re- 
ceived half  a  guinea  for  his  week's  work.  "  Miserable 
as  the  pay  was,"  he  wrote,  "  I  was  half  ashamed  to 
take  it  from  the  poor  man."  Black  then  added  a 
sketch  of  Sheraton  himself,  who  might  well  be  a 
character  from  the  pages  of  Dickens:  "  He  is  a  man 
of  talents,  and,  I  believe,  of  genuine  piety.  .  .  .  He 
is  a  scholar,  writes  well;  draws,  in  my  opinion, 
masterly;  is  an  author,  bookseller,  stationer,  and 
teacher.  We  may  be  ready  to  ask  how  comes  it  to 
pass  that  a  man  with  such  abilities  and  resources  is 
in  such  a  state?  I  believe  his  abilities  and  resources 
are  his  ruin,  in  this  respecl;,  for  by  attempting  to 
do  everything,  he  does  nothing." 

This  rather  pitiless,  but  no  doubt  accurate  state- 

1  "Memoirs  of  Adam  Black,"  1885,  pp.  31-33. 


THOMAS  SHERATON  145 

ment,  makes  Sheraton's  position  clear  to  us.  Unlike 
Chippendale  he  evidently  had  very  little  business 
capacity.  On  the  other  hand  he  certainly  met  with 
a  great  deal  of  bad  luck.  Not  only  orders  for  de- 
signs, but  his  stationer's  shop  and  his  pupils  would 
have  brought  him  in  a  certain  income.  To  account 
for  his  extreme  poverty  we  must  therefore  infer 
that  he  lost  very  heavily  through  his  publishing 
enterprises. 

The  designs  with  which  he  illustrated  the  "  Ency- 
clopaedia" were  very  inferior  in  style  to  those  of 
his  "  Drawing-book."  Public  taste,  say  some  critics, 
began  to  decline  even  before  the  dawn  of  the  early 
Victorian  era,  and  the  needy  artist  was  obliged  to 
meet  the  demands  of  his  customers  by  forsaking 
his  earlier  ideals.  Others  assert  that  the  exaggera- 
tion— even  ugliness — of  Sheraton's  later  produc- 
tions was  the  cause,  not  the  effect,  of  his  failure. 

In  1805  Sheraton  published  "A  Discourse  on 
the  Character  of  God  as  Love." 

On  22nd  October,  1806,  he  died  of  over- work, 
at  the  age  of  fifty-five.  In  an  obituary  notice,  which 
appeared  the  following  month  in  the  "  Gentleman's 
Magazine,"  the  writer  stated  that  Sheraton  had 
"  left  his  family,  it  is  feared,  in  distressed  circum- 
stances." "  He  was,"  added  his  biographer,  "  a  well- 
disposed  man,  of  an  acute  and  enterprising  disposi- 
tion." He  had  been  for  many  years  "  a  journeyman 
cabinet-maker,  but  since  1793,  supported  a  wife  and 

L 


146     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

two  children  by  authorship."  In  order  to  increase 
the  number  of  subscribers  for  his  "  Encyclopaedia," 
he  had  journeyed  to  Ireland,  and  had  there  obtained 
the  patronage  of  the  Lord-Lieutenant  and  the  Mar- 
chioness of  Donegal.  At  the  time  of  his  death, 
"nearly  1,000  copies  had  been  sold." 

A  series  of  plates  which  Sheraton  had  been  pre- 
paring for  publication  appeared  in  1812  in  a  folio 
volume,  with  the  title  "  Designs  for  Household 
Furniture,  exhibiting  a  variety  of  Elegant  and 
Useful  Patterns  in  the  Cabinet,  Chair,  and  Up- 
holstery Branches  on  eighty-four  plates.  By  the 
late  T.  Sheraton,  Cabinet- Maker."  Most  of  these 
plates  were  reprints  from  the  "  Cabinet  Dictionary" 
and  "  Encyclopaedia." 


CHAPTER  X 

THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL 

THE  cabinet-makers  of  the  Sheraton  school 
still  continued  to  produce  furniture  in  accord 
with  the  Adam  style  of  decoration,  for  in  London 
especially,  where  houses  built  by  Adam  or  his 
followers  had  been  erected  by  the  score,  designers 
of  furniture  were  obliged  to  follow  out  the  great 
principle  oL unity Jn  prnamentatipn  which  marked 
the  wQ.rk  of  the  architects.  During  the  progress  of 
the  nineteenth  century  this  sense  of  unity  quickly 
disappeared,  and  a  single  room  was  made  to  ex- 
emplify a  dozen  different  styles.  But  the  schools  of 
both  Hepplewhite  and  Sheraton  are  sufficient  proof 
that  until  the  end  of  the  eighteenth  century  at  least, 
the  same  idea  or  cast  of  thought  was  reproduced  in 
the  furniture  and  ornamentation  of  every  room. 
Thus  style  in  those  days  acquired  an  authority 
and  dignity  which  would  have  been  impossible  to 
mere  isolated  ideas,  and  decorative  art  attained  the 
ideal  which  Ruskin  claimed  for  it,  "being  fitted  for 
a  fixed  place,  and  in  that  place  related,  either  in 
subordination  or  in  command  to  the  effect  of  other 

'47 


148     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

pieces   of  art  ...  forming   part   of  a  great   and 
harmonious  whole." 

Adam  classicism  underlay  much  of  Sheraton's 
ornamentation,  yet  the  influence  of  the  classic 
movement  on  the  other  side  of  the  Channel  was 
hardly  less  perceptible.  Louis-Seize  models  fur- 
nished the  design  for  many  of  his  outlines,  and  when 
a  few  years  later  the  Empire  types  began  to  change 
the  trend  of  French  decorative  art,  Sheraton,  with 
very  poor  success,  still  continued  to  follow  the 
French  fashions. 

His  earlier  work,  however,  was  quite  free  from 
fantastic  conceits,  and  was  characterized  by  severe 
lines  and  subdued  ornament.  Like  his  predecessors, 
he  borrowed  and  copied  largely,  but  his  work  was 
none  the  less  individual  and  distinctive.  Sheraton 
invented  quite  a  number  of  new  types  of  furniture, 
particularly  those  of  a  mechanical  nature.  His 
influence  was  greatly  felt  throughout  the  country, 
and  a  quantity  of  refined  and  quiet  work  was  the 
result. 

Sheraton's  best  furniture  was  the  very  embodi- 
ment of  elegance;  severe  in  form,  yet  always  light, 
graceful,  and  perfectly  balanced.  Decorative  details 
were  introduced  to  emphasize  the  purely  archi- 
tectural outlines,  or  were  employed  to  enrich  a  per- 
fectly finished  piece,  but  ornamentation  was  never 
used  as  a  fundamental  part  of  the  construction. 
Vertical  lines  contrasted  with  curved  surfaces; 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  149 

graceful  sweeps  afforded  a  varying  play  of  light  and 
shade;  and  fine  inlay,  painted  patterns,  and  some- 
times a  little  delicate  carving  in  low  relief,  added 
variety  and  charm  to  the  whole. 

The  speciality  of  this  school  was  the  employ- 
ment of  satin-wood  veneers.  Certainly  the  greater 
part  of  English  eighteenth-century  work  carried 
out  in  satin-wood  can  be  classified  as  belonging  to 
the  Sheraton  period.  In  his  "Dictionary"  (1803), 
Sheraton,  describing  the  different  kinds  of  "  Sattin- 
wood"  employed  by  cabinet-makers,  stated  that  this 
timber  had  "been  in  requisition  above  twenty  years." 
The  East  India  wood  was  hard  in  texture,  and  of 
small,  rich  figure,  the  finest  specimens  being  straw- 
coloured.  West  Indian  wood  was  bolder  in  figure, 
less  hard  and  sometimes  of  a  very  pale  shade;  the 
logs,  however,  were  often  wider  than  those  from 
the  East  Indies,  and  thus  proved  more  generally 
useful. 

Hair-wood  was  a  great  favourite  for  the  manu- 
facture of  small  ornamental  tables.  For  inlay,  the 
same  woods  were  employed  as  those  already  named 
under  the  Hepplewhite  period,  and,  in  addition, 
ebony,  mahogany,  and  various  light  woods  stained 
green,  yellow,  and  brown. 

The  ornamental  details  consisted  mainly  of 
husks,  rosettes,  fans,  urns,  floral  wreaths,  festoons, 
acanthus  leaves,  and  classical  figures.  In  general  it 
may  be  said  that  plentiful  decoration,  though  of  a 


150     ENGLISH  FURNITURE   DESIGNERS 

chaste  and  subdued  nature,  vertical  lines,  lightness 
of  colour,  and  delicacy  of  workmanship,  are  the  chief 
distinguishing  characteristics  of  this  school. 

In  common  with  other  cabinet-makers  of  his 
day,  Sheraton  published  designs  for  window  cornices 
and  drapery  based  mainly  on  French  models.  He 
gave  also  a  number  of  Greek  and  Roman  mouldings 
and  beautiful  plaques  in  the  classical  style  for 
painted  panels  or  table-tops. 

After  about  1800,  Sheraton's  work  became  more 
and  more  an  exaggerated  imitation  of  the  Empire, 
and  was  often  cumbrous,  clumsy,  and  grotesque. 
Realistic  representations  of  animal  forms,  carved 
heads  and  feet  of  griffins,  sphinxes,  lions,  profuse 
brass  inlay,  and  heavy  mountings  were  everywhere 
observable.  Thus  the  very  master  whose  watch- 
words had  been  grace  and  delicacy  ushered  in  the 
dawn  of  an  era  in  which  elegance  and  good  taste 
were  almost  unknown. 


CHAIRS 

The  chairs  were  of  satin-wood  or  mahogany, 
light  and  graceful  in  design  and  perfectly  propor- 
tioned. The  framework  of  the  back  was  usually 
rectangular,  though  the  top  rail  often  had  a  slight 
curve.  The  legs  and  side  uprights  appeared  to  form 
a  single  line,  and  in  most  examples  a  cross-bar 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  151 

supported  the  uprights  a  few  inches  above  the 
seat.  The  splats  varied  greatly :  a  lyre,  borrowed 
from  Robert  Adam;  a  vase  with  flowers;  carved 
pillars  with  capitals  and  bases;  rails,  balusters, 
curved  bars,  and  cross  bars,  and  occasionally  shield 
and  wheel  backs  similar  to  those  of  Hepplewhite. 
In  the  later  chairs  the  top  rail  of  the  back  was  broad 
and  hollowed,  rolling  slightly  backwards.  The 
upholstery  was  nailed  to  the  framework — the  old 
drop-seat  having  gone  quite  out  of  fashion.  The 
legs,  whether  square  or  round,  were  fluted,  turned, 
or  twisted,  and  always  tapered.  They  ended  in  a 
"therm"  foot,  and  often  had  brass  casters;  under- 
framing  was  rarely  employed.  The  ornamentation 
of  back,  legs,  and  seat-frame,  consisted  of  carving, 
cross-fluting,  reeding,  inlay,  sunk  panels,  and  hand- 
paintings.  A  feature  often  to  be  observed  was  the 
introduction  of  an  acanthus  leaf  in  the  slenderest 
parts  of  the  arms  or  legs.  Wedgwood  medallions 
were  sometimes  added  to  the  other  decorations,  but 
the  ornamentation,  though  elaborate,  was  carried 
out  with  such  care  and  judgement,  that  it  never 
seems  excessive. 

The  chair  coverings  which  Sheraton  considered 
most  suitable  for  parlour  chairs  were  "printed  silks" 
or  "printed  chintzes." 

Stuffed  chairs  and  couches  were  borrowed  largely 
from  Louis-Seize  types. 

The  chair  of  the  Sheraton  school,  illustration 


152     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

XLII,  is  in  the  possession  of  Mr.  Dan.  Gibson.  It 
is  one  of  a  set  of  seven  single  and  two  armchairs. 
The  material  is  mahogany,  with  small  carved  pateras 
in  the  corners,  swags  on  the  top  rail,  and  flowers 
and  husks  on  the  splat.  The  receding  mouldings 
of  varying  sizes,  and  the  whole  workmanship  show 
perfect  finish  and  care. 

The  mahogany  Sheraton  chair,  group  LI  1 1,  has 
a  splat  in  the  form  of  three  bars  finely  moulded  and 
carved.  The  upper  portion  of  each  bar  consists  of 
a  cluster  of  leaves,  and  the  bases  have  similar  leaves 
inverted.  The  middle  bar  is  also  ornamented  with 
a  design  of  husks,  while  the  bars  on  either  side  are 
fluted.  The  legs  are  plain  and  tapering,  and  have  a 
square,  tapering  foot. 

In  figure  XLVI  is  a  Sheraton  chair  (now  in  the 
possession  of  Mr.  Burghard)  which  originally  came 
from  George  Ill's  palace.  It  is  of  painted  satin- 
wood,  with  a  cane  seat. 


BOOKCASES 

Bookcases  were  of  oak  or  mahogany,  and  were 
veneered  either  with  mahogany  or  satin-wood;  oc- 
casionally the  carcass  was  also  of  satin-wood.  In  the 
shape  of  the  pediment  there  was  much  variety  of 
treatment.  Although  a  very  graceful  swan-necked 
pediment  was  chiefly  characteristic  of  this  school, 


Fig.  XLII. 


SHERATON  CHAIR. 


Fig.  XLVI.  SHERATON  KIDNEY  TABLE  AND  CHAIR. 

To  face  page  152. 


Fig.  XLIII. 

To  face  page  152. 


SHERATON  BOOKCASE. 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  153 

broken  and  curved  pediments,  as  well  as  plain  oval 
cornices  with  vase-shaped  terminals  were  also  con- 
stantly produced.  The  panels  of  glass — if  the  cup- 
boards had  glass  doors — were  edged  with  fine  lines 
of  moulding,  which  often  assumed  the  form  of  an 
urn.  In  other  examples  the  mouldings  were  drawn 
round  a  central  panel  of  painted  glass  or  wood. 
Lattice  doors,  or,  as  Sheraton  called  them,  "wire- 
worked"  doors,  with  "  green,  white,  or  pink  silk, 
fluted  behind,"  were  very  fashionable,  especially,  as 
Sheraton  wrote,  when  the  cupboards  had  "  a  part  of 
their  ornaments  gilded."  Inlaid  lines,  bands,  and 
ornaments  were  the  most  usual  decorations.  Some- 
times a  little  carving  was  also  introduced. 

The  bookcase  in  illustration  XLIII,  is  the  pro- 
perty of  Mr.  James  Ivory.  Apart  from  its  fine  propor- 
tions and  excellent  workmanship,  this  piece  is  par- 
ticularly interesting,  since  the  initials  of  the  maker, 
Thomas  Sheraton  himself,  are  cut  in  the  wood. 
Numerous  as  were  the  masterpieces  produced  by 
eighteenth-century  cabinet-makers,  it  was  only  in 
the  rarest  instances  that  the  craftsmen  inscribed 
their  names  upon  their  productions.  Occasionally 
a  dealer  has  come  upon  the  "  address  label  "  of  some 
little-known  maker  lying  under  the  drawer  of  a 
cabinet,  but  only  three  or  four  cases  are  known  in 
which  a  piece  of  furniture  has  been  found  marked 
with  the  letters  "T.  C." — for  Thomas  Chippen- 
dale, or,  as  in  the  bookcase  here  depicted,  "T.  S." 


154     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

for  Thomas  Sheraton.  The  initials  in  this  ex- 
ample are  engraved  on  the  inside  of  one  of  the 
drawers. 

The  mahogany  bookcase  in  illustration  XLIV, 
now  owned  by  Mr.  J.  E.  Schunck,  came  from  a 
country  seat  in  Yorkshire,  where  it  had  remained 
since  the  eighteenth  century.  It  is  of  very  large 
size,  consisting  of  a  centre  and  two  side  wings  very 
finely  proportioned.  The  middle  part  is  surmounted 
by  an  elegant  swan-necked  pediment  and  a  vase; 
chains  of  husks  and  leaves  are  inlaid  in  satin-wood 
round  the  frieze.  The  wings  are  ornamented  by 
carving  in  low  relief. 

SIDEBOARDS 

Sideboards  were  plentifully  provided  with  cup- 
boards and  drawers.  The  cupboards  which  reached 
to  the  ground  still  took  the  form  of  pedestals  sur- 
mounted by  vases,  but  these  were  often  supple- 
mented by  short  cellarette  cupboards  and  drawers, 
extending  only  part-way  to  the  floor.  A  rail,  with 
fine  brass  scrollwork,  often  with  candelabra  attached, 
was  used  to  support  the  plate,  and  added  greatly 
to  the  decorative  appearance  of  the  piece.  The  front 
was  straight,  serpentine,  or  oval,  and,  if  very  long, 
frequently  had  a  deep  recess  in  the  middle.  Hollow- 
front  sideboards  were  a  speciality  of  Sheraton's,  and 
were  intended  to  enable  the  butler  to  reach  across, 


Fig.  XLIV. 

To  face  page  154. 


SHERATON  BOOKCASE. 


o 
^ 


Z 

O 

< 

a; 
u 
I 
on 


r 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  155 

and  therefore  to  serve  more  easily.  Sheraton  also 
pointed  out  other  advantages:  a  hollowed  front  occu- 
pied less  space  than  a  straight  one,  and  the  curve 
took  away  from  the  appearance  of  undue  length. 

The  legs  were  long,  slender,  and  tapering,  and, 
like  the  chair  legs,  were  often  set  into  a  rosette  at 
the  top.  This  device,  however,  does  not  belong  ex- 
clusively to  the  Sheraton  school. 

The  sideboard  in  illustration  XLV,  the  property 
of  Mr.  Sidney  Letts,  is  of  inlaid  satin-wood,  with 
large  oval  panels  on  the  side  cupboards ;  and  with 
swags,  a  vase  and  various  scrolls  on  the  middle 
portion.  The  inlaid  taper  legs  end  in  a  "  therm  " 
foot. 

WRITING-DESKS 

Many  of  the  writing-desks  and  tables  had  ele- 
gantly carved  backs,  in  order  that  the  piece  might 
look  equally  well  in  any  part  of  the  room.  Of  such 
ornamental  tables  the  most  decorative  as  well  as  the 
most  original  was  that  known  as  the  "  kidney-" 
shaped  table,  used  for  a  writing-table  or  a  lady's 
work-table.  It  generally  had  a  double  set  of  drawers 
with  a  knee-hole  between,  or  else  a  'single  row  of 
drawers  and  an  undershelf. 

The  kidney  table  in  illustration  XLVI,  the  pro- 
perty of  Mr.  Burghard,  is  of  mahogany,  and  the  top 
is  inlaid  with  a  band  of  rosewood  and  a  line  of  satin- 


156      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

wood.  The  back  is  surrounded  by  a  brass  rim. 
Noticeable  are  the  curiously  carved  handles  and  the 
wheel  casters. 

There  were  also  writing-tables  with  an  adjust- 
able sliding  screen  to  protect  the  face  of  the  writer 
from  the  heat  of  the  fire;  and  secretary  writing- 
tables  with  bookcase  tops,  shelves  for  china,  or  an 
ornamental  wall  piece. 

A  beautiful  satin-wood  cabinet  writing-desk, 
illustration  XLVII,  is  the  property  of  Mr.  Sidney 
Letts.  The  whole  piece  is  inlaid  with  dark  woods 
in  a  design  of  vases,  foliage,  scrolls,  and  has  a  large 
oval  subject-picture  in  the  centre.  The  scroll  rail, 
the  carved  head  at  the  top,  the  ornaments  at  the 
angles,  and  all  the  handles  are  of  brass.  In  the 
lower  portion  are  two  side  cupboards  and  three  long 
drawers;  above  these  are  two  doors  which  slide 
back  into  a  recess  and  disclose  a  desk  fitted  up  for 
writing  purposes.  By  means  of  some  ingenious 
mechanism  the  desk-shelf,  together  with  its  accom- 
panying small  drawers  and  pigeon-holes,  can  be 
drawn  forward  when  required  for  use. 

A  similar  piece — with  the  exception  of  the  orna- 
mental top — was  depicted  in  Sheraton's  "  Cabinet 
Dictionary."  It  was  called  a  "  Gentleman's  Sec- 
retary." 

Illustration  XLVII  I  shows  another  Sheraton 
cabinet  writing-table.  It  is  veneered  with  satin- 
wood  and  charmingly  painted  on  both  front  and 


Fig.  XLVII. 

To  face  page  156. 


SHERATON  WRITING  DESK. 


Fig.  XLVIII.  PAINTED  CABINET  WRITING  TABLE. 

To  face  page  156. 


Fig  XLIX.  INLAID  WRITING  CABINET. 

To  face  page  156 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  157 

sides  with  classical  designs.  The  roll-top  of  the  desk 
folds  back  and  discloses  a  number  of  partitions  and 
other  interior  fittings.  There  is  besides  a  draw-shelf 
which  can  be  used  as  a  writing-table,  and  below  this 
again  are  two  drawers.  The  upper  part  or  cabinet 
has  glazed  and  finely  moulded  doors  inclosing 
shelves  for  the  display  of  china. 

The  cabinet,  illustration  XLIX,  is  of  satin-wood 
inlaid  with  mahogany.  It  has  a  swan-necked  pedi- 
ment, fluted  corners — both  in  the  upper  and  lower 
portions — and  fluted  legs,  springing  from  a  rosette. 
The  stretchers  between  the  legs  support  the  typical 
Sheraton  undershelf.  The  spandrils,  or  triangular 
corners  around  the  glass,  are  decorated  with  carved 
foliage  in  low  relief.  (These  two  cabinets,  XLVIII 
and  XLIX,  belong  to  Mr.  James  Orrock.) 

OTHER  TABLES 

In  designs  for  ornamental  table-tops,  Sheraton 
displayed  his  utmost  skill;  radiating  ornaments, 
floral  wreaths,  scrolls,  and  arabesques  were  the  most 
usual  subjects  either  for  inlay  or  painting.  Many 
Sheraton  tables,  as  well  as  cabinets  and  other  pieces, 
had  an  undershelf  supported  by  side  braces.  As  a 
shelf  of  this  kind  was  not  represented  in  Hepple- 
white's  book,  it  may  be  regarded  as  especially  char- 
acteristic of  the  later  master. 

The  Sheraton  Pembroke  table  in  group  LI  1 1, 


158      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

owned  by  Mr.  Alfred  Davis,  is  of  mahogany  veneered 
with  hair-wood  of  beautiful  figure.  It  is  banded  and 
lined  with  satin-wood,  and  also  with  various  other 
woods  stained  red  and  green.  The  oval  plaques  in 
the  top,  the  sides,  and  the  two  flaps,  are  carried  out 
in  amboyna-wood.  The  size  of  this  graceful  little 
table,  when  open,  is  2  ft.  8  in.  by  2  ft.  The  brass 
casters  which  give  such  a  delicate  finish  to  the 
tapering  legs  are  original. 

Very  typical  of  the  period  are  the  three  tea 
caddies.  That  on  the  left  is  in  ivory  with  banding 
and  stringing  of  whalebone  and  a  silver  monogram 
plate.  The  caddy  on  the  right  is  made  of  hair-wood, 
banded  with  king-wood,  lined  with  satin-wood,  and 
has  a  festoon  of  stained  holly  inlaid  in  the  front. 
The  miniature  octagonal  caddy  placed  in  the  middle 
of  the  table  measures  only  3!  in.  by  2|  in.,  depth, 
i£  in.  It  is  so  small  and  dainty  that,  except  for  the 
fact  of  its  lead  lining,  one  might  suppose  it  to  have 
been  a  snuff-box.  The  wood  is  mahogany,  veneered 
with  satin-wood,  inlaid  with  rare  woods  and  deli- 
cately painted  on  every  part.  The  top  opens  by 
means  of  a  double  spring. 

WORK-TABLES 

Ladies  work-tables,  called  by  Sheraton  "  pouch 
tables,"  with  a  bag  or  pouch  of  drawn  silk,  were  an 
important  feature  of  a  Sheraton  room.  They  were 


Fig.  L. 


'OUCH  TABLE. 


Fig.  LI. 

To  face  page  1 59. 


DRINKING  TABLE. 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  159 

often  fitted  with  drawers  and  a  sliding  desk,  which 
drew  forward  from  beneath  the  table-top.  A  satin- 
wood  pouch  table  of  this  kind  is  shown  in  illustra- 
tion L.  This  dainty  piece  is  in  the  possession  of 
Mr.  Stenson  Webb. 

Group  LIV  also  depicts  a  Sheraton  work-table 
of  a  different  shape.  It  is  mahogany,  inlaid  with 
satin  and  tulip  woods,  and  is  most  elegant,  both  in 
proportion  and  design. 

DINING-TABLES 

At  the  beginning  of  the  Sheraton  period  the 
most  common  form  of  dining-table  seems  to  have 
been  the  pillar  and  claw  shape.  A  central  leg  (the 
so-called  pillar)  with  projecting  feet  (the  claws),  was 
fixed  to  a  block,  and  upon  this  the  table-top  was 
hinged.  This  principle  was  very  generally  adopted 
on  the  Continent  during  the  seventeenth  century;  in 
England,  however,  until  quite  the  last  part  of  the 
eighteenth  century,  only  small  ornamental  tables 
were  made  according  to  this  pattern. 

Sheraton  tables  usually  had  four  claws  to  each 
pillar,  and  brass  casters;  "A  loose  flap  fixed  by 
means  of  iron  straps  and  buttons  " 1  was  placed  be- 
tween the  separate  tables  when  they  were  required 
to  be  joined  together.  At  the  beginning  of  the  nine- 
teenth century  a  great  change  was  brought  about 

1  Cf.  Sheraton's  "  Diftionary." 


i6o     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

by  the  invention  of  the  "telescopic"  dining-table. 
Three  or  four  patents  were  taken  out  for  tables  to 
be  extended  by  means  of  slides  moving  in  grooved 
channels.  This  system,  which  obviated  the  necessity 
for  placing  several  small  tables  together,  quickly  be- 
came popular.  The  best  patent  was  that  of  Richard 
Gillow  (1800),  and  his  invention — with  but  slight 
improvements — is  the  one  universally  employed  at 
the  present  day. 

The  mahogany  drinking-table,  illustration  LI, 
is  in  the  possession  of  Mr.  Burghard.  It  is  in  the 
shape  of  a  horseshoe,  and  in  the  old  days  was 
placed  in  front  of  the  fire,  the  curtain  at  the  back 
serving  to  screen  off  the  heat  and  glare  of  the  flames 
from  the  festive  group  who  sat  around  the  table. 
At  ordinary  times  an  oval  leaf  fitted  into  and  covered 
the  middle  of  the  table ;  but  when  the  leaf  was  taken 
out,  the  net  and  movable  bottle-holders  (seen  in  the 
illustration)  were  disclosed.  These  sliding  wooden 
rests  were  pushed  from  hand  to  hand  and  the  net 
held  the  empty  bottles  and  overturned  glasses.  The 
legs  are  fixed  to  the  table  by  means  of  a  brass  screw; 
the  brass  curtain-rod  and  pillars,  as  well  as  the  brass 
casters,  are  original. 


CABINETS 

The  models  of  many  Sheraton  cabinets  and  com- 
modes   so   closely    resembled   those    produced   in 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  161 

France  during  the  Louis-Seize  period,  that  the 
English  pieces  can  only  be  distinguished  from  the 
French  by  a  careful  inspection  of  the  decorative 
details.  A  certain  number,  however,  can  be  traced 
more  directly  to  Adam's  influence,  while  the  later 
examples  were  Sheraton-Empire. 

The  richest  and  most  effective  cabinets  were  in- 
laid. The  designs,  either  for  inlay  or  hand-painting, 
represented  fruit  and  flowers,  subject-pictures  based 
on  the  work  of  Angelica  Kauffmann,  Cipriani,  etc., 
landscapes,  and  Watteau-like  figures. 

It  is  often  said  that  Sheraton  furniture  was 
painted  by  Angelica  Kauffmann.  But  the  fact  that 
this  artist  left  England  for  Italy  with  her  husband, 
Zucchi,  in  1781,  proves  conclusively  that  all  such 
paintings  were  executed  not  by  Angelica  herself  but 
by  other  artists  in  imitation  of  her  style. 

A  favourite  shape  for  ornamental  cabinets  was 
the  oval-convex  front,  one  of  which,  from  the  palace 
of  George  III,  is  shown  in  illustration  LVII. 
The  satin-wood  is  finely  veined,  and  is  inlaid  with 
oval  panels  representing  a  piping  nymph,  cupid, 
vases,  and  foliage,  in  coloured  woods.  The  top  is 
inlaid  with  a  vase  in  the  centre,  and  the  Royal 
Cipher,  G.  R.,  for  Georgius  Rex,  in  oval  panels  on 
either  side.  The  fluted  corners  and  ribbon  orna- 
ments are  of  mahogany ;  the  width  is  74  inches.  This 
cabinet  was  lately  the  property  of  Mr.  James  Orrock.1 

1  Sold  at  Christie's,  June,  1904,  for  470  guineas. 
M 


162     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

FIRESCREENS 

Sheraton  designed  "  horse  "  and  "  pole  "  fire- 
screens as  well  as  more  decorative  pieces.  His  lyre- 
shaped  horse-screens  were  very  effective,  also  the 
pole-screens  with  a  small  under-shelf  between  the 
tripod  claws.  There  were  besides  folding  screens 
and  sliding  screens. 

BEDROOM  FURNITURE 

Sheraton  bedroom  furniture  was  extremely  de- 
corative and  embraced  many  beautiful  examples  of 
painted  and  inlaid  satin-wood.  A  single  piece 
was  often  adaptable  to  a  number  of  different  uses: 
a  washstand,  when  closed,  would  appear  as  an 
ornamental  cabinet;  similarly  the  looking-glasses 
attached  to  a  lady's  dressing-table  could  be  folded 
inwards,  leaving  only  painted  panels  in  their  place. 
The  satin-wood  dressing-table  shown  in  illustra- 
tion LI  I,  the  property  of  Mr.  Letts,  is  delicately 
ornamented  with  marquetry  in  various  coloured 
woods.  The  top  is  elaborately  fitted  with  partitions 
and  recesses  to  hold  the  various  articles  of  a  lady's 
toilet.  In  the  centre  is  a  mirror  which  is  lifted  up 
when  in  use  and  made  to  rest  on  sliding  supports. 
In  the  lower  part  of  the  toilet-table  are  cupboards 
and  drawers. 


Fis-  LI1-  DRESSING  TABLE,  SHERATON. 

To  face  page   162. 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  163 


CLOCKS 

The  Adam,  Hepplewhite,  and  Sheraton  schools 
produced  a  considerable  change  in  the  treatment  of 
clocks.  The  square  form  of  dial-case  gradually 
changed  to  the  circular,  that  is  to  say,  the  wooden 
and  metal  cases,  were  made  to  fit  closely  around  the 
clock-face,  and  the  spandrils  at  the  corners,  which 
had  been  one  of  the  chief  decorative  elements  in  the 
early  clocks,  were  now  almost  invariably  omitted. 
The  dial  itself  was  generally  plain  white  enamel  or 
silver,  and  the  hours  were  engraved  upon  it  in 
Roman  numerals;  it  was  entirely  without  orna- 
ment, and  even  the  maker's  name  rarely  appeared. 
But  these  simple  dials  were  set  in  a  framework 
superb  in  outline,  proportion,  and  workmanship. 
The  hood,  which  had  hitherto  afforded  great  scope 
for  diversity  of  ideas,  was  very  much  simplified. 
Broken  pediments,  scrolls,  and  complicated  curves 
gave  place  to  severer  and  more  restrained  forms. 
The  wood  used  was  oak,  with  a  mahogany  or  satin- 
wood  veneer.  Inlay  or  banding  with  different  woods 
afforded  an  opportunity  for  presenting  delicate  con- 
trasts of  colour.  Painted  ornamentation  was  also 
by  no  means  uncommon,  the  clock  doors  being  often 
decorated  with  painted  figure  subjects.  Sheraton 
clocks  occasionally  had  side  wings,  or  ornamental 
projections  on  either  side  of  the  clock-waist.  In  the 


164     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

earliest  Queen  Anne  clocks  the  sides  had  sometimes 
been  extended  to  admit  of  the  swing  of  the  pendulum, 
but  in  Sheraton  clocks  the  addition  was  purely  an 
ornamental  one. 

The  hoods  of  bracket  clocks  were  also  made  with 
an  oval-shaped  arch,  ending  on  either  side  with  a 
short  horizontal  line.  Quite  at  the  close  of  the  cen- 
tury the  balloon,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes  called,  the 
banjo-shaped  clock,  came  into  fashion.  It  had  a 
plain  round  dial-case  and  a  short  curved  projec- 
tion below;  it  was  usually  made  to  hang  on  the 
wall. 

The  clock,  illustration  LI  1 1  (height  7  ft.  6  in.),  is 
owned  by  Mr.  Alfred  Davis.  In  its  shape,  its  beauti- 
ful proportions,  in  the  arrangement  of  the  wood  en- 
circling the  face,  the  tapering  waist,  and  spreading 
base,  it  is  typical  of  the  best  work  of  the  Sheraton 
school.  The  dial-frame  narrows  below ;  the  clock- 
face  itself  has  black  numerals  painted  on  a  silver 
ground.  The  arched  canopy  is  supported  by  fluted 
and  "cabled"  Corinthian  columns,  of  which  the 
cabling  is  in  satin-wood  and  the  capitals  and  bases 
in  brass.  The  whole  case  is  oak,  veneered  with 
deep  red  Spanish  mahogany  of  very  fine  figure. 
The  finials  are  of  brass;  and  a  circular  fan  above 
the  door,  chains  of  husks  at  the  angles,  and  similar 
enrichments  on  different  parts  of  the  hood  are  inlaid 
in  satin-wood.  The  subdued  ornamentation  imparts 
a  pleasing  effedl  thoroughly  in  keeping  with  the 


Fig,  LIII.  SHERATON  CLOCK,  TABLE  AND  CHAIR. 

To  face  page  164. 


THE  SHERATON  SCHOOL  165 

severity  of  treatment  noticeable  in  all  the  best  Eng- 
lish grandfather  clock-cases  of  the  eighteenth  cen- 
tury. The  clock  bears  the  name  of  the  maker,  J. 
Brooks,  London. 


CHAPTER  XI 

LACQUER-WARE 

DURING  the  seventeenth  century  a  quantity 
of  lacquered  screens  and  cabinets  from  China 
and  Further  India  were  imported  into  Holland, 
France,  and  England.  Japanese  lacquer  was  also 
well  known,  although  after  1638  Europe  was  denied 
all  direct  commerce  with  Japan  except  through  the 
medium  of  the  small  Dutch  factory  on  the  island 
of  Deshinia,  near  Nagasaki.  So  great  was  the  de- 
mand for  Oriental  lacquered  panels,  that  the  large 
pieces  were  often  broken  up  in  order  that  they  might 
furnish  decorations  for  articles  of  home  manufacture. 
In  "  A  Treatise  of  Japaning  and  Varnishing"  (folio, 
1688)  by  John  Stalker  of  the  Golden  Ball,  St. 
James's  Market,  London,  and  George  Parker  of 
Oxford,  the  authors  quaintly  refer  to  "  some  who 
have  made  new  Cabinets  out  of  old  Skreens.  And 
from  that  large  old  piece,  by  the  help  of  a  Joyner, 
make  little  ones,  such  as  Stands  or  Tables, — but 
never  consider  the  situation  of  their  figures ;  so  that 
in  these  things  so  torn  and  hacked  to  joint  a  new 
fancie,  you  may  observe  the  finest  hodgpodg  and 

1 66 


LACQUER-WARE  167 

medley  of  Men  and  Trees  turned  topsie  turvie,  and 
instead  of  marching  by  Land  you  shall  see  them 
taking  journeys  through  the  Air,  as  if  they  had 
found  out  Doctor  Wilkinson's  [sic]  way  of  travelling 
to  the  Moon;1  others  they  have  placed  in  such  order 
by  their  ignorance  as  if  they  were  angling  for  Dol- 
phins in  a  Wood,  or  pursuing  the  Stag  and  Chasing 
the  Boar  in  the  middle  of  the  Ocean." 

It  is  generally  supposed  that  a  certain  number  of 
clocks  and  other  pieces  of  furniture  were  sent  out 
on  the  tea  ships  of  the  East  India  Company  to  be 
lacquered  in  China,  although  this  procedure  would 
necessarily  have  been  a  lengthy  and  a  very  costly  one. 
The  sea  voyage  in  sailing  vessels  round  the  Cape, 
the  delay  in  China,  and  the  return  journey  must 
have  occupied  so  long  a  time  that  years  would 
often  have  passed  before  such  a  piece  could  be  com- 
pleted. It  is  indeed  questionable  whether  there  are 
in  existence  any  specimens  of  English  furniture 
which  can  be  proved  to  have  been  lacquered  in  the 
East. 

The  first  imitation  of  Oriental  japanning  has 
been  attributed  to  a  Dutchman  named  Huygens, 
in  the  seventeenth  century.  But  the  English, 
French,  Italians,  and  Americans,  speedily  adopted 

1  Our  authors  meant  to  refer  to  John  Wilkins,  Bishop  of  Chester, 
who  to  the  third  edition  (1640)  of  his  "  Discovery  of  a  World  in  the 
Moone  "  added  a  "  Discourse  concerning  the  Possibility  of  a  Pass- 
age thither." 


168     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

similar  methods.    The  first  use  of  lacquer  varnish 
in  this  country  was  by  the  author  of  "  The  present 
state  of  England"  (1683,  Part  iii,  p.  93) l  traced  to 
the    year    1633.    "That  Lacquer  Varnish    (which 
imitating  the  gold  color  has  saved  much  cost  form- 
erly bestowed  on  the  gilding  of  Coaches)  was  in  this 
year  1633  first  brought  into  use  in  England  by  the 
ingenious  Mr.  Evelyn  of  Says  Court  nearDeptford." 
Stalker  and  Parker  in  an  "Epistle  to  the  Reader 
and  Practitioner  "  prefixed  to  their  delightful  folio 
already  cited,  stated  that  as  trade  in  lacquer  ware 
with  Japan  was  prohibited,  both  the  "  English  and 
Frenchmen  have  endeavoured  to  imitate  them.  .  .  . 
As  for  our  Undertakers  in  this  kind  they  are  very 
numerous  and  their  works  are  different;  some  of 
them  have  more  confidence  than  skill  and  ingenuity, 
and  without  modesty  or  a  blush  impose  upon  the 
gentry  such  Stuff  and  Trash  for  Japan-work  that 
whether  tis  a  greater  scandal  to  the  Name  or  Arti- 
ficer,  I  cannot  determin.    Might  we  advise  such 
foolish  pretenders,  their  time  would  be  better  im- 
ployed  in  dawbing  Whistles  and  Puppets  for  the 
Toy-Shops  to  please  Children  than  contriving  Or- 
naments for  a  Room  of  State."    Many  of  these  un- 
skilled japanners,  it  seems,  professed  to  teach  the 
art  to  young  ladies,  greatly  to  the  indignation  of 
Messrs.  Stalker  and  Parker.    They  therefore  offered 

1  Quoted  by  Adam  Anderson  in  "  Historical  and  Chronological 
Origin  of  Commerce"  (1764),  vol.  ii,  p.  48. 


LACQUER-WARE  169 

to  show  amateurs  how  the  work  should  be  done. 
"  If  any  Gentlemen  or  Ladies  having  met  with  dis- 
appointments in  some  of  the  Receipts  .  .  .  they 
may  for  their  satisfaction  (if  it  stands  with  their 
convenience)  see  them  tried  by  the  Author  according 
to  the  very  Rules  set  down." 

From  time  to  time  tradesmen  advertised  their 
japanned  work  in  the  "  London  Gazette."  Thus  in 
the  number  January  i6th-2Oth,  1689:  "At  Tho. 
Hulbeart  at  The  Ship  and  Anchor  over  against 
Gun-Yard  in  Hounditch  London,  several  sorts  of 
screwtores,  Tables  Stands  and  Looking-Glasses  of 
Japan  and  other  work " ;  while  a  certain  John 
Gumley  in  the  number  for  March  ist-5th,  1693, 
clearly  defined  his  wares  as  "  Japan  Cabinets  Indian 
and  English."  Such  advertisements  were  common 
during  the  following  century. 

Another  seventeenth-century  book  on  the  subject 
of  English  lacquer  was  published  in  London  in 
1697,  with  the  title,  "Art's  Master-piece,  or  A 
Companion  for  the  Ingenious  of  either  Sex.  By 
C.  K."  It  contained,  with  many  other  notable  things, 
"The  newest  Experiment  in  Japaning,  to  immitate 
the  Indian  way,  Plain  and  in  Speckles,  Rock-work, 
Figures,  &c."  This  tiny  booklet  attained  the  dignity 
of  five  editions.  The  author  gave  a  number  of  re- 
cipes for  lacquering  woods  and  metals,  and  regarded 
the  art  as  a  most  useful  accomplishment  by  means 
of  which  any  who  followed  his  directions  could 


1 70      ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

decorate  their  tables,  chests  of  drawers,  or  mirrors 
for  themselves. 

J.  Peele,  in  1735,  issued:  "A  new  and  curious 
method  of  Japanning  upon  glass,  wood  or  metal 
from  the  M.S.  of  Mr.  Boyle,"  dedicated  to  Lady 
Walpole,  "distinguished  for  your  excellent  perform- 
ance in  painting,  japanning  and  other  curious  arts." 
Again,  the  intention  was  merely  to  describe  a  mode 
of  decorative  painting  for  home  use,  and  we  seek  in 
vain  in  these  pages  for  information  on  lacquer-work 
considered  as  a  trade. 

The  few  encyclopaedias  which  appeared  in  the 
first  part  of  the  eighteenth  century  such  as  Ephraim 
Chambers'  "Cyclopaedia"  (1728,  second  edition, 
1738),  and  the  "  Didtionarium  Polygraphicum,  or 
whole  body  of  Arts  "  (1735),  contained  long  treatises 
on  various  methods  of  japanning.  The  article  in 
Chambers'  book  was  taken  from  a  work  by  D.  Rust, 
volume  I  (book  not  traceable),  but  an  additional 
note  explained  that,  "  Parker  gives  ampler  and 
better  instructions." 

By  the  middle  of  the  century — perhaps  earlier — 
Birmingham,  which  had  long  been  the  chief  centre 
of  metal -japanning,  became  famous  for  similar 
work  in  wood,  and  later  in  papier-madid  also.  The 
"  Modern  Dictionary  of  Arts  and  Sciences  "  (1774) 
pointed  out  that  the  Birmingham  wood-lacquer  was 
greatly  superior  to  the  French,  owing  to  the  omis- 
sion of  an  undercoating  of  size.  The  French  sized 


LACQUER-WARE  171 

their  wood  because  it  filled  up  the  inequalities  of 
the  surface,  saved  the  quantity  of  varnish,  and  gave 
a  hardness  and  firmness  to  the  ground.  Neverthe- 
less it  caused  both  varnish  and  colour  to  crack  and 
peel  off  in  strips  if  subjected  to  any  violence.  Thus 
the  work  of  the  Birmingham  makers,  who  treated 
wood  as  they  had  long  treated  metals,  and  used  no 
size,  was  far  more  durable  than  the  French.  But 
the  French  lacquer-work  of  the  Martins,  inventors 
of  the  varnish  known  as  "Vernis  Martin,"  was 
probably  the  most  famous  of  any  European  japan- 
ning of  the  eighteenth  century.  In  1730  Simon 
Etienne  Martin  obtained  a  twenty  years'  monopoly, 
renewed  in  1744,  from  the  French  government  for 
all  kinds  of  lacquer  work,  and  in  1748  the  Martin 
family  had  three  factories  for  this  class  of  work  in 
Paris.  Their  earlier  productions  were  Oriental  in 
character;  but  afterwards  they  employed  a  variety 
of  colours  for  the  ground,  especially  pale  golds  and 
greens,  and  the  painted  designs  became  purely 
French  in  style. 

The  essential  difference  between  the  lacquer  of 
the  East  and  of  the  West  is  the  composition  of  the 
varnish.  The  Chinese  employ  the  sap  of  their  native 
gum-trees — chiefly  the  "Tsi" — and  the  Japanese 
that  of  the  "  Rhus  Vernis."  This  juice  must  be  used 
as  soon  as  it  is  drawn  from  the  tree,  for  it  speedily 
dries  and  becomes  quite  hard.  Thus  the  Oriental 
varnish  which  imparts  such  a  wonderful  lustre  can 


i;2      ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

never  be  imported,  and  Europeans  have  vainly 
tried,  by  using  other  resinous  substances,  to  pro- 
duce a  similar  effect.  But  a  coating  formed  of  lac, 
copal,  anime  or  mastic  gum,  however  carefully  pre- 
pared and  polished,  can  never  equal,  either  in  dur- 
ability or  brilliance,  that  of  China  or  Japan.  Among 
the  eastern  nations  many  of  the  most  accomplished 
artists  were  engaged  upon  the  work,  and  the 
lacquer-ware  of  Japan  has  from  the  earliest  times 
been  unrivalled  in  the  whole  world.  The  colour  of 
the  ground  is  more  brilliant  than  in  Chinese  ware, 
especially  the  golds  and  reds;  the  ornamentation  is 
bolder,  and  the  varnish  itself  is  stronger  and  able  to 
withstand  higher  temperatures. 

In  England  a  mixture  of  gum  and  lac  or  copal 
was  found  to  exhibit  the  best  results,  and  the  last 
substance  is  the  chief  ingredient  of  our  present-day 
wood  lacquer.  Stalker  and  Parker  devoted  an  im- 
portant chapter  to  the  subject  of  raised-work.  This 
was  produced  by  means  of  a  paste  of  gum,  whit- 
ing and  bole-ammoniac,  dropped  onto  the  wood 
according  to  pattern  from  a  stick  with  a  taper  end ; 
and  the  paste,  when  hardened,  was  cut,  scraped  and 
carved  into  shape  with  a  sharp  steel  instrument 
before  being  varnished.  It  is  in  such  relief  lacquer 
that  old  English  work  shows  its  most  glaring  de- 
fects. In  many  cases  the  paste  appears  to  have  been 
dropped  almost  at  random  upon  the  picture  and  then 
left  in  coarse  blotches,  neither  "  carved  "  nor  "cut." 


LACQUER-WARE  173 

According  to  E.  Chambers — following  the  method 
of  D.  Rust — the  flat,  coloured  grounds,  after  the 
application  of  a  layer  of  varnish,  were  obtained  as 
follows:  "  Incorporate  the  colour  of  the  ground  with 
seven  times  the  quantity  of  varnish,  and  apply  it 
with  a  pencil  (i.e.,  a  camel's  hair  pencil),  going  over 
it  three  times  each  a  quarter  of  an  hour  after  the 
other.  Two  hours  after  polish  with  a  pestle  or 
Dutch  reeds."  The  colours  to  be  employed  were: 

For  red  grounds :  "  Spanish  vermillion  with  a 
fourth  part  of  Venice  lacque." 

For  black:  "  Black  of  ivory  calcined  between  two 
crucibles." 

For  blue :  "  Blue  ultramarine  and  twice  as  much 
varnish  as  colour."  "  Green  is  difficult  to  make  fair 
and  lively  therefore  seldom  used."  Lastly  a  ven- 
turine  ground  was  obtained  by  gold-wire  reduced  to 
powder,  and  this  required  special  manipulation. 

Another  early  mode  of  layingtheground,  although 
not  mentioned  in  the  oldest  books  on  the  subject, 
is  worthy  of  note  as  throwing  fresh  light  on  eight- 
eenth century  japanning.  The  process  was  known 
as  the  "dip  ":  "  Small  quantities  of  coloured  varnish 
were  dropped  in  a  trough  of  water  over  which  it 
spread  in  curious  and  beautiful  ramifications.  Into 
this  the  article  was  dipped ;  the  colour  thus  trans- 
ferred to  the  work  was  afterwards  varnished  and 
polished  in  the  usual  way."1 

1  "  Penny  Cyclopaedia." 


174      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

Old  English  lacquerers  seem  to  have  derived 
their  designs  for  painted  ornamentation  almost  ex- 
clusively from  Oriental  models,  although  they  treated 
the  wonderful  eastern  art  with  but  scant  respect. 
Stalker  and  Parker  gave  a  series  of  designs  for 
cabinets  and  various  kinds  of  furniture  as  well  as 
for  powder  and  patch  boxes,  the  backs  of  combs  and 
brushes,  looking-glass  frames,  boxes,  etc.,  in  Indian 
or  Chinese  style.  After  a  perusal  of  their  preface 
it  is  clear  that  the  curious  blending  of  western  ideas 
with  Oriental  subjects,  noticeable  in  so  much  of  our 
early  lacquer-ware,  was  no  mere  accident,  but  a 
deliberate  attempt  to  improve  upon  the  original 
examples.  "  Perhaps,"  they  write  in  the  "  Epistle'' 
referred  to,  "we  have  helpt  them  a  little  in  their 
proportions,  where  they  were  lame  or  defective,  and 
made  them  more  pleasant,  yet  altogether  as  Antick." 

Not  only  the  books  on  the  subject  but  the  early 
dictionaries  published  designs  for  japanning  in 
Oriental  taste.  Before  the  middle  of  that  century 
the  Chinese  craze  made  itself  felt  in  all  departments 
of  art.  From  the  year  1740  onwards  quite  a  number 
of  plates  were  published  illustrating  ornaments, 
shields,  bookplates,  mirrors,  pier-tables,  pavilions, 
and  bridges  after  Chinese  models.  In  some  cases, 
as  for  instance  in  "The  First  Book  of  Ornaments  by 
De  la  Cour"  (1741),  Indian  and  Chinese  figures  ap- 
peared side  by  side  with  classical  columns  and  orna- 
ments. By  far  the  most  interesting  book  of  that 


LACQUER-WARE  175 

period  containing,  besides  furniture  designs,  pic- 
torial illustrations  suitable  for  lacquer  painting,  was 
that  issued  by  Edwards  and  Darly  in  1754.  There 
can  be  no  doubt  that  these  drawings  by  Matthias 
Darly  were  largely  copied  by  japan  ners  of  the  day. 
Although  Chippendale  stated  in  the  "  Director  "  that 
several  of  his  models,  hanging  China  shelves  and 
ladies'  dressing-tables,  were  intended  to  be  japanned, 
he  gave  no  designs  of  the  kind  published  by  Darly 
for  the  decoration  itself. 

Stalker  and  Parker  were  evidently  right  in  their 
low  estimate  of  their  fellow  artists  in  this  branch  of 
decorative  art,  and  the  work  of  succeeding  genera- 
tions, though  interesting,  can  rarely  be  called  strictly 
beautiful.  In  many  cases  the  ground  is  dull,  the 
design  indifferently  drawn,  and  the  subject  pictures 
badly  modelled.  The  want  of  lustre  is  probably  due 
in  many  cases  to  the  effects  of  time — that  which 
now  appears  merely  a  layer  of  black,  red,  or  brown 
paint,  no  doubt  had  a  bright  surface  when  first  pro- 
duced two  hundred  years  ago.  Much  of  the  work 
appears  to  have  received  an  insufficient  number  of 
coats  of  varnish,  for  really  fine  examples  still  have 
a  ground  so  brilliant  that  they  might  have  been 
executed  but  yesterday. 

Stalker  recommended  olive-wood,  walnut,  yew, 
box,  lime,  and  best  of  all,  pear-tree  wood  as  a  base 
for  japanning,  because  of  their  close  smooth  grain. 
Deal  and  oak,  and  rough  grained  woods,  entailed  a 


1 76     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

more  troublesome  and  expensive  method  of  treat- 
ment. The  work  actually  produced  during  the 
Queen  Anne  period  was  almost  invariably  executed 
upon  oak  or  pine.  For  this  reason  one  seldom  sees 
a  piece  of  early  lac  furniture  which  is  worm-eaten. 
Towards  the  end  of  the  century  the  lacquerers  used 
wood  of  the  beech  and  plane  or  sycamore  trees,  and 
this  later  work  is  generally  full  of  worm  holes. 
Furniture  of  every  kind  was  ornamented  with  lac- 
quer, but  cupboards,  long  clocks,  chests  of  drawers, 
mirror-frames,  and  tables  are  more  frequently  met 
with  than  lacquered  cabriole  chairs. 

In  quite  a  number  of  early  examples  a  dual 
workmanship  is  apparent  in  the  manufacture  of 
pieces  intended  for  japanning.  It  will  often  be  ob- 
served that  while  the  shape  and  general  construc- 
tion is  Dutch,  the  mounts  and  ornaments  are  of 
English  origin.  Those  who  have  made  a  study  of 
lacquered  furniture  are  therefore  of  opinion  that  a 
great  deal  of  the  early  work  came  to  us  from  Holland, 
and  that  even  late  in  the  Queen  Anne  period,  lac- 
quered panels  were  imported  from  the  Low  Countries 
and  were  then  made  up  here  into  various  articles  of 
furniture. 

The  corner  cupboard,  illustration  LIV,  is  in  the 
possession  of  Mr.  Dan.  Gibson.  It  is  a  very  fine 
specimen  of  English  lac  dating  from  the  early  years 
of  the  eighteenth  century.  The  upper  panels  are  of 
unusual  size,  4  ft.  6  in.  by  I  ft.  4  in.  The  wood  is 


Fig  LIV.     LACQUER  CORNER  CUPBOARD  AND  MIRROR  ;   SHERATON  TABLE, 

To  lace  page  177, 


Fig.LV.  LACQUER  CUPBOARD. 

To  face  page  177. 


LACQUER-WARE  177 

oak,  except  the  upright  frames,  base,  and  circular 
headed  cornice,  which  are  of  red  pine.  No  doubt 
the  lacquer  ground  was  originally  black,  although 
now  faded  to  a  shade  of  deep  brown ;  the  figures, 
beasts,  birds,  ducks,  and  foliage  are  gilt,  with  a 
touch  of  coral  and  chocolate  brown  added  here  and 
there.  The  scene  depicted  is  some  fable,  evidently 
very  carefully  copied  from  the  Oriental.  But  although 
the  work  is  distinctly  better  in  quality  than  the  ma- 
jority of  English  lacquered  pieces,  it  is  still  greatly 
inferior  to  the  Oriental. 

In  the  same  group  the  long  mirror  has  a  frame 
lacquered  on  a  soft  wood  ground — probably  pine. 
The  narrow  border,  the  double  plate — of  which  the 
upper  one  is  engraved — the  broad  bevel  following  the 
outline  of  the  frame,  all  point  to  the  very  begin- 
ning of  the  century  as  the  period  of  its  manufacture. 

The  lac  cupboard,  illustration  LV,  from  Mr. 
Gibson's  collection  also  belongs  to  the  first  part  of 
the  eighteenth  century.  The  ground  is  black,  and 
the  piece  is  painted  all  over  with  Chinese  subjects 
in  yellow,  touched  here  and  there  with  gold.  The 
whole  work  is,  as  far  as  can  be  known,  an  English 
production. 

The  cabinet  in  illustration  LVI  is  in  the  Victoria 
and  Albert  Museum,  the  lacquered  doors  being  the 
only  examples  of  old  English  japanning  preserved 
in  the  Museum.  The  cabinet  itself  is  of  south  Ger- 
man origin,  and  dates  from  the  beginning  of  the 

N 


i;8     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

seventeenth  century;  it  is  of  pine  and  oak  veneered 
with  Hungarian  ash  and  walnut.  A  remarkable 
fact  in  connection  with  this  piece  is  that  it  was 
made  up  in  England  into  its  present  form  about 
1690.  The  sides,  the  top,  the  bottom  drawer  of  the 
interior  and  the  outer  doors  were  added  at  the  latter 
period  in  this  country,  and  were  here  covered  with 
black  lacquer  enriched  with  gilded  designs  after  the 
Chinese  style.  The  brass  mounts  were  also  English, 
as  well  as  the  openwork  stand  of  pine,  stained  black, 
which  is  carved  in  a  manner  thoroughly  typical  of 
the  Wren  school  of  design.  The  height  is  5  ft.  4J  in., 
width  3  ft.  io£  in.,  depth  i  ft.  uj  in.  It  was  pur- 
chased for  the  Museum  in  1899,  for  £60. 


Fig.  LVI. 

To  face  page  178. 


LACQUER  CABINET. 


CHAPTER  XII 

OLD  ENGLISH    LOOKING-GLASSES 

MIRRORS  of  Vauxhall  glass  were  such  an 
essential  feature  of  the  decoration  of  English 
houses  during  the  Queen  Anne  and  Chippendale 
periods,  that  a  short  account  of  the  origin  of  old 
English  looking-glasses  and  of  the  various  pro- 
cesses of  manufacture  cannot  fail  to  be  of  interest. 
The  first  looking-glasses  were  made  in  Venice  about 
the  thirteenth  century,  earlier  mirrors  having  been 
constructed  of  metal  only.  Small  glass-mirrors — 
intended  chiefly  to  hang  at  the  girdle — were  ex- 
ported from  Venice  to  all  parts  of  Europe,  and  until 
the  sixteenth  century  the  south  Germans  alone — 
who  produced  little  convex  glasses  known  as  bulls- 
eyes — were  competitors  of  the  Venetians  in  this 
class  of  manufacture.  During  the  sixteenth  century 
the  process  of  silvering,  which  gave  a  bright,  lumin- 
ous surface  to  the  glass,  was  brought  to  a  high  state 
of  perfection  at  the  glass-houses  of  Murano,  and 
mirrors  of  larger  size  and  elaborately  framed  began 
to  be  employed  for  wall  decoration.  At  the  close  of 
the  sixteenth  and  beginning  of  the  century  follow- 

179 


i8o     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

ing,  Venetian  mirrors  were  imitated  in  France, 
Bohemia,  Bavaria,  and  England;  the  methods  of 
the  older  factories  were  improved  upon  and  the 
Venetian  trade  gradually  decreased  until,  in  1772, 
only  a  single  glass-house  in  Murano  continued  to 
make  looking-glasses. 

Sir  Robert  Mansel,  in  1615,  obtained  the  first 
patent  for  the  manufacture  of  mirrors  in  this 
country.  The  following  is  an  extract  from  the  peti- 
tion which  he  addressed  to  the  House  of  Commons 
in  1624  for  the  renewal  of  his  patent. 

"  Sir  Robert  Mansel  did  bring  into  the  kingdome 
many  expert  strangers  from  forraigne  parts  beyond 
the  seas  to  instruct  the  natives  of  this  kingdome  in 
the  making  of  looking-glass  plates  for  the  grinding, 
polishing,  foyling  and  casing  of  them,  being  all 
several  professions  which  were  never  before  made 
nor  done  in  England."1 

The  material  was  flint  or  crystalline  glass,  brittle, 
and  of  inferior  quality,  and  until  after  the  Restora- 
tion, metal  mirrors  were  far  more  generally  em- 
ployed in  this  country  than  those  of  glass.  About 
1663  the  manufacture  of  looking-glasses  was  greatly 
improved.  The  Duke  of  Buckingham,  Dr.  Tilson 
and  others  applied  for  patents,  and  as  Tilson's  pro- 
ductions were  the  best,  both  as  regards  colour  and 
quality,  the  monopoly  was  granted  to  him.  But  it 
was  the  Duke  of  Buckingham  who,  a  few  years  later, 

1  Calendar  of  State  Papers,  Domestic  Series,  James  I,  152  (63). 


OLD  ENGLISH  LOOKING-GLASSES       181 

brought  about  the  most  important  change  in  Eng- 
lish mirror-making,  by  the  establishment  of  a  plate- 
glass  factory  at  Lambeth.  There  is  no  means  of 
ascertaining  the  exact  change  in  the  materials  in 
use,  since  no  account  of  the  process  of  manufacture 
appears  to  have  been  written,  but  several  writers  of 
the  time  testified  to  its  excellence.  The  Duke  had 
strong  scientific  tastes,  "  he  dabbled  in  chemistry 
and  had  a  laboratory  of  his  own";  and  it  was  prob- 
ably owing  to  his  personal  efforts  that  plate  glass 
was  substituted  for  flint. 

Evelyn  in  his  "  Diary,"  under  date  September 
1 9th,  1677,  writes  of  a  visit  to  Lambeth  as  follows: 

"  We  also  saw  the  Duke  of  Buckingham's  glass- 
works, where  they  made  huge  vases  of  metal  as 
clear,  ponderous  and  thick  as  crystal;  also  looking- 
glasses  far  larger  and  better  than  any  that  come 
from  Venice." 

In  "  The  present  state  of  England,"  published 
in  1683,  the  writer  dated  the  establishment  of  the 
factory  from  1673.  "  The  first  glass  plates  for  look- 
ing-glasses and  coach-windows  were  made  about 
ten  years  ago  at  Lambeth  by  the  encouragement  of 
the  Duke  of  Buckingham"  (Part  III,  p.  94).  This 
statement  is  quoted  in  the  "  Historical  Origin  of 
Commerce "  by  A.  Anderson,  who  fixed  the  date 
about. three  years  earlier,  1670.  "About  this  time 
it  was  that  the  Duke  of  Buckingham  sent  for  the 
best  glass  makers,  glass-grinders  and  polishers 


i82     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

from  Venice ;  which  public-spirited  design  has 
since  so  well  succeeded,  as  to  be  now  enabled 
to  send  to  that  very  place  and  to  every  other  part 
of  Europe  and  to  Asia,  Africa  and  America  the 
very  finest  glass  of  all  sorts  that  the  world  can 
produce." 

Lastly,  Allen,  in  his  "  History  of  Lambeth  " 
(1827),  gave  the  whole  history  of  the  new  under- 
taking: "  Among  the  various  manufactures  carried 
on  in  this  part  of  the  parish,  none  have  been  so 
celebrated  as  Vauxhall  Plate  Glass.  In  the  thir- 
teenth century  the  Venetians  were  the  only  people 
who  had  the  secret  of  making  looking-glasses;  but 
about  the  year  1670,  a  number  of  Venetian  artists 
arrived  in  England,  the  principal  of  whom  was 
Rossetti ;  and  under  the  patronage  of  the  Duke  of 
Buckingham,  a  manufactory  was  established  at  Fox- 
hall,  and  carried  on  with  amazing  success,  in  the 
firm  of  Dawson,  Bowles,  and  Co.  so  as  to  excel 
the  Venetians,  or  any  other  nation  in  blown  plate 
glass.  The  emoluments  acquired  by  the  proprietors 
were  prodigious;  but  in  the  year  1780,  from  a 
difference  between  them  and  the  workmen,  a  total 
stop  was  put  to  this  great  acquisition  and  valuable 
manufactory,  and  a  descendant  of  the  above  Rossetti 
ungratefully  left  in  extreme  poverty.  The  site  of 
this  celebrated  factory  is  Vauxhall  Square." 

When  Buckingham's  factory  first  started,  a 
Venetian  law  forbidding  the  exportation  of  rough 


OLD  ENGLISH  LOOKING-GLASSES      183 

plates  of  glass — to  be  ground  and  silvered  elsewhere 
— gave  a  great  impetus  to  the  English  manufacture. 
Mirrors  made  entirely  in  this  country  could  be 
produced  at  a  cheaper  rate  than  if  imported  from 
abroad,  and  though  the  trade  in  foreign  looking- 
glasses  continued,  in  spite  of  Charles  IFs  proclama- 
tion (1664)  forbidding  the  importation  of  any  glass 
whatsoever,  looking-glasses  of  Vauxhall  Plate  ap- 
pear to  have  been  in  great  demand.  It  was  not 
long,  however,  before  the  new  manufacture  was 
hampered  by  heavy  duties.  These  were  first  im- 
posed in  1695,  repealed  three  years  later,  re-enacted 
in  1745,  and  only  finally  abolished  by  Sir  Robert 
Peel  in  1845. 

The  methods  in  use  at  the  various  glass-houses 
were  kept  secret  as  far  as  possible,  and  the  chief  fact 
known  in  connection  with  the  Vauxhall  works  is 
that  the  glass  was  blown  in  the  same  manner  as  in 
Murano.  The  mirrors  produced  were  of  small  size, 
not  exceeding  forty  to  fifty  inches  in  length.  They 
could  not  be  made  of  larger  size  since  the  plate  be- 
came too  thin  to  bear  the  process  of  grinding  if 
blown  to  a  greater  length.  There  were  often  bubbles 
and  other  defects  in  the  glass,  which  was  of  a 
blueish  or  steely  tinge.  The  metal  coating  or  sil- 
vering never  adhered  very  firmly  to  the  surface, 
and  could  be  easily  scraped  away  with  a  knife ;  in- 
deed, unless  carefully  handled  it  would  often  fall 
away  in  pieces.  The  bevelled  edge,  or  "  diamond 


i84     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

cut  "  as  it  was  called,  one  of  the  most  characteristic 
features  of  the  old  mirrors,  was  very  shallow  and 
generally  about  an  inch  in  width.  In  cases  of  a 
double  bevel,  each  division  was  somewhat  narrower. 
Scarcely  any  ridge  marked  the  beginning  of  the 
bevel,  so  slight  was  the  angle  of  inclination.  There 
is  some  difference  of  opinion  as  to  the  manner  in 
which  the  "  diamond  cut  "  was  wrought.  Hunger- 
ford  Pollen,  in  his  "Ancient  and  Modern  Furniture 
and  Woodwork"  (1875),  stated  that  the  workman 
held  the  plate  over  his  head,  and  the  edges  were 
then  cut  by  grinding,  "  thus  giving  a  prismatic 
light  to  the  glass."  Fran9ois  Haudicquer  de  Blan- 
court  also,  in  describing  the  processes  of  the  French 
glass-houses,  wrote:  "  The  diamond  cut  is  done  by 
grinding  the  glass  with  drift-sand  and  water."1 
On  the  other  hand,  some  of  the  first  modern  glass 
experts  hold  that  many  of  the  old  bevels  show  un- 
doubted indications  of  having  been  produced  by 
pressure  when  the  glass  was  in  a  molten  condition, 
and  not  by  grinding  when  it  had  become  cold. 
The  probable  solution  of  the  problem  no  doubt 
is  that  both  methods  were  employed  at  different 
periods. 

The  "blowing,"  "grinding,"  "polishing,"  and 
"  silvering  "  of  mirrors  were  clearly  defined  in  the 
"  Dictionarium  Polygraphicum  "  (1735),  and  in  E. 

1  "De  I'Art  de  la  Verrerie"  (1697).   Our  citation  is  from  the 
English  translation,  published  in  1699. 


OLD  ENGLISH  LOOKING-GLASSES       185 

Chambers'  "Cyclopaedia"  (1728,  1738),  etc.  The 
two  accounts  were  almost  in  the  same  words;  and 
although  the  methods  depicted  were  not  identified 
with  any  factory  in  particular,  they  were  in  all 
probability  those  employed  at  the  Vauxhall  and 
other  contemporary  glass-houses : 

"  The  melting  pots  where  the  materials  to  be 
blown  are  fixed  are  38  inches  in  diameter  and  35  feet 
high.  After  the  materials  are  vitrified  by  the  heat 
of  the  fire  and  the  glass  is  sufficiently  refined,  the 
master  workman  dips  in  his  blowing-iron  once 
and  again  till  he  has  got  matter  enough  thereon. 
This  done  he  mounts  a  kind  of  block,  or  stool  to  be 
more  at  liberty  to  balance  it  as  it  lengthens  in  the 
blowing.  When  after  several  repeated  heatings  and 
blowings  the  glass  is  at  length  brought  to  the  com- 
pass proper  for  its  thickness,  they  cut  it  off  with 
forces  at  the  extremity  opposite  to  the  iron  in  order 
to  point  it  with  the  pontil.  The  pontil  is  a  long, 
firm  piece  of  iron  ...  in  the  manner  of  a  T.  To 
point  the  glass  they  plunge  the  head  of  this  T  into 
the  melting-pot  and  with  the  liquid  sticking  thereto 
they  fasten  it  to  the  extremity  of  the  glass  before 
cut  off.  When  it  is  sufficiently  formed  they  separate 
the  other  extremity  of  the  glass  from  the  blowing- 
iron  and  instead  thereof  make  use  of  the  pontil  to 
carry  it  to  the  furnace  appointed  for  that  end  and 
where  by  several  repeated  heatings  they  continue  to 
enlarge  it  till  it  is  equally  thick  in  every  part.  This 


1 86     ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

done  they  cut  it  open  with  the  forces  not  only  on  the 
side  by  which  it  stuck  to  the  blowing-iron  but  like- 
wise the  whole  length  of  the  cylinder.  After  that 
giving  it  a  sufficient  heating  it  is  in  a  condition  to 
be  entirely  opened  extended  and  flattened." 

For  grinding:  "The  plate  of  glass  is  laid  horizon- 
tal on  a  stone  in  manner  of  a  table  and  to  secure  it  the 
better  fastened  down  with  mortar  or  stucco.  To  sus- 
tain it  there  is  a  strong  wooden  frame  an  inch  or  two 
higher  than  the  glass.  The  bottom,  or  base  of  the 
grinding  engine  is  another  rough  glass  about  half 
the  dimensions  of  the  former.  On  this  is  a  wooden 
plank  cemented  thereto  and  upon  this  are  proper 
weights  applied  to  promote  the  triture;  the  plank, 
or  table  being  fastened  to  a  wheel  which  gives  it 
motion.  This  wheel  which  is  at  least  5  or  6  inches 
in  diameter  is  made  of  very  hard  but  light  wood 
and  is  wrought  by  two  workmen  placed  against  each 
other  who  twist  and  pull  it  alternately,  and  some- 
times when  the  work  requires  it  turn  it  round.  By 
such  means  a  constant  mutual  attrition  is  produced 
between  the  two  glasses  which  is  favoured  by  water 
and  sands  of  several  kinds  bestowed  between,  sand 
still  finer  and  finer  being  applied  as  the  grinding  is 
more  advanced;  at  last  emery  is  used.  We  need  not 
add  that  as  the  upper  or  incumbent  glass  polishes 
and  grows  smoother  it  must  be  shifted  from  time 
to  time  and  others  put  in  its  place.  It  is  to  be  noted 
that  only  the  largest  size  glasses  are  thus  ground 


OLD  ENGLISH   LOOKING-GLASSES       187 

with  a  mill,  for  the  middling  and  smaller  sorts  are 
wrought  by  the  hand  to  which  end  there  are  four 
wooden  handles  at  the  four  corners  of  the  upper 
stone  or  carriage  for  the  workmen  to  take  hold  of 
to  give  it  motion." 

For  polishing:  "The  plate  is  laid  down  on  a 
stone  placed  horizontally  and  in  a  bed  of  plaster  of 
paris  calcin'd  and  pulveriz'd  very  fine  and  sifted; 
which  being  made  into  a  sort  of  paste  by  water  and 
plaister'd  up  the  edges  of  the  plate  dries  and  hardens 
and  so  keeps  it  immovable.  Then  the  workman 
fixes  a  strong  bow  of  yew  or  some  other  tough 
wood  to  a  board  fixed  up  to  the  ceiling  of  the  room, 
fixes  also  the  other  end  to  a  pole  made  in  a  wooden 
parallelepiped  of  about  four  inches  long,  covered 
with  a  sort  of  coarse  woollen  cloth  well  drench'd 
with  Tripoly  tempered  with  water,  works  it  with 
his  blocks  and  bow  all  over  by  strength  of  arm  till 
the  plate  has  got  a  perfect  politure." 

The  process  of  silvering  was  as  follows :  "  The 
plates  being  polished  a  thin  blotting  paper  is  spread 
on  a  table  and  sprinkled  with  fine  chalk;  and  this 
done,  over  the  paper  is  laid  a  thin  lamina  or  leaf 
of  tin,  on  which  is  poured  mercury,  which  is  to  be 
equally  distributed  over  the  leaf  with  a  hare's  foot, 
or  cotton.  Over  the  leaf  is  laid  a  clean  paper  and 
over  that  the  glass  plate.  With  the  left  hand  the 
glass  plate  is  pressed  down,  and  with  the  right  the 
paper  is  gently  drawn  out;  which  done  the  plate  is 


1 88      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

covered  with  a  thicker  paper  and  loaden  with  a 
greater  weight  that  the  superfluous  mercury  may  be 
driven  out  and  the  tin  adhere  more  closely  to  the 
glass.  When  it  is  dried  the  weight  is  removed  and 
the  looking-glass  is  complete."  It  is  interesting  to 
note  that  this  process  is  the  same  as  that  described 
by  G.  B.  della  Porta  ("  Magiae  Naturalis  "  libri  xx, 
edit.  1651 l)  in  his  account  of  the  method  of  silvering 
practised  at  the  factories  of  Murano. 

The  French  were  greatly  in  advance  of  the 
English  in  their  looking-glass  manufacture,  owing 
to  their  discovery  of  the  art  of  casting  plate  glass 
like  metals  by  throwing  the  molten  material  into 
an  iron  or  copper  table  and  then  rolling  it  out  into 
a  plate  of  equal  thickness.  Instead  of  a  mirror  of 
45  to  50  inches  in  length,  looking-glasses  were  pro- 
duced 84  by  50  inches,  to  the  "  universal  astonish- 
ment and  admiration  "  of  the  public.  In  422  A.D., 
St.  Jerome  mentioned  plates  of  glass — probably 
used  for  windows — which  were  cast  upon  a  flat 
stone.  There  is  no  further  record  of  the  use  of 
this  process  till  the  end  of  the  fifteenth  century, 
when  it  was  rediscovered  by  an  accident.  A  work- 
man, while  melting  the  contents  of  a  crucible  of 
molten  glass  happened  to  spill  a  little  upon  the 
ground.  The  liquid  ran  under  one  of  the  large  flag- 
stones with  which  the  glass-house  was  paved,  and 

1  An  English  translation,  as  "  Natural  Magick  ...  in  twenty 
bookes,"  was  published  at  London  in  1658. 


OLD  ENGLISH  LOOKING-GLASSES       189 

when  the  workman  raised  the  stone  he  found  that 
the  glass  had  assumed  the  form  of  a  flat  plate 
superior  to  anything  which  he  could  produce  by 
blowing.  Whether  or  not  the  man  worked  out  his 
invention  further  is  not  known,  and  nearly  two 
hundred  years  elapsed  before  the  art  of  casting 
was  seriously  considered.  In  a  letter  dated  1662, 
Louis  XIV  granted  to  one  Bernhard  Perotto  "the 
pleasure  of  enjoying  the  fruits  of  his  work  and 
expenses  undergone  on  account  of  his  curious  re- 
searches in  the  matter  of  the  new  invention  of 
casting  crystal  on  a  table  like  metals."  l 

Thus  Perotto  was  the  first  in  the  field,  but 
Louis  Lucas  de  Nohan  is  generally  accredited  with 
the  invention,  as  it  was  he  who  established  the 
famous  plate  glass  works  of  St.  Gobain  in  1695. 

There  is  no  doubt  that  the  process  of  casting 
plates  was  adopted  very  early  in  England,  although 
it  has  generally  been  supposed  that  all  the  mirrors 
produced  at  Vauxhall  were  of  blown  glass. 

A  patent,  dated  1691,  granted  a  licence  to  "  Rob. 
Hooke  and  Christ.  Dodsworth  to  exercise  and  put  in 
practise  the  new  invention  ...  of  casting  glass,  par- 
ticularly looking  glass  plates  much  larger  than  were 
ever  blown  in  England." 

The  "  Didlionarium  Polygraphicum "  amply 
proves  that  at  the  date  of  its  publication  the  art  of 
casting  was  commonly  practised:  "The  method  of 

1  Quoted  by  Mr.  Albert  Hartshorne  in  "  Old  English  Glasses,"  1 897. 


i9o     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

running  and  casting  large  looking-glass  plates  has 
been  considerably  improv'd  by  our  workmen  in  Eng- 
land. .  .  we  can  cast  all  kinds  of  borders,  mouldings, 
etc."  The  same  authority  explained  that  a  frequent 
cause  of  threads  and  other  defects  was  the  adultera- 
tion, by  the  Spanish  producers,  of  one  of  the  princi- 
pal ingredients  of  plate  glass — barillia,  which  was 
obtained  from  Alicante  in  Spain. 

An  interesting  book  on  the  subject  of  glass- 
making  was  issued  in  1755,  entitled  "The  Plate- 
glass  book,"  by  "  a  Glass-house  Clerk." 

The  object  of  the  publication  was  to  give  a  list  of 
prices  for  mirrors  of  various  sizes,  both  finished  and 
unfinished,  as  produced  at  the  Vauxhall  factory  and 
at  the  factory  of  Blackfriars,  "  lately  removed  to 
Fleet  Street."  The  plates  at  both  factories  were 
described  as  being  "founded  "  and  prices  were  quoted 
for  sizes  up  to  sixty-six  inches  in  length. 

The  most  important  looking-glass  works  of  the 
close  of  the  eighteenth  century  were  those  estab- 
lished at  Prescott,  Lancashire,  by  a  company  of 
"  British  Plate  Glass  Manufacturers."  Here  the 
plates  were  cast  after  the  French  methods,  and  a 
great  deal  of  the  machinery  was  brought  over  from 
France.  The  old  process  of  blowing  plates  was  still 
continued,  however,  at  some  of  our  factories  till  1845, 
and  the  tedious  hand-grinding  and  polishing  was 
not  superseded  by  the  introduction  of  steam  power 
till  about  1830. 


CHAPTER  XIII 

HINTS  TO  COLLECTORS  AND  OPINIONS  OF  AN  EXPERT 

THE  great  interest  taken  in  eighteenth-century 
furniture  has  led  to  its  reproduction  on  a 
colossal  scale,  and  many  imitations  are  executed 
so  cleverly  that  even  experts  find  it  difficult  to  dis- 
tinguish a  genuine  from  a  spurious  antique.  There 
are  well-known  dealers  who  would  be  incapable  of 
disposing  of  their  wares  under  false  pretences;  if 
they  offer  reproductions  for  sale  they  are  sold  as 
copies,  not  as  "  old  "  pieces.  Some  of  the  most  skil- 
ful craftsmen  of  modern  times  are  thus  employed  to 
copy  the  eighteenth-century  models  in  old  wood. 
Beautiful  designs  are  in  this  way  brought  within 
the  reach  of  those  of  moderate  means,  and  the  cause 
of  art  and  beauty  in  our  homes  is  thereby  furthered. 
On  the  other  hand,  there  are  numberless  "  fakes  "  or 
fraudulent  reproductions  passed  off  as  genuine 
antiques  by  dishonest — or  sometimes  merely  ignor- 
ant— tradesmen ;  and  much  of  this  so-called  "  old  " 
furniture  will  be  found  on  close  inspection  to  be  but 
a  very  poor  imitation.  It  is  often  ill-made  and  en- 

191 


i92      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

riched  with  ornamentation  in  the  style  of  one  period, 
while  the  main  outline  is  characteristic  of  another. 

At  auction  sales  a  rare  piece  is  almost  invariably 
bought  by  dealers,  either  for  stock  or  for  collectors 
on  commission.  Many  of  the  large  houses  join  to- 
gether to  form  what  is  known  as  a  "  knock-out "  in 
order  to  prevent  any  outbidding  by  private  pur- 
chasers. It  is  a  good  advertisement  for  a  big  firm 
to  pay  a  "  record"  price,  and  they  find  little  diffi- 
culty in  reselling  at  a  small  profit.  Indeed,  the  sums 
given  of  late  years  for  choice  examples  have  reached 
such  a  high  figure  that  unless  the  collector  has  an 
almost  unlimited  purse,  he  will  have  to  spend  his 
time  hunting  for  specimens  in  out-of-the-waycorners 
where  their  value  is  not  recognized.  Even  then  his 
opportunities  will  be  few  and  far  between,  for  the 
larger  dealers  have  expert  travellers  all  over  the 
country  searching  for  such  bargains. 

The  would-be  collector  will  thus  find  his  path  be- 
set with  many  difficulties.  But  the  greatest,  without 
doubt,  is  the  quick-sand  of  deception,  and  some 
knowledge  of  the  tricks  resorted  to  by  fraudulent 
vendors  has  become  a  matter  of  necessity. 

We  will  imagine  that  the  collector  has  left  the 
highways  and  is  starting  out  upon  a  tour  of  dis- 
covery in  the  by-ways.  He  examines  a  quantity  of 
supposed  eighteenth-century  furniture — but  a  great 
deal  of  it  offers  no  special  attraction  from  the  point 
of  view  either  of  beauty  or  of  elegance.  Ultimately 


HINTS  TO  COLLECTORS  193 

he  comes  upon  an  example — let  us  say  a  chair — 
which  he  deems  worthy  of  closer  examination. 
Under  the  framework  of  the  seat  are  a  number  of 
little  worm-holes,  for  many  of  the  old  woods  are 
worm-eaten  although  the  worm  itself  is  dead.  But 
if  by  the  insertion  of  a  pin  the  holes  are  found  to  be 
straight  and  uniform,  they  must  at  once  be  regarded 
with  suspicion ;  the  making  of  artificial  worm-holes 
is  an  industry  upon  which  whole  families  are  brought 
up.  In  the  same  manner  neither  perished  glue  nor 
loosened  tenons  can  be  regarded  as  certain  signs 
that  the  piece  is  genuine.  As  a  general  rule  the 
surest  guide  is  the  patina,  or  bloom  on  the  surface 
of  the  wood.  A  little  study  of  antiques  in  a  fine 
state  of  preservation  will  accustom  the  eye  to  ob- 
serve the  fine  effects  of  tone  and  colour  which  age 
alone  can  impart. 

There  are  also  indications  by  which  old  surface 
wood  can  be  infallibly  recognized.  No  copy,  how- 
ever faithful,  can  reproduce  the  infinite  number  of 
microscopic  bruises  and  indentations  with  which 
time  covers  the  face  of  even  the  most  carefully  pre- 
served furniture.  Again,  if  a  small  piece  be  sliced 
off  with  a  penknife,  in  a  part  where  such  a  cutting 
could  not  be  observed,  the  presence  of  new  wood 
can  at  once  be  perceived.  Age  always  darkens  and 
hardens  wood,  and  its  fibres  become  shortened.  In 
doubtful  cases  the  purchase  ought  to  be  made  sub- 
ject to  the  above  trial. 

o 


i94     ENGLISH  FURNITURE   DESIGNERS 

The  old  mahogany  came  from  San  Domingo, 
Cuba,  and  Honduras.  That  from  the  West  Indies 
was  known  as  "  Spanish  "  and  was,  according  to 
Sheraton,  hard  in  texture;  the  Cuban,  which  was 
generally  used  for  chairs,  was  close  and  straight  in 
grain  and  of  a  rosy  hue;  San  Domingo  yielded  a 
great  deal  of  mahogany  during  the  first  part  of  the 
eighteenth  century,  but  Sheraton  stated  that  in  his 
time  it  was  very  little  in  use.  Honduras  mahogany, 
he  said,  was  the  one  chiefly  employed.  It  was  of  an 
open  nature,  the  best  kinds  being  free  from  speckles, 
of  a  flashy  figure  and  dark  gold  hue.  This  wood 
was  obtained  in  planks  from  12  to  14  ft.  long  and 
2  to  4  ft.  wide,  in  rare  instances  even  6  to  7  ft.  wide. 
Since  Sheraton's  day  a  great  change  has  taken  place. 
The  wood  imported  is  almost  entirely  obtained  from 
comparatively  young  trees;  it  is  lighter  both  in  colour 
and  in  weight,  poorer  in  figure,  and  narrower  in  width. 

The  same  remarks  apply  to  modern  satin-wood. 
Whereas  a  single  plank  in  the  old  days  was  often 
found  sufficient  for  the  front  or  side  of  a  cabinet  or 
for  a  table-top,  present-day  copies,  if  carried  out  in 
new  wood,  have  to  be  joined  many  times  in  order 
to  attain  the  width  of  the  model.  Also  the  colour 
and  figure  are  greatly  inferior  to  that  found  in 
eighteenth-century  work. 

The  fraud  most  difficult  to  detecl  is  the  one  made 
of  old  wood.  Panels  from  old  houses  or  valueless 
old  furniture  are  broken  up  and  then  cut,  planed, 


HINTS  TO  COLLECTORS  195 

and  carved  in  imitation  of  well-known  designs  of 
the  great  cabinet-makers  of  the  past.  On  the  other 
hand  there  are  genuine  specimens  which  have  been 
"restored"  so  carelessly  that  they  might  at  first 
sight  be  mistaken  for  reproductions,  and  in  some 
instances  have  actually  been  sold  as  copies.  "  Pick- 
ling," that  is  washing  over  with  an  acid  and  then 
polishing,  a  process  still  frequently  regarded  as 
essential  for  bringing  out  the  original  colour,  grain, 
and  figure  of  the  wood,  cannot  be  too  resolutely 
discouraged.  There  are  also  several  forms  of  clean- 
ing and  varnishing  hardly  less  injurious.  Against 
these  mistaken  ideas  lovers  of  antique  furniture 
have  made  a  long  and  effective  protest.  In  a  copy 
made  up  from  old  wood,  manufacturers  seek — 
though  with  poor  results — to  imitate  by  artificial 
means  the  wonderful  surface-tone  of  the  model. 
The  natural  bloom,  however,  can  never  be  replaced. 
Thus  any  method  of  so-called  cleaning  which  de- 
stroys the  beauty  of  the  patina  reduces  a  genuine 
antique  to  the  level  of  a  reproduction,  and  but  little 
then  remains  to  distinguish  the  modern  from  the  old 
work.  If  collectors  sufficiently  realized  that  not 
only  the  artistic,  but  the  actual  value  of  a  piece  is 
materially  lessened  by  such  ill-advised  restoration, 
a  great  deal  of  beautiful  furniture  might  still  be 
saved  from  permanent  injury.1 

1  A  very  safe  method  of  cleaning  and  burnishing  old  furniture 
is  no  doubt  that  of  which  Sheraton  gave  a  description  in  the 


i96     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

To  proceed  with  the  inspection  of  the  chair: 
if  the  wood  itself  proves  satisfactory,  close  attention 
should  next  be  paid  to  the  carving.  Here  many  de- 
vices are  resorted  to  in  order  to  deceive  the  unwary. 
Sometimes  the  splat  is  quite  modern,  although  the 
framework  belongs  to  a  genuine  old  chair ;  for  if  the 
splat,  dating  from  the  eighteenth  century,  happens 
to  be  very  plain,  it  will  often  be  cut  away  and  a  new 
and  more  attractively  carved  piece  inserted  in  its 
place.  Much  modern  carving  is  done  by  machinery, 
the  effect  being  hard,  mechanical,  and  quite  wanting 
in  that  delicacy  of  feeling  which  the  hand  of  a  master 
craftsman  alone  can  impart.  The  machine  used  is 
composed  of  a  number  of  vertical  spindles.  A 
"template,"  or  model  of  the  work  to  be  carved,  is 
fixed  to  a  rigid  bench,  placed  directly  under  one  of 
the  spindles.  This  pilot-spindle  has  a  point  which 
is  guided  by  the  hand  of  the  workman  over  the  un- 
dulating surface  of  the  template,  while  the  other 
spindles  geared  to,  and  travelling  at  the  same  speed 
as  the  "  pilot,"  reproduce  in  wood  the  exact  design 
of  the  model.  The  work  is  then  put  into  the  hands 
of  an  experienced  carver,  who  adds  a  few  finishing 
touches.  The  results  obtained  are  often  very  effect- 
ive, but  even  the  merest  amateur  should  easily  be 

"  Cabinet  Dictionary " :  "  Chairs  are  generally  polished  with  a 
hardish  composition  of  wax  rubbed  upon  a  polishing  brush  with 
which  the  grain  of  the  wood  is  impregnated  with  the  composition 
and  afterwards  well  rubbed  off."  Turpentine  is  also  harmless. 


HINTS  TO  COLLECTORS  197 

able  to  distinguish  a  machine-carved  from  a  hand- 
carved  piece.  It  will  be  observed  that  Chippendale 
chairs  were  always  carved  in  separate  parts,  and  then 
put  together  afterwards. 

If  the  chair  has  arms  these  also  may  be  modern 
additions,  since  armchairs  are  as  a  rule  considered 
more  saleable  than  "  single  "  chairs.  In  cases  where 
the  leg  and  the  arm  support  form  a  single  piece, 
this  portion  will  generally  be  original,  as  it  is  un- 
likely that  entirely  new  arms  and  legs  would  be 
added. 

The  foot  ought  to  show  the  marks  of  wear  and 
tear,  but — once  again — this  effect  can  be  artificially 
produced. 

In  the  examination  of  an  inlaid  or  painted  piece 
there  is  the  same  necessity  for  caution.  Cabinets, 
bookcases,  side-tables,  and  chairs  are  often  newly 
inlaid  and  inordinately  decorated  with  paintings. 
Nearly  all  decorated  pieces  were  veneered;  but 
sometimes  a  specimen,  originally  plain,  in  which  the 
wood  was  coarse  or  of  poor  figure,  will  be  found  to 
have  been  veneered  at  a  recent  date.  The  art  of 
inlaying  was  so  perfectly  understood  by  the  great 
masters  of  the  Adam,  Hepplewhite,  and  Sheraton 
schools,  that  imitations  as  a  rule  are  of  much  poorer 
workmanship.  The  lines  of  different  coloured  woods 
were  extremely  fine  and  were  laid  very  close  to- 
gether; in  banding  and  stringing  the  outlines  were 
always  regular,  and  the  mitres  and  joints  made  to 


i98      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

meet  most  accurately.  In  painted  decoration  the 
colours  should  naturally  be  dull  and  mellow,  and 
somewhat  sunk  into  the  woodwork;  the  surface, 
thus  ornamented,  should  also  show  signs  of  wear. 

In  the  drawer  of  a  bureau  or  bookcase  the  ordin- 
ary fake  but  seldom  displays  the  same  care  and 
accuracy  of  detail  as  a  genuine  piece.  The  wood 
was  so  well-seasoned  and  was  made  to  fit  so  exactly, 
that,  after  the  lapse  of  a  century  or  more,  there  is 
no  sign  of  warping  nor  of  that  expansion — or  con- 
traction— which  is  rarely  absent  in  a  modern  piece. 
The  drawers  of  a  "  real "  Chippendale  or  Sheraton 
bureau  slide  backwards  and  forwards  as  though 
over  an  oiled  surface.  The  sides  and  bottoms  are 
very  thin,  the  wood  being  generally  about  a  quarter 
of  an  inch  in  cross  section. 

We  will  imagine  the  collector  to  be  next  in 
search  of  a  clock-case.  Here  an  inspection  of  the 
ornamentation  is  of  the  first  importance,  for  it  is 
safe  to  say  that  all  elaborately  carved  clocks — though 
perhaps  more  particularly  those  of  the  "  Grand- 
father "  type — are  of  modern  workmanship.  Chip- 
pendale's and  Johnson's  books  represented  clocks 
with  the  most  fantastic  ornamentation;  but  few 
specimens  made  from  these  designs  are  at  present 
in  existence,  and  it  is  probable  that  such  sketches 
were  only  intended  to  be  attractive  advertisements. 
It  is  a  remarkable  fact  that  when  so  much  skill 
was  bestowed  upon  the  carving  of  furniture  and 


HINTS  TO  COLLECTORS  199 

interior  fittings,  the  wooden  clock-cases,  actually 
made  during  the  Queen  Anne  and  Chippendale 
periods,  were  either  plainly  moulded  or  very  slightly 
carved  around  the  door  or  the  angle  shafts.  In 
fakes  the  carving  displayed  is  curiously  enough 
often  Elizabethan  or  Jacobean  in  character  — types 
of  decoration  no  longer  in  use — when  long  clocks 
were  first  made  in  this  country.  Not  seldom  a 
genuine  old  clock  is  stripped  of  its  veneer  and 
then  carved  either  in  a  too  antiquated  or  in  quite 
modern  style.  In  previous  chapters  it  has  been 
shown  that  English  eighteenth-century  clocks  were 
simple  in  structure  and  depended  for  their  effect 
upon  their  lines,  curves,  mouldings,  and  proportions. 
The  decorations  consisted  of  a  little  fretwork  and 
brass  in  the  wood,  marquetry,  japanning,  and — at 
the  close  of  the  eighteenth  century — a  veneer  of 
painted  satin-wood. 

A  maker  of  reproductions  on  a  somewhat  large 
scale  once  explained  to  the  writer  the  process  of 
manufacture.  When  an  exact  copy  had  been  made 
of  an  eighteenth-century  model,  the  work  was  held 
over  a  fire  of  wood  shavings  until  all  the  sharp 
edges  and  corners  had  been  burned  away.  Lastly, 
the  piece  was  broken  up  into  several  parts  and  glued 
together  again.  Thus  was  the  "  real  antique  "  pre- 
pared for  the  market. 


200     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 


OPINIONS  OF  AN  EXPERT 

One  of  the  best  authorities  on  antique  furniture 
is  Mr.  James  Orrock,  R.I.,  and  his  opinions  on  this 
subject  should  be  of  value  to  collectors.  Artist,  col- 
lector, and  enthusiast,  such  is  the  best  definition  of 
Mr.  Orrock,  who  for  half  a  century  has  made  a 
study  of  the  Renaissance  period  of  English  art  in  all 
its  many  branches.  Above  all  he  is  an  expert,  and 
to  be  an  expert  in  these  days  when  fraudulent  imita- 
tions are  so  numerous  calls  for  exceptional  powers 
of  discrimination  and  exceptional  knowledge. 

As  regards  plain,  carved,  or  inlaid  furniture,  there 
are,  he  considers,  many  ways  of  recognizing  a  genuine 
piece.  Old  wood  has,  in  his  opinion,  a  semi-trans- 
parent look,  and  resembles  a  jelly-like  substance 
rather  than  a  solid  and  opaque  mass.  "  Furniture," 
in  Mr.  Orrock's  words,  has  indeed  a  "  poetry  of  its 
own,"  and  there  can  be  no  doubt  that  in  the  eyes  of 
a  true  enthusiast  the  sunshine  lights  up  not  only 
the  visible  portions  of  a  piece  of  Chippendale  maho- 
gany, but  seems  to  penetrate  to  its  very  depths. 

In  order  to  detect  a  clever  imitation  of  eighteenth- 
century  hand-painted  furniture  the  collector  must, 
according  to  Mr.  Orrock,  be  something  of  an  artist; 
apart  from  the  colour,  tone,  and  texture  of  the  work 
and  the  softening  effects  of  time,  the  greatest  charm 


OPINIONS  OF  AN  EXPERT  201 

of  the  original  consists  in  the  manner  of  treatment 
— the  special  individuality  of  the  eighteenth-century 
artist — and  this  it  is  which  can  never  be  successfully 
reproduced. 

Mr.  Orrock  is  a  great  believer  in  the  power  exer- 
cised by  one  art  upon  another,  and  traces  the  great 
art  movement  of  the  eighteenth  century  to  the  in- 
fluence of  the  painters,  sculptors,  and  architects 
upon  the  cabinet-makers,  potters,  and  silversmiths. 
Taking  furniture-making  apart  from  its  sister 
crafts,  he  considers  the  work  produced  in  England 
during  this  period  unrivalled  by  that  of  any  other 
nation;  no  foreign  cabinet-work,  in  his  estimation, 
can  vie  with  ours  either  in  design,  carving,  or  other 
ornamentation.  He  also  holds  the  opinion  that 
although  our  craftsmen  undoubtedly  borrowed  from 
Dutch,  French,  Italian,  Gothic,  Chinese,  Greek, 
and  Roman  sources,  they  nevertheless  so  welded 
the  different  styles  together — taking  a  curve  here,  a 
line  there,  altering,  improving,  blending — that  they 
produced  an  entirely  new  and  distinctive  style — 
an  English  style.  Again,  each  of  the  English  schools 
had  such  a  marked  influence  on  those  which  fol- 
lowed, that  it  is  often  very  difficult  to  classify  them 
separately. 

For  the  Queen  Anne  period,  with  its  quaint 
shapes,  so  often  said  to  be  wanting  in  grace,  Mr. 
Orrock  has  nothing  but  praise.  "The  picturesque 
style,"  he  calls  it,  and  its  defects  seem  to  merge  into 


202     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

its  beauties  at  the  spell  of  the  word.  He  quite  nega- 
tives the  theory  that  the  carver  Grinling  Gibbons 
had  any  direct  influence  upon  the  work  of  Chippen- 
dale. He  holds  that  not  only  the  ornamentation 
but  Gibbons's  style  of  carving  is  quite  different 
from  the  work  of  the  Chippendale  school.  Gibbons 
relied  largely  upon  undercutting  for  his  effects,  so 
that  the  portions  in  relief  completely  stand  out  from 
the  mass  to  which  they  belong  and  appear  indeed 
"  to  float  in  a  sea  of  shadow."  His  foliage,  flowers, 
fruit,  and  birds  were  faithful  and  exact  copies  of 
nature;  his  leaves  were  so  lifelike  that  they  were 
said  almost  to  rustle  in  the  wind.  Chippendale 
carving,  on  the  other  hand,  was  often  executed  in 
low  or  semi-relief,  and  the  designs,  as  a  rule,  were 
classic,  architectural,  and  conventional  rather  than 
realistic. 

Mr.Orrock  finds  great  beauty  in  Adam's  designs, 
and  admires  particularly  his  mantelpieces  and  silver 
plate.  In  Adam's  furniture  it  is  the  hand-painting 
of  Angelica  Kauffmann,  Cipriani,  Zucchi,  Pergo- 
lesi,  etc.,  which  attracts  him,  for  although  he  does 
not  place  these  decorative  artists  in  the  highest  rank 
as  painters,  he  thinks  their  work  very  fascinating. 

He  believes  Pergolesi  to  have  designed  a  great 
deal  for  the  various  houses  built  by  Adam ;  chairs, 
cabinets,  mirrors,  and  chandeliers  by  Pergolesi 
should  be  easily  recognized  by  their  florid,  French 
style.  Mr.  Orrock  likes  variety  in  an  Adam  room, 


If   t    , 


iK.  LVII  CABINET   THAT  BELONGED  TO  GEORGE  III. 

To  face  page  203. 


OPINIONS  OF  AN  EXPERT  203 

and  prefers  it  to  be  furnished — as  indeed  is  often 
the  case — with  Hepplewhite,  Sheraton,  Pergolesi, 
and  even  Chippendale  models,  rather  than  ex- 
clusively from  the  designs  of  Robert  Adam  him- 
self. 

Hepplewhite  pieces  are,  in  his  opinion,  more 
elegant  than  those  of  any  other  eighteenth-century 
craftsmen. 

As  a  matter  of  course  Mr.  Orrock  prizes  only 
Sheraton's  earlier  productions — the  delicate  mar- 
quetry and  painted  ornamentation.  He  has  no 
doubt  that  this  great  master  in  satin-wood  designed 
furniture  for  George  III,  Mr.  Orrock  possesses 
two  carved  caskets  as  well  as  a  satin-wood  cabinet, 
which  all  bear  the  inscription  "  G.  R."  (Georgius 
Rex),  either  carved  or  inlaid  in  the  wood.  And  these 
pieces — in  all  probability  looted  from  a  royal  palace 
during  one  of  King  George's  long  illnesses — Mr. 
Orrock  attributes  to  Sheraton  himself.  The  cabinet 
(described  on  p.  161)  is  depicted  in  illustration  LVII. 

Mr.  Orrock's  house  in  Bedford  Square,  built  by 
Robert  Adam  and  with  the  original  Adam  decora- 
tions still  intact,  has  been  for  many  years  the 
fitting  background  for  a  unique  collection  of  eigh- 
teenth-century work.1  The  eye  is  met  at  every 

1  Many  of  the  Orrock  treasures  were  sold  at  Christie's  in  June, 
1904.  The  settee  and  suite  of  eleven  ribbon-back  Chippendale  chairs 
were  sold  for  1,000  guineas.  The  marqueterie  cabinet  with  the  royal 
cipher  G.  R.  fetched  470  guineas.  The  total  collection  of  furniture 
and  china  realized  £20,838. 


204     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

turn  by  paintings  from  the  hands  of  the  great  Eng- 
lish masters  of  that  time — Gainsborough,  Reynolds, 
Lawrence,  Turner,  and  many  others,  with  only  here 
and  there  a  foreign  picture  introduced  by  way  of 
contrast.  All  the  furniture  throughout  the  house — 
including  the  clocks,  mirrors,  and  chandeliers — was 
made  in  English  workshops  of  the  seventeenth  and 
eighteenth  centuries.  On  the  ground  floor — in  the 
hall,  the  dining-room,  the  library,  and  studio — the 
principal  pieces  are  of  walnut  and  mahogany,  and 
represent  the  periods  Queen  Anne,  Chippendale, 
Adam,  and  Hepplewhite.  Some  examples  of  the 
Queen  Anne  furniture  are  illustrated  in  Chapter  I. 
A  Chippendale  bookcase  and  suite  of  ribbon-back 
chairs,  a  dining-room  set  of  shield-back  Hepple- 
white chairs  and  settee,  and  an  Adam  sideboard 
might  be  singled  out  for  their  special  beauty.  On 
the  first  floor  the  great  drawing-rooms  are  literally 
ablaze  with  satin-wood  and  light  painted  pieces. 
The  glitter  and  gorgeous  appearance  of  the  satin- 
wood,  which  in  the  eyes  of  many  connoisseurs 
far  out-rivals  French  gilded  furniture,  can  no- 
where be  seen  to  greater  advantage.  The  chief 
designers  represented  are  Sheraton  and  Pergolesi 
— the  painted  chairs,  settees,  and  cabinets  by  the 
last-named  artist  being  very  noteworthy  examples 
of  his  work.1 

1  The  illustrations  are  reproduced  by  kind  permission  of  Mr. 
Orrock. 


FiK.  LVIII. 

To  face  page  205. 


PERGOLESI  SIDE-TABLE. 


Fig.  LJX.  PERGOLESI  CHINA  CABINET. 

To  face  page  209. 


OPINIONS  OF  AN  EXPERT  205 

The  chairs  shown  in  illustrations  XLVIII  and 
LVIII  are  part  of  a  suite  of  chairs,  side-tables,  and 
cabinet  made  by  Pergolesi  for  the  then  Marquis  of 
Stafford. 

The  framework  is  of  white  painted  wood  orna- 
mented with  gilt  heading,  rosettes  and  foliage  in 
low  relief.  In  these  chairs  the  great  beauty  is  their 
painted  covering — a  classical  design,  carried  out  in 
blue  upon  a  white  silk  ground  and  almost  certainly 
executed  by  the  artist  himself.  After  120  to  130 
years  the  colouring  is  scarcely  dulled  by  the  lapse 
of  time. 

The  side-table  with  china  shelves,  in  illustration 
LVIII,  also  has  a  framework  of  gold  upon  white, 
with  fluted,  turned,  and  tapering  legs  to  correspond 
to  those  of  the  chairs.  A  painted  panel  is  in- 
serted in  the  centre  of  the  front  rail,  and  the  top, 
which  is  of  satin-wood,  has  an  outer  banding  of 
mahogany.  A  floral  design,  forming  a  second  band 
within,  is  painted  in  colours  upon  a  white  ground  ; 
a  style  of  work  especially  characteristic  of  Pergolesi. 
Whereas  Sheraton's  designs  were  nearly  always 
painted  on  the  satin-wood  itself,  Pergolesi  first  laid 
on  a  flat  tint  for  his  ground  and  then  painted  upon 
that. 

The  Pergolesi  cabinet  in  illustration  LIX  also 
belongs  to  the  Stafford  suite,  but  is  of  a  some- 
what different  character  from  the  other  pieces. 
Except  for  the  side  panels,  which  are  of  a  delicate 


206     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

gray-green  shade,  the  ground  is  white.  The  cupboard 
below  curves  outwards  in  a  graceful  sweep,  and  all 
the  proportions  are  extremely  elegant.  The  inspira- 
tion for  this  beautiful  piece  seems  to  have  been 
derived  almost  entirely  from  French  sources;  the 
drapery  upon  the  front  and  side  panels,  the  delicate 
basket  of  flowers,  the  floral  wreaths  and  plants  show 
little  or  nothing  of  the  Adam  influence.  The  frame- 
work is  outlined  with  gilded  mouldings. 

Illustration  LX  depicts  a  cabinet  designed  by 
Pergolesi,  probably  for  a  house  in  Brighton.  The 
general  colour  is  green,  although  the  two  panels 
upon  the  middle  shelf  are  white.  The  three  land- 
scapes and  three  subject-pictures  with  which  the 
cabinet  is  ornamented,  are  dainty  examples  of  the 
hand-painting  of  the  period.  The  quality  and  execu- 
tion of  such  pictures,  which  were  to  have  for  their 
only  setting  the  furniture  they  were  intended  to 
decorate,  is  a  remarkable  proof  of  the  high  esteem 
in  which  cabinet-work  was  held  during  the  eigh- 
teenth century. 

The  ormolu  and  glass  chandelier,  illustration 
LXI,  is  another  example  of  Pergolesi  work.  The 
brass  band  round  the  centre  is  pierced  with  a  graceful 
floral  design.  The  idea  of  glass  drops  hanging  thus 
in  chains  and  festoons  was  in  all  probability  derived 
from  some  very  early  productions  of  the  Venetians 


Fig.  LXI.  PERCOLESI  CHANDELIER. 

To  face  page  206. 


GLOSSARY  OF  TERMS 


Architrave. 
Banding. 
Bead. 
Braces. 

Cabled  flirtings. 


Cabriole. 
Club-foot. 

Cornice. 

Curl. 
Entablature. 

Escutcheon. 

Figure. 
Finials. 
Frieze. 

Hoof-foot. 
Lining  or 

stringing. 
Marquetry. 


The  lowest  mouldings  of  an  entablature. 

Broad  band  of  inlay. 

A  round  moulding. 

Wooden  rails  used  to  bind  the  legs  of  a 
chair  or  table. 

Flutings  filled  in  with  a  convex  bead  to 
about  one-third  of  their  height  from  the 
base. 

A  bent-knee  leg. 

A  thickening  and  slight  shaping  of  that 
part  of  the  leg  which  rests  on  the  ground. 

(In  joinery)  the  projecting  and  crowning 
mouldings. 

The  curled  markings  in  mahogany. 

Those  mouldings  which  include  the  archi- 
trave, frieze,  and  cornice. 

The  ornamental  brass-work  around  a  key- 
hole. 

The  markings  in  wood. 

Terminal  ornaments  or  pinnacles. 

The  flat  portion  of  the  entablature  which 
lies  between  architrave  and  cornice. 

A  horse's  foot  slightly  conventionalized. 

A  fine  line  of  inlay. 

Inlaid  work  with  wood  of  different  colours, 
ivory,  brass,  etc. 

207 


208 


GLOSSARY  OF  TERMS 


Mask.  A  moulded  projection  resembling  a  gro- 

tesque head. 

Mitre.  A  join  at  an  angle  of  45°. 

Ormolu.  Brass  made  to  imitate  gold. 

Patera.  A  circular  ornament  carved  in  relief. 

Patina.  The  bloom  on  the  surface  of  old  wood,  a 

proof  of  age. 

Pediment.  A  triangular  decoration  above  the  cornice. 

Pilaster.  A  square  pillar. 

Pinnacle.  A  small  pointed  top. 

Rabbet  or  A  half  channelling  or  groove  made  in  the 

rebate.  edge  of  a  piece  of  wood  in  order  to 

receive  some  other  piece  of  wood. 
Rail.  A  bar  or  band  of  wood  extending  from 

one  support  to  another. 
Slats.  For  slat-back  chairs,  horizontal  slips  of 

wood  extending  from  one  side  support 

to  another. 
Spandril.  Triangular  space  between  a  redlangle  and 

the  curve  of  an  arch  which  it  incloses. 
Splat.  The  part  of  the  back  of  a  chair  which  lies 

within  the  outer  rails. 
Squab-seat.          Loose,  stuffed  seat. 
Stringing.  See  Lining. 

Tabberay  or        Stout  satin-striped  silk. 

tabaret. 

Therm.  Tapering  (Sheraton's  "  Dictionary  "). 

Veneer.  A  thin  cut  slice  of  superior  quality  wood 

laid  down  and  glued  upon  inferior  wood. 


209 


APPENDIX 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  engravers  employed  by 
Chippendale  in  his  "  Director  " : 

Matthias  Darly. 

I.  and  T.  Miiller. 

Hemerick. 

I.  Taylor. 

I.  Miller. 

B.  Clowes. 

E.  Rooker. 

W.  Foster. 

Morris. 

Hulett. 

Of  these  Darly,  I.  Miiller,  B.  Clowes,  E.  Rooker,  and 
W.  Foster,  were  designers  of  bookplates. 

Those  who  engraved  for  Sheraton  were : 

I.  J.  Newton. 

J.  Barlow. 

•* 

G.  Terry. 
I.  Caldwell. 
Thornthwaite. 
Towes. 
G.  Walker. 
G.  Barrett. 

J.  Barlow,  G.  Terry,  Thornthwaite,  and  Towes,  were 
bookplate  designers. 


210     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 

The  following  is  a  list  of  the  engravers  whose  names 
appeared  in  "The  Works  in  Architecture  of  R.  and  J. 
Adam": 

*F.  Bartolozzi  (1725-1815). 

I.  Miller. 

*E.  Rooker  (1712-1724). 
*P.  Mazell. 

Alex.  Finnic. 

T.  and  C.  White. 

V.  and  B.  Pastorini. 

J.  and  I.  Roberts. 

I.  Zucchi. 

P.  Begbie. 

Nenton. 

T.  Vivarez  (about  1735-1788). 

Dom.  Cunego. 
*R.  Blythe. 

T.  White. 

Caldwall. 

F.  Patton. 
*Ch.  Grignion  (1754-1804),  pupil  of  Cipriani. 

J.  B.  Piranese  (1713-1785). 

J.  Record. 

Norval. 

Roe. 

T.  Morris. 

Romee. 

B.  Malpas. 

Harding. 

Jas.  Caldwall. 
*F.  Jukes  (1746-1812). 

Of  these  both  Rooker  and  Miller  engraved  for  Chippen- 
dale. The  designers  of  bookplates  are  marked  with  a  *. 


INDEX 


ADAM,  R.  and  J.,  79-95. 

Agriculture,  essays  on,  95. 

Adelphi,  86. 

cement,  92. 

"composition  ornaments,"  85. 

Journal,  83. 

Ruins  of  Diocletian's  Palace, 
81. 

Vases  and  foliage,  94. 

Works  in  Architecture,  91,  96. 
Adam  School,  96-105,  202. 

bookcases,  102. 

cabinets,  103. 

chairs,  100. 

mirrors,  103,  116,  117. 

sideboards,  101,  112. 

sofas,  101. 

tables,  102. 

Adelphi.   See  Adam,  R.  and  J. 
Architects,  influence  of,  2,  13,  56, 

98,  104,  20 1. 

Architecture,    works     in.      See 
Adam,  R.  and  J. 

Bartolozzi,  82. 
Bedroom  furniture: 

Chippendale,  74. 

Hepplewhite,  136. 

Sheraton,  162. 
Becket,  Thomas,  28,  88. 


Bevelled  glass,  18,  77,  183. 
Bills,  original  Chippendale,  36, 

108,  119,  1 20. 
Black,  Adam,  on  Sheraton,  143, 

144. 

Blowing  glass,  185. 
Bookcases : 

Adam,  102. 

Chippendale,  68. 

Hepplewhite,  135. 

Shearer,  135. 

Sheraton,  152. 

reproductions,  197,  198. 
Bookplates,  47,  209,  210. 
Borders,  carved,  68. 
Brass  mountings.    See  Mount- 
ings. 

Buckingham,  Duke  of,  glass  fac- 
tory of,  1 8 1,  182. 
Bunbury,  Henry,  47. 

Cabinet  Makers'  London  Book  of 

Prices.  See  Hepplewhite. 
Cabinets : 

Adam,  103. 

Chippendale,  71. 

lacquer,  177. 

Pergolesi,  205,  206. 

Sheraton,  157,  160,  161. 
Cabriole  legs,  1,61,  100. 


211 


212      ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 


Caricatures,  40. 

Carving,  3,   5,  26,  60,  98,    123, 

196,  202. 
Casters  65. 
Chairs : 

Adam,  100. 

Chippendale,  60-65, 126, 203  «. 

grandfather,  or  easy,  10,  64. 

Hepplewhite,  126-130. 

Pergolesi,  205. 

Queen  Anne,  4-10. 

reproductions,  193-197. 

Sheraton,  150-152. 

slat-back,  8. 

three-cornered,  9. 

Windsor,  9. 

Chambers,  Sir  William,  54, 
Chandelier,  206. 
Chests,  14. 
Chinese  influences,  54,  64,  166, 

174- 
Designs,  a  new  book  of.    See 

Darly,  Matthias, 
lacquer,  167,  171,  172. 

Chippendales,  the,  21-38. 
Chippendale  I,  24. 
Chippendale  II,  24-32,  37,  38. 
Chippendale  III,  34-36. 

DireElor,  Gentleman  and 'Cabinet- 
Maker 's,  25,  26,  41,  54,   126, 

175- 

Chippendale  school,  52-78,  202. 
bedroom  furniture,  74. 
bookcases,  68. 
cabinets,  71. 

chairs,  60-65,  126,  203  n. 
clocks,  75,  198,  199. 
cupboards,  68. 


desks,  71,  72. 

doors,  77. 

frames,  76,  77,  120. 

girandoles,  76. 

screens,  73. 

settees,  66. 

shelves,  71. 

sideboards,  66,  67. 

tables,  67,  71,  72. 
Cipriani,  91,  161,  202. 
Classic  revival,  3,  96,  98. 
Claw-and-ball  foot,  origin  of,  4. 
C16risseau,  82,  84. 
Clocks: 

bracket,  15,  17,  76,  164. 

Chippendale,  75,  198,  199. 

lacquer,  17,  167. 

Queen  Anne,  15-17,  199. 

reproductions,  198. 

Sheraton,  163-165. 
Columbani,  91. 
Console-tables.    See  Tables. 
Copland  (or  Copeland),  H.    See 

Lock,  M. 

Cornelys,  Theresa,  33. 
Country  furniture,  I,  10,  II. 
Coverings,  62,  64,  65,  129,  151. 
Cupboards: 

Chippendale,  68. 

corner,  13,  176. 

court,  ii. 

Hepplewhite,  135. 

lacquer,  176,  177. 

Shearer,  135. 

Darly,  Matthias,  39-51,  59. 
Chinese  designs,  by,  41,  54,  59, 
175- 


INDEX 


213 


Ornamental  architect, and  Corn- 
pleat  body  of  Architecture, 
by,  46,  59. 

Sixty  Vases,  by,  45,  59. 
Darly,  Mrs.,  41,  43,  49. 
Designs  for    Household  Furni- 
ture.  See  Shearer. 
Desks,  writing : 
Chippendale,  71,  72. 
Queen  Anne,  n,  12. 
Shearer,  135. 
Sheraton,  155. 

Dictionary,  Cabinet.  See  Shera- 
ton. 

Dining-tables : 
Chippendale,  72. 
Hepplewhite,  131. 
Sheraton,  159. 

Director,  Gentleman  and  Cabinet- 
Maker's.    See  Chippendale. 
Doors : 
Adam,  117. 
Chippendale,  77. 
Drawers,  chest  of.   See  Tall-boy. 
Drawing  Book,  Cabinet- Maker's. 

See  Sheraton. 
Drinking-table,  160. 
Drunkard's  chair,  8. 
Dutch  influences,  i,  3,  n. 

Edwards,  partner  of  Matthias 
Darly,  40, 41,  42,  45. 

Empire,  English,  148,  150. 

Encyclopaedia,  Cabinet-maker's. 
See  Sheraton. 

Evelyn,  John,  168,  181. 

Faked  furniture,  191-201. 


Folding  furniture,  135. 
Frames,  mirror  and  picture  : 

Adam,  103,  116,  117. 

Chippendale,  76,  77, 120. 

Hepplewhite,  131. 

lacquer,  20,  177. 

Queen  Anne,  17-20. 
French  influences,  I,  19,  53,  54, 
63,  96,  100,  125,  148,  150, 
201. 

Garrick,  David,  86,  87-89. 

Gate-tables,  n. 

Gibbons,  Grinling,  3,  5,  7,  18,  60, 

68,  202. 

Gillow,  Richard,  160. 
Girandoles,  76,  132. 
Globes,  103,  104. 
Gothic    influences,    55,    63,   70, 

201. 
Grandfather,  or  easy  chairs.   See 

Chairs. 

clocks.    See  Clocks. 
Grinding  looking-glasses,  186. 
Grotesques,  97. 

Haig,  T.,  partner  of  Chippendale 

(HI),  34- 
Hair-wood,  149. 

Harewood  House, Yorks,  36, 105, 

106-118. 
Hepplewhite,    or    Heppelwhite, 

121,  122,  203. 

Cabinet  Makers'  London  Book 
of  Prices,  121,  123,  134,  135. 
Guide,  Cabinet-Maker's,  121. 
Hepplewhite  School,  121-136. 
bookcases,  135. 


2i4     ENGLISH  FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 


Hepplewhite  School — continued. 

chairs,  126-130. 

cupboards,  135. 

frames,  131,  132. 

girandoles,  132. 

screens,  130. 

sideboards,  132. 

tables,  131. 
Horseshoe  tables.    See  Tables. 

Ince,  W.  See  Mayhew  and  Ince. 
Initials   of  cabinet-makers,  en- 
graved, 153. 
Inlay.    See  Marquetry. 
Irish-Chippendale,  52,  67. 

Japanese  lacquer,  166,  171,  172. 
Japanning,  Hepplewhite,  124. 
Johnson,  Thomas,  38,  56,  198. 

Kauffmann,  Angelica,  91,    115, 

130,  161,  202. 

Kidney-tables.    See  Tables. 
Knife- boxes,  112,  134. 

Lacquer  furniture,  3,  20,  59,  60, 

166-178. 

Chinese,  167,  171,  172. 
English,  1 68,  170,  172-178. 
French,  170,  171. 
Japanese,  166,  171,  172. 
Stalker   and  Parker  on,  166, 

1 68,  172,  174. 
Lanthorn,  hall,  118. 
Lock,  Matthias,  and  H.  Copland 

(or  Copeland),  37,  58. 
Looking-glass  plates,  179-190. 
Low-boys,  15. 


Mahogany,  3,  60,  194. 

Man  waring,  Robert,  57. 

Marquetry,  or  inlay,  3,  99,  149, 
197. 

Martin's  lacquer  varnish,  171. 

Mayhew,  J.,  and  W.  Ince,  56. 

Metal-work.   See  Mountings. 

Mirrors.  See  Frames  and  Look- 
ing-glass plates. 

Mountings,  brass,  ormolu,  gilt- 
bronze,  4,  15,99. 

Painted   furniture,   91,  99,  103, 

124,  149,  151,198,200,205, 

206. 
Pasquin,    Anthony,    in    Darly's 

studio,  47. 
Patina,  193,  195. 
Pembroke  tables.   See  Tables. 
Pergolesi,   Michele  Angelo,  91, 

202,  205,  206. 

Petit-point  embroidery,  64. 
Pickling,  195. 
Pier-tables.    See  Tables. 
Pillarandclawtables.  S^Tables. 
Polishing  looking-glasses,  187. 
Pouch-tables,  158. 
Prince  of  Wales's  feather  chairs, 

128,  129. 

Queen  Anne  School,  1-20,  201. 
chairs,  4-10. 
chests  of  drawers,  14. 
clocks,  15,  199. 
cupboards,  13,  176. 
desks,  writing,  12. 
frames,  17. 
tables,  10,  u. 


INDEX 


215 


Rannie,  J.,  partner  of  Chippen- 
dale (II),  29,  30,  34,  35. 

Reynolds,  Sir  Joshua,  29, 93, 204. 

Rowton  Castle,  Chippendale  at, 
36,  120. 

Satin-wood,   99,   125,   149,   194, 

204. 
Screens : 

Chippendale,  73. 

Hepplewhite,  130. 

Sheraton,  162. 
Shearer,  Thomas,  121,  134. 

Book  of  Prices.    See  Hepple- 
white. 

Designs  for  Household  Furni- 
ture, 134,  135. 

bookcases,  135. 

cupboards,  135, 

desks,  writing,  135. 

dressing-tables,  135. 

sideboards,  133. 
Settees : 

Chippendale,  66. 

Hepplewhite,  130. 

Queen  Anne,  10. 
Sheraton,  Thomas,  137-146. 

Dictionary,   Cabinet,   by,    100, 
141,  142. 

Drawing    Book,    Cabinet- 
maker's, by,  23, 122, 138, 139. 

Encyclopaedia,       Cabinet- 
maker's, by,  143,  145. 
Sheraton  School,  147-165,  203. 

bedroom  furniture,  162. 

bookcases,  152. 

cabinets,  157,  160,  203. 

chairs,  150-152. 


clocks,  163-165. 

desks,  writing,  155. 

screens,  162. 

sideboards,  154. 

tables,  157-160. 
Sideboards : 

Adam,  101,  112. 

Chippendale,  66,  67. 

Hepplewhite,  132-134. 

Shearer,  133. 

Sheraton,  154. 
Silvering   looking-glasses,    179, 

183,  187. 

Slat-back  chairs,  8. 
Society  of  Arts,  29. 
Sofas  and  couches,  10,  101,  151. 
Stourhead,  Bath,  Chippendale  at, 
36,  118-120. 

Tables : 

Adam,  102. 

Card,  n,  72. 

Chippendale,  71-73. 

dining,  11,  72,  131,  159. 

dressing,  15,  74,  135,  136, 162. 

drinking,  160. 

flap,  11,71,  131. 

Hepplewhite,  131. 

horseshoe,  131. 

kidney,  155. 

pembroke,  131,  157. 

pier  and  console,  67,  102,  131. 

pillar  and  claw,  71,  131,  159. 

Queen  Anne,  10,  n. 

reproductions,  197. 

Sheraton,  157-160. 

writing.    See  Desks,  writing. 
Tall-boy,  14,  74. 


216     ENGLISH   FURNITURE  DESIGNERS 


Tambour  doors,  1 36. 
Tea-caddies,  158. 
Three-corner  chairs,  9. 
Townshend,  George,  Marquis,  36, 

42. 
Turning,  10,  11,74,  136. 

Vauxhall  plates,  18,  179,  183. 

Walpole,  Horace,  42,  55,  70. 
Weale,  John,  38. 
Wedgwood,  151. 


Wilkes,  John,  48,  49. 
Window  cornices: 

Chippendale,  113. 

Sheraton,  150. 
Windsor  chairs,  9. 
Wine-coolers,  112,  134. 
Wood,  old,  193,  195,  200. 
Worm-holes,  176,  193. 
Wren,  Sir  Christopher,  2,  178. 

Zucchi,  83,  91,  109,  161,  202. 


CHISWICK    PRESS  :    i'RINTED   BY  CHARLES   WHITT1NGHAM   AND   CO. 
TOOKS  COURT,   CHANCERY  LANE,   LONDON. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
CARDS  OR  SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 

UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO  LIBRARY 


NK  Simon,  Constance 

2529  English  furniture  designers 

of  the  ei^iteenth  century